PCAD Schematic

Schematic Entry
Copyrights
Software, documentation and related materials:
Copyright 2002 Altium Limited
This software product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The distribution and sale of this product
are intended for the use of the original purchaser only per the terms of the License Agreement.
This document may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, reduced or
transferred to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from
Altium Limited.
U.S. Government use, duplication or disclosure is subject to RESTRICTED RIGHTS under applicable
government regulations pertaining to trade secret, commercial computer software developed at private
expense, including FAR 227-14 subparagraph (g)(3)(i), Alternative III and DFAR 252.227-7013 subparagraph
(c)(1)(ii).
P-CAD is a registered trademark and P-CAD Schematic, P-CAD Relay, P-CAD PCB, P-CAD ProRoute, P-CAD
QuickRoute, P-CAD InterRoute, P-CAD InterRoute Gold, P-CAD Library Manager, P-CAD Library Executive,
P-CAD Document Toolbox, P-CAD InterPlace, P-CAD Parametric Constraint Solver, P-CAD Signal Integrity,
P-CAD Shape-Based Autorouter, P-CAD DesignFlow, P-CAD ViewCenter, Master Designer and Associate
Designer are trademarks of Altium Limited. Other brand names are trademarks of their respective
companies.
Altium Limited
www.altium.com
Table of Contents
chapter 1
Introducing P-CAD Schematic

P-CAD Schematic Features ................................................................................................1
About the Users Guide .......................................................................................................2
chapter 2
Installation and Setup

System Requirements .........................................................................................................3
Recommended System ................................................................................................3
Minimum System..........................................................................................................3
Installing P-CAD Products ...................................................................................................4
chapter 3
P-CAD Schematic Basics

About the User Interface......................................................................................................5
P-CAD Schematic Window...........................................................................................5
Menu Bar......................................................................................................................6
Toolbars .......................................................................................................................7
P-CAD Schematic Workspace ...................................................................................10
Prompt and Status Lines ............................................................................................11
Other Window Elements.............................................................................................13
Shortcut Menu Commands.........................................................................................13
Configuration Options........................................................................................................15
Showing or Hiding DataTips.......................................................................................15
Selecting a Default File Viewer ..................................................................................16
Setting the Current Zoom Factor ................................................................................17
Setting the Autopan Percent Display..........................................................................17
Enabling Orthogonal Modes.......................................................................................17
Specifying a Net Increment Value ..............................................................................17
Choosing an ECO Format ..........................................................................................17
Enabling the AutoSave Feature .................................................................................17
Compressing Binary Designs .....................................................................................18
Enabling DDE Hotlinks ...............................................................................................18
Using a Snappy Cursor ..............................................................................................18
Schematic Sheets .............................................................................................................19
Adding a Sheet...........................................................................................................19
Reordering Sheets .....................................................................................................19
Defining the Current Sheet.........................................................................................19
Renaming a Sheet......................................................................................................20
P-CAD Schematic Users Guide
Deleting a Sheet ........................................................................................................ 20

Tracking Nets Across Sheets .................................................................................... 20
Opening Design Files ....................................................................................................... 21
Opening Schematic Files (*.sch) ............................................................................... 21
Opening Multisheet Designs...................................................................................... 21
Opening a Tango Schematic Series II File ................................................................ 21
Opening an ASCII File............................................................................................... 22
chapter 4
Schematic Design Tutorials

Tutorial 1 - Setting Up a Schematic Design ...................................................................... 23
Setting the Workspace Size ...................................................................................... 23
Setting Up a Title Sheet............................................................................................. 24
Choosing a Unit Measurement Scale ........................................................................ 28
Defining Color Preferences ....................................................................................... 28
Setting Up Miscellaneous Display Options ................................................................ 29
Adding a Sheet .......................................................................................................... 29
Setting Up the Grid Spacing ...................................................................................... 30
Zooming In and Out................................................................................................... 31
Tutorial 2 - Working with Schematic Objects .................................................................... 32
Object Placement ...................................................................................................... 32
Selecting Objects....................................................................................................... 46
Modifying Objects ...................................................................................................... 50
Working with Your Design ......................................................................................... 58
Tutorial 3 - Verifying a Schematic Design......................................................................... 63
Design Verification..................................................................................................... 63
Setting up the ERC Options....................................................................................... 63
Viewing any Errors in the Design............................................................................... 65
Fixing Errors in the Design ........................................................................................ 66
Tutorial 4 - Generating Reports and Netlists..................................................................... 69
Generating a Report .................................................................................................. 69
Generating Netlists .................................................................................................... 70
Tutorial 5 - Printing a Schematic Design........................................................................... 72
Setting Up a Printer or Plotter.................................................................................... 72
Setting Up Page Setup Options................................................................................. 73
Setting Up Print Options ............................................................................................ 74
Previewing a Print Job............................................................................................... 75
Generating Printouts and Printing Sheets ................................................................. 76
chapter 5
Working with Objects

Placing Objects................................................................................................................. 78
Placing an Object ...................................................................................................... 78
Selecting Objects.............................................................................................................. 78
Selecting an Object ................................................................................................... 78
Selecting Multiple Objects ......................................................................................... 79
Selecting Part of an Object ........................................................................................ 79
Selecting Collocated Objects..................................................................................... 80
Selecting All Objects.................................................................................................. 80
ii
Selecting Highlighted Objects ....................................................................................80

Selecting a Net ...........................................................................................................81
Selecting Contiguous Net Objects..............................................................................81
Block Selecting Objects..............................................................................................81
Defining Object Selection Preferences ..............................................................................81
Setting the CTRL/SHIFT Behavior .............................................................................81
Specifying a Selection Point.......................................................................................82
Choosing a Selection Color........................................................................................82
Block Selecting a Group of Objects...................................................................................82
Block Selecting Objects..............................................................................................83
Defining Block Selection Criteria ................................................................................83
Moving Objects..................................................................................................................83
Moving an Object .......................................................................................................84
Moving Objects During Placement .............................................................................84
Moving Parts by RefDes.............................................................................................84
Rotating and Flipping Objects ...........................................................................................86
Rotating Objects During Placement ...........................................................................86
Rotating Objects in a Design......................................................................................86
Flipping Objects .........................................................................................................87
Aligning Objects ................................................................................................................87
Aligning Parts Horizontally or Vertically......................................................................87
Aligning Parts To Grid ................................................................................................87
Using Orthogonal Modes...................................................................................................88
Enabling Orthogonal Modes.......................................................................................88
Switching Between Orthogonal Modes.......................................................................89
Switching Between Mode Pairs..................................................................................89
Unwinding Segments .................................................................................................89
Resizing an Object ............................................................................................................89
Cutting and Copying Objects.............................................................................................89
Cutting Objects from a Design ...................................................................................90
Cutting Objects From Nets .........................................................................................90
Copying Objects to the Clipboard...............................................................................91
Copying Objects to a File ...........................................................................................91
Copying Objects within the Same Design ..................................................................91
Copying Nets..............................................................................................................91
Copying a Matrix ........................................................................................................92
Pasting Objects .................................................................................................................92
Pasting Clipboard Objects..........................................................................................93
Pasting From a File ....................................................................................................93
Splitting a Net .............................................................................................................93
Object Properties...............................................................................................................94
Opening a Properties Dialog ......................................................................................94
Editing Nets .......................................................................................................................94
Deleting Objects from Nets ........................................................................................94
Managing Net Connections ........................................................................................95
Using the Edit Nets Dialog .........................................................................................95
iii
chapter 6
Documentation Tools
Title Sheets....................................................................................................................... 98
Design Borders.......................................................................................................... 98
Zones ........................................................................................................................ 99
Title Blocks ................................................................................................................ 99
Using the Global Title Sheet .................................................................................... 100
Using a Standard Title Sheet................................................................................... 100
Creating a Custom Title Sheet................................................................................. 101
Using a Custom Title Sheet ..................................................................................... 102
Revision Blocks .............................................................................................................. 103
Fields and Field Sets ...................................................................................................... 103
Adding a Custom Field ............................................................................................ 104
Placing Fields in a Design ....................................................................................... 105
Changing Field Results ........................................................................................... 105
Adding a Field Set ................................................................................................... 106
Assigning Field Sets to Schematic Sheets .............................................................. 107
Sheet Connector Cross Referencing .............................................................................. 107
Sheet Connector Overview...................................................................................... 107
Annotating Sheet Connectors.................................................................................. 108
Viewing Sheet Connector Properties....................................................................... 110
Jumping to Sheet Connectors ................................................................................. 110
Net Index Tables............................................................................................................. 111
Placing a Net Index Table ....................................................................................... 111
Note Tables .................................................................................................................... 112
Adding Notes to a Note Table.................................................................................. 112
Importing Text Files as Notes .................................................................................. 112
Exporting Notes to a Text File ................................................................................. 112
Placing a Notes Table ............................................................................................. 113
Power and Ground Tables.............................................................................................. 113
Placing a Power Table............................................................................................. 114
Revision Note Tables...................................................................................................... 114
Adding Revision Notes to a Table ........................................................................... 115
Importing Text Files as Revision Notes ................................................................... 115
Exporting Revision Notes to a Text File................................................................... 115
Placing a Revision Note Table................................................................................. 116
Spare Gate Tables.......................................................................................................... 116
Placing a Spare Gate Table .................................................................................... 117
Working with Tables ....................................................................................................... 117
Modifying Tables ..................................................................................................... 117
Updating Tables ...................................................................................................... 118
Reporting on Schematic Designs ................................................................................... 118
Reports Available in P-CAD Schematic ................................................................... 118
Attributes Report...................................................................................................... 118
Bill of Materials Report ............................................................................................ 119
Global Nets Report .................................................................................................. 119
Last Used RefDes Report........................................................................................ 119
Library Contents Report .......................................................................................... 119
Parts Location Report.............................................................................................. 119
iv
Parts Usage Report..................................................................................................119

Generating Reports .........................................................................................................119
Customizing a Standard Report ...............................................................................119
Creating a Custom Report........................................................................................120
Setting Format Options ............................................................................................121
Setting Data Selection Options ................................................................................121
Setting Sort Options .................................................................................................122
Selecting Report Criteria ..........................................................................................122
Generating a Report.................................................................................................123
Generating a Netlist.........................................................................................................124
chapter 7
DDE Hotlinks
Setting up the DDE Hotlinks Feature...............................................................................127
About DDE Hotlinks..................................................................................................127
Enabling DDE Hotlinks .............................................................................................127
Selecting the Current Highlight Color .......................................................................128
Using DDE Hotlinks .........................................................................................................129
Highlighting Parts .....................................................................................................129
Unhighlighting Parts .................................................................................................129
Highlighting and Unhighlighting Attached Nets ........................................................130
Highlighting Nets ......................................................................................................130
Selecting All Highlighted Objects in a Design...........................................................131
chapter 8
Verifying a Schematic Design

Configuring the ERC Feature ..........................................................................................133
Setting up Checks and Severity Levels ....................................................................133
Using ERC Error Annotation............................................................................................135
Finding ERC Errors ..................................................................................................135
Overriding Error Displays .........................................................................................136
Block Selecting Error Indicators ...............................................................................137
Overriding ERC Errors .............................................................................................137
Fixing and Deleting ERC Errors ...............................................................................137
chapter 9
Printing a Schematic
Setting up Printers and Plotters.......................................................................................139
Print Features...........................................................................................................139
Selecting a Printer or Plotter ....................................................................................139
Setting up Print Jobs .......................................................................................................140
Defining Image Options, Image Scale, and a Print Region ......................................140
Setting your Print Options ........................................................................................142
Previewing a Print Job..............................................................................................144
Generating Printouts ................................................................................................144
Override Settings......................................................................................................144
Printing the Current Window ....................................................................................144
Scaling to Fit Page ...................................................................................................145
chapter 10
Design Technology Parameters

Introducing the DTP Feature .......................................................................................... 147
What is DTP? .......................................................................................................... 147
About DTP Files ...................................................................................................... 147
Opening and Creating DTP Files .................................................................................... 148
Opening a DTP File ................................................................................................. 148
Creating a DTP File ................................................................................................. 148
Adding a Group ....................................................................................................... 150
Adding a Section ..................................................................................................... 151
Adding an Item ........................................................................................................ 153
Working with DTP Files .................................................................................................. 153
Browsing the Contents of a DTP File....................................................................... 153
Renaming a Group or Item ...................................................................................... 154
Deleting DTP File Information.................................................................................. 154
Viewing Item Statistics............................................................................................. 155
Updating a DTP Group with Design Information...................................................... 155
Copying DTP Data to a Design................................................................................ 156
Setting up Attribute Handling for Copy Actions........................................................ 158
Item-Specific Information About Copy Actions......................................................... 158
Modifying Item Properties ........................................................................................ 159
chapter 11 Simulating a Circuit Design

Using the P-CAD Circuit Simulator ................................................................................. 164
Configuring the Schematic ...................................................................................... 164
Selecting simulation-ready schematic components ................................................. 164
Setting up the Simulation Analyses ......................................................................... 164
Running a Simulation .............................................................................................. 165
Working with Simulation Waveforms ....................................................................... 166
Troubleshooting simulation problems ...................................................................... 167
chapter 12 File Commands

Using the File Commands .............................................................................................. 169
File New.......................................................................................................................... 169
File Open ........................................................................................................................ 169
File Close........................................................................................................................ 170
File Save......................................................................................................................... 170
Saving a File with ECOs .......................................................................................... 170
Saving an ASCII File ............................................................................................... 171
File Save As ................................................................................................................... 171
Saving a Copy of a File ........................................................................................... 171
File Print ......................................................................................................................... 172
Override Settings Frame ......................................................................................... 173
Page Setup Dialog................................................................................................... 173
Image Options Frame.............................................................................................. 174
Print Region Frame ................................................................................................. 174
Image Scale Frame ................................................................................................. 174
Print Options Dialog................................................................................................. 174
vi
File Print Setup................................................................................................................177

File Reports .....................................................................................................................177
Format Tab...............................................................................................................179
Selection Tab ...........................................................................................................181
Sort Tab ...................................................................................................................182
File Design Info ...............................................................................................................183
General Tab .............................................................................................................183
Fields Tab ................................................................................................................184
Field Properties Dialog .............................................................................................185
Attributes Tab...........................................................................................................185
Notes Tab.................................................................................................................186
Revisions Tab ..........................................................................................................187
Statistics Tab............................................................................................................188
File Design Technology Parameters ...............................................................................188
Design Technology Parameters Dialog ....................................................................188
File DXF In ......................................................................................................................190
Opening a DXF File..................................................................................................190
Items Supported for Translation ...............................................................................192
DXF In Notes............................................................................................................194
File DXF Out....................................................................................................................195
Creating a DXF File..................................................................................................195
DXF Output Considerations .....................................................................................196
File PDIF In .....................................................................................................................197
File PDIF Out...................................................................................................................198
File Exit............................................................................................................................199
chapter 13 Edit Commands

Using the Edit Commands...............................................................................................201
Edit Undo.........................................................................................................................201
Edit Redo.........................................................................................................................202
Edit Cut............................................................................................................................203
Edit Copy.........................................................................................................................203
Edit Copy to File ..............................................................................................................203
Edit Paste ........................................................................................................................204
Paste Behavior .........................................................................................................204
Paste From Clipboard ..............................................................................................205
Paste From File ........................................................................................................205
Paste Circuit.............................................................................................................206
Using Paste Circuit...................................................................................................206
Paste Circuit From File.............................................................................................208
Edit Move By RefDes ......................................................................................................209
Moving Parts by RefDes...........................................................................................209
Searching the RefDes List........................................................................................211
Edit Properties.................................................................................................................211
Right-Click to Select Properties................................................................................211
Double Click to Select Properties .............................................................................212
Part Properties .........................................................................................................212
Symbol Tab ..............................................................................................................213
vii
Symbol Pins Tab ..................................................................................................... 214

Component Tab....................................................................................................... 215
Component Pins Tab............................................................................................... 216
Attributes Tab .......................................................................................................... 218
Wire Properties........................................................................................................ 218
Wire Width ............................................................................................................... 219
Text Styles Button ................................................................................................... 219
Net Tab.................................................................................................................... 219
Bus Properties ......................................................................................................... 220
Port Properties......................................................................................................... 221
Net Tab.................................................................................................................... 221
Pin Properties .......................................................................................................... 222
Pin Name and Pin Designator Properties ................................................................ 224
Line Properties ........................................................................................................ 224
Arc Properties.......................................................................................................... 225
Query Fields ............................................................................................................ 225
Changing Arc Properties ......................................................................................... 225
Polygon Properties .................................................................................................. 226
Text Properties ........................................................................................................ 226
Changing Text Properties ........................................................................................ 227
Attribute Properties.................................................................................................. 228
Component References........................................................................................... 229
Field Properties ....................................................................................................... 230
Query Fields ............................................................................................................ 231
Editable Fields ......................................................................................................... 231
ERC Errors Properties ............................................................................................. 232
Viewing ERC Errors................................................................................................. 232
Replacing Component Types .................................................................................. 233
Edit Delete ...................................................................................................................... 234
Deleting Objects ...................................................................................................... 235
Deleting Objects from Nets...................................................................................... 235
Edit Copy Matrix ............................................................................................................. 236
Duplicating an Object .............................................................................................. 236
Copying Nets ........................................................................................................... 237
Edit Explode Part ............................................................................................................ 237
Edit Align Parts ............................................................................................................... 237
Edit Select All ................................................................................................................. 238
Edit Deselect All.............................................................................................................. 238
Edit Highlight .................................................................................................................. 238
Edit Unhighlight .............................................................................................................. 238
Edit Unhighlight All.......................................................................................................... 238
Edit Select Highlight........................................................................................................ 238
Edit Parts ........................................................................................................................ 239
Parts List Box .......................................................................................................... 239
Set All/Clear All........................................................................................................ 239
Properties ................................................................................................................ 239
Highlight/Unhighlight................................................................................................ 240
Highlight/Unhighlight an Attached Net ..................................................................... 240
viii
Jump ........................................................................................................................240
Edit Nets..........................................................................................................................240
Attributes Dialog .......................................................................................................243
Rename....................................................................................................................244
View Attributes .........................................................................................................245
Highlight/Unhighlight Nets ........................................................................................245
Highlight/Unhighlight Buses .....................................................................................246
Delete.......................................................................................................................246
Select .......................................................................................................................246
Edit Measure ...................................................................................................................246
Using Edit Measure ..................................................................................................246
Edit Select .......................................................................................................................247
Status Line Information ............................................................................................247
Select Commands ....................................................................................................247
Selecting Objects .....................................................................................................248
When Objects Overlap .............................................................................................248
Moving and Copying Objects (Drag-and- Drop) .......................................................248
Resizing Objects ......................................................................................................249
Rotating and Flipping ...............................................................................................249
Edit Properties..........................................................................................................249
Select Contiguous ....................................................................................................249
chapter 14 View Commands

Using the View Commands .............................................................................................251
View Redraw ...................................................................................................................251
View Extent .....................................................................................................................251
View Last.........................................................................................................................251
View All............................................................................................................................252
View Center.....................................................................................................................252
View Zoom Out................................................................................................................252
Minus Key (-) ............................................................................................................252
View Zoom Window.........................................................................................................252
Zooming In with a Zoom Window .............................................................................253
View Jump Location ........................................................................................................253
Jump to a Location ...................................................................................................253
View Jump Text...............................................................................................................254
Jump to Text ............................................................................................................254
View Descend .................................................................................................................255
View Ascend....................................................................................................................255
View Command Toolbar ..................................................................................................256
View Placement Toolbar..................................................................................................256
View Custom Toolbar ......................................................................................................256
View Prompt Line ............................................................................................................256
View Status Line..............................................................................................................257
View Snap to Grid ...........................................................................................................257
ix
chapter 15 Place Commands

Using the Place Commands ........................................................................................... 259
Place Part ....................................................................................................................... 259
Placing a Part .......................................................................................................... 259
Power Components ................................................................................................. 262
Splitting a Net .......................................................................................................... 262
Jumper Pins............................................................................................................. 262
Place Wire ...................................................................................................................... 263
Adding Wires to Nets............................................................................................... 264
Jumper Pins............................................................................................................. 264
Orthogonal Modes ................................................................................................... 264
Place Bus ....................................................................................................................... 265
Status Line Measurements ...................................................................................... 266
Place Port ....................................................................................................................... 267
Display Characteristics ............................................................................................ 267
Placing Ports ........................................................................................................... 267
Hotkeys ................................................................................................................... 268
Placing an Inline Port............................................................................................... 268
Jumper Pins............................................................................................................. 268
Moving Ports............................................................................................................ 268
Renaming Ports....................................................................................................... 269
Modifying a Port's Text Style ................................................................................... 269
Deleting Ports .......................................................................................................... 269
Backward Compatibility ........................................................................................... 269
Place Pin ........................................................................................................................ 269
Place Line....................................................................................................................... 272
Placing a Line .......................................................................................................... 272
Status Line Measurements ...................................................................................... 272
Place Arc ........................................................................................................................ 273
Placing an Arc ......................................................................................................... 273
Changing Arcs ......................................................................................................... 274
Changing an Arc Center Point ................................................................................. 274
Place Polygon................................................................................................................. 274
Draft/Outline Display Mode...................................................................................... 275
Rotate/Flip ............................................................................................................... 275
Altering the Shape ................................................................................................... 275
Place Ref Point ............................................................................................................... 275
Placing a Reference Point ....................................................................................... 275
Place Text....................................................................................................................... 275
Place Text Dialog .................................................................................................... 276
Place Text Features ................................................................................................ 278
Place Attribute ................................................................................................................ 279
Placing an Attribute ................................................................................................. 279
Rotate/Flip ............................................................................................................... 280
Place Field...................................................................................................................... 280
Placing a Field ......................................................................................................... 281
Rotate/Flip................................................................................................................281
Place IEEE Symbol .........................................................................................................282
Placing a IEEE Symbol ............................................................................................282
chapter 16 Rewire Commands

Using the Rewire Command............................................................................................285
Rewire Manual ................................................................................................................285
Using the Rewire Manual Command........................................................................285
chapter 17
Options Commands
Using the Options Commands.........................................................................................287
Options Block Selection...................................................................................................287
Select Mode Frame ..................................................................................................288
Items Frame .............................................................................................................288
Selection Mask Dialogs ............................................................................................288
Selection Mask Parameters .....................................................................................290
Related Topics .........................................................................................................292
Options Configure ...........................................................................................................292
Workspace Size .......................................................................................................293
Title Sheets ..............................................................................................................293
Units .........................................................................................................................293
Orthogonal Modes....................................................................................................294
Net Increment...........................................................................................................294
ECOs........................................................................................................................294
AutoSave..................................................................................................................294
File Viewer ...............................................................................................................295
Zoom Factor.............................................................................................................295
Autopan....................................................................................................................295
Compress Binary Designs........................................................................................295
DDE Hotlinks ............................................................................................................295
Options Grids ..................................................................................................................295
Grid Spacing ............................................................................................................296
Grid Toggle Buttons .................................................................................................296
Visible Grid Style ......................................................................................................296
Relative Grid Origin ..................................................................................................296
Mode ........................................................................................................................297
Options Display ...............................................................................................................297
Colors.......................................................................................................................297
Miscellaneous ..........................................................................................................299
Options Preferences........................................................................................................301
Keyboard Tab...........................................................................................................302
Mouse Tab ...............................................................................................................302
Options Design Rules......................................................................................................303
Design Tab...............................................................................................................303
Clearance Rules.......................................................................................................304
Net Class Tab ..........................................................................................................304
Net Tab ....................................................................................................................307
xi
Class to Class Tab .................................................................................................. 308

Options Net Classes ....................................................................................................... 309
Options Sheets ............................................................................................................... 311
Sheets ..................................................................................................................... 311
Buttons .................................................................................................................... 311
Adding a Sheet ........................................................................................................ 312
Options Current Wire ...................................................................................................... 312
Options Current Line....................................................................................................... 313
Options Text Style .......................................................................................................... 314
Add a Text Style ...................................................................................................... 314
Delete a Text Style .................................................................................................. 315
Rename a Text Style ............................................................................................... 315
Text Style Properties ............................................................................................... 315
Display Stroke and Display TrueType Buttons ........................................................ 317
chapter 18 Library Commands

Using the Library Commands ......................................................................................... 319
Library New .................................................................................................................... 319
Library Alias .................................................................................................................... 320
Creating an Alias ..................................................................................................... 320
Library Copy ................................................................................................................... 321
Copying Symbols/Components ............................................................................... 322
Library Delete ................................................................................................................. 323
Deleting from a Library ............................................................................................ 323
Library Rename .............................................................................................................. 324
Renaming a Symbol/Component............................................................................. 324
Library Setup .................................................................................................................. 325
Drag and Drop File Load ......................................................................................... 325
Setting Up a Library................................................................................................. 325
Library Symbol Save As ................................................................................................. 326
Saving a Symbol...................................................................................................... 326
Library Archive Library.................................................................................................... 327
chapter 19 Utils Commands

Using the Utils Commands ............................................................................................. 329
Utils Renumber ............................................................................................................... 329
Renumbering Reference Designators ..................................................................... 329
Renumbering Pins ................................................................................................... 331
Renumbering Default Pin Des ................................................................................. 332
Utils Force Update .......................................................................................................... 333
Utils ERC ........................................................................................................................ 334
Utils Find Errors .............................................................................................................. 337
Utils Record ECOs.......................................................................................................... 338
Types of ECOs ........................................................................................................ 339
Utils Import ECOs ........................................................................................................... 339
ECO Filename ......................................................................................................... 340
Preview ECOs ......................................................................................................... 340
xii
Utils Export ECOs ...........................................................................................................340

View Pending ECOs.................................................................................................341
Save ECOs Now ......................................................................................................341
Utils Generate Netlist ......................................................................................................342
Utils Rename Net ............................................................................................................343
Renaming a Net .......................................................................................................343
Jumper Pins .............................................................................................................344
Utils Resolve Hierarchy ...................................................................................................344
Utils Module Wizard ........................................................................................................345
Creating a New Module and its Link.........................................................................346
Reusing an Existing Module.....................................................................................348
Utils Shortcut Directory....................................................................................................351
Utils P-CAD PCB.............................................................................................................351
Utils P-CAD Library Executive.........................................................................................352
Utils P-CAD Pattern Editor ..............................................................................................352
Utils P-CAD Symbol Editor ..............................................................................................352
Utils InterPlace/PCS........................................................................................................352
Utils Customize ...............................................................................................................352
Displaying the Custom Toolbar ................................................................................353
Executing a Custom Tool .........................................................................................354
chapter 20 Simulate Commands

Simulate Run...................................................................................................................355
Simulate Setup ................................................................................................................355
chapter 21
DocTool Commands
Using the DocTool Commands........................................................................................357
DocTool Place Table .......................................................................................................357
DocTool Titles .................................................................................................................359
DocTool Notes.................................................................................................................359
DocTool Update ..............................................................................................................359
DocTool Update All .........................................................................................................359
chapter 22 Macro Commands

Using the Macro Commands ...........................................................................................361
Macro Setup ....................................................................................................................361
Setting Up a Macro...................................................................................................361
Macro Record..................................................................................................................362
Macro Recording Tool ..............................................................................................362
Temporary Macro Record (M Toggle Button)...........................................................363
Macro Delete ...................................................................................................................364
Macro Rename................................................................................................................364
Macro Run.......................................................................................................................365
Running Temporary Macros.....................................................................................365
Recording Efficient Macros ......................................................................................365
Macro Features ........................................................................................................366
Macro File Syntax.....................................................................................................367
xiii
chapter 23 Window Commands

Window New Window ..................................................................................................... 373
Window Cascade............................................................................................................ 373
Window Tile .................................................................................................................... 373
Window Arrange Icons.................................................................................................... 373
Window 1,2, .................................................................................................................... 374
chapter 24 Help Commands

P-CAD Schematic Help Topics ....................................................................................... 375
How to Use Help............................................................................................................. 375
Series II Commands ....................................................................................................... 375
About P-CAD Schematic ................................................................................................ 375
appendix a Keyboard Reference

Schematic Keyboard Reference ..................................................................................... 377
appendix b Translating Tango-Schematic Designs

Translation Process ........................................................................................................ 383
Considerations................................................................................................................ 384
Design Practices Considered ......................................................................................... 384
appendix c P-CAD System Messages

Error Messages .............................................................................................................. 387
Warning Messages ......................................................................................................... 392
appendix d The Tango Netlist Format

The Component Section ................................................................................................. 397
The Net Section .............................................................................................................. 398
Index
xiv
........................................................................................................................................ 401
CHAPTER
Introducing P-CAD Schematic

Congratulations on your purchase of P-CAD Schematic! P-CAD Schematic is a complete schematic
design system for Microsoft Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows NT
operating systems.
P-CAD Schematic distinguishes itself with a suite of features that make schematic creation fast and
easy. It includes a powerful combination of placement, editing, and browse tools to quickly achieve
superior design results.
P-CAD Schematic Features

This section highlights some of the key features in P-CAD Schematic:
Powerful placement and editing tools, object resize, multiline unwind, rewire, drag and drop
move, and align.
User-definable sheet, part, and net attributes.
Intelligent wires and buses, which carry net information and attributes.
Comprehensive Electrical Rules Checking (ERC) with error annotation and violations
highlighted on screen.
Support for Design Technology Parameters.
Cross probe between P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB design.
Advanced bi-directional ECO capabilities.
Automatic junction and bus entry placement.
Single mouse-click (Click) access to edit and select options.
Support for hierarchical schematic designs.
Component library data integrated for use in both P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB.
Standard and user-defined schematic sheet sizes.
Chapter 1: Introducing P-CAD Schematic
About the Users Guide
Versatile documentation tools, which include zoned borders, custom title blocks, tables,
annotated sheet connectors, and the ability to track nets between sheets.
Extensive print and report options.
About the Users Guide

This users guide includes the following sections:
Getting Started: This section explains what you what you need to know to get started using PCAD Schematic.
Tutorials: Tutorial chapters provide instructions on creating and navigating a simple schematic
design.
Command Reference: This section provides you with an extensive reference for the menu
commands in P-CAD Schematic.
CHAPTER

This chapter lists the required hardware and software settings you need to install the P-CAD Suite.
System Requirements
Make sure that your PC and its software conform to the following P-CAD requirements and
recommendations.
Recommended System
Windows NT 4/2000 Professional
PC with Pentium III Processor
128MB RAM (256MB for high component/net count)
400MB Hard Disk Space
Desktop area 1024x768 pixels
32-bit Color Palette
CD-ROM Drive
Mouse or compatible pointing device.
Minimum System
Windows 95/98/2000Me
PC with Pentium 166MHz
64MB RAM
200MB Hard Disk Space (without ISO libraries)
Desktop area 800x600 pixels
256 Color Palette
CD-ROM Drive
Mouse.
Chapter 2: Installation and Setup
Installing P-CAD Products
Installing P-CAD Products

For up-to-date installation information refer to the file Readme.WRI, located on the product CD.
This file can also be found in the application program folder (\Program Files\P-CAD 2002)
after installation. Note that the setup program on the Product CD can also be used to Repair or
Remove an existing P-CAD Installation.
CHAPTER
P-CAD Schematic Basics

This chapter introduces many of the basic features you need to know when using Schematic. It
includes general information on such topics as:
About the User Interface
Configuration Options
Schematic Sheets
Opening Design Files

The features in the P-CAD Schematic user interface make it easy to create and modify schematic
designs. The following topics provide you with information the elements in the P-CAD Schematic
graphical user interface.
P-CAD Schematic Window

When you start P-CAD Schematic, a new, untitled P-CAD Schematic window appears. This window
gives you a graphical view of your design and also provides you with the ability to gain access to
numerous features. The following figure shows you this window:
Chapter 3: P-CAD Schematic Basics
Menu Bar
Just below the P-CAD Schematic title bar lies the menu bar, which gives you the ability to gain
access to a variety of P-CAD Schematic functions. You can choose a command from one of these
menus to perform the actions associated with that command. The following figure shows you the
menu bar:
If you minimize the P-CAD Schematic window, the menu bar wraps. In contrast, other window
elements become truncated when you minimize the window. To learn how to minimize a window,
see Close, Minimize, and Maximize Buttons (page 13).
Opening a Menu
To open a menu, click the menu title or hold down the ALT key and press the underscored letter in
the menu title. For example, press ALT+F to open the File menu.
Choosing Menu Commands

When you open a menu, you can gain access to the functions associated with a command by
clicking the command or by pressing the underscored letter in the menu and command titles. For
example, press ALT+F+O to choose File Open. When an ellipsis follows a command (e.g., File
Open...), a dialog box appears.
If a menu command is shaded, the function associated with that command is not available.
Typically, you must perform another type of action for the command to become available. For
example, if the Edit Paste command is shaded, you must first select the component you want to
paste and then choose Edit Cut or Edit Copy.
Toolbars
You can gain access to various toolbars in the P-CAD Schematic window. Each of toolbar contains a
set of buttons that act as shortcuts for frequently used menu commands.
Command Toolbar (page 8)
Placement Toolbar (page 8)
Custom Toolbar (page 9)
DocTool Toolbar (page 9)
Showing or Hiding a Toolbar

To show or hide a toolbar, click one of the toolbar commands in the View menu. When a check
mark appears in front of one of these commands, the corresponding toolbar is visible. The
following illustration shows you View Command Toolbar as a checked command:
Moving a Toolbar
To move a toolbar, click a docked toolbar or click the title bar of a floating toolbar. Then, drag the
toolbar to a new position. You can dock a toolbar below the P-CAD Schematic title bar or on the
left or bottom edge of the window.
A toolbar is a docked toolbar when you use a drag-and-drop operation to snap it to the edge of the
P- CAD Schematic window. It does not have a title bar, as shown in the following figure:
A floating toolbar has a title bar and is not attached to the edge of the program window, as shown
in the following figure:
Command Toolbar
The buttons in the Command toolbar, act as shortcuts for frequently used menu commands. To
show or hide this toolbar, choose View Command Toolbar. When a check mark appears next to
this menu command, the following Command toolbar is visible:
The following table describes each button in the Command toolbar:

Click this
button
As a shortcut for choosing

this command
Click this
button

this command
Edit Select
Edit Paste
File New
Edit Undo
File Open
Rewire Manual
File Save
Utils Rename Net
File Print
Edit Measure
Edit Cut
View Zoom Window
Edit Copy
Utils Record ECOs
Placement Toolbar
The buttons in the Placement toolbar act as shortcuts for frequently used Place menu commands.
To show or hide this toolbar, choose View Placement Toolbar. When a check mark appears next
to this menu command, the following Placement toolbar is visible:
The following table describes each button in the Placement toolbar:

Click this
button

this command
Click this
button

this command
Place Part
Place Polygon
Place Wire
Place Point
Place Bus
Place Text
Place Port
Place Attribute
Place Pin
Place Field
Place Line
Place IEEE Symbol
Place Arc
Custom Toolbar
You can add your own buttons to the custom toolbar, which provides you with access to frequently
used software programs or other documents. For example, you can add a button that gives you
quick access to Notepad or Internet Explorer. For instructions, see Utils Customize (page 352).
Once youve added buttons to the Custom toolbar, you can show or hide it in the P-CAD Schematic
window by choosing View Custom Toolbar. When a check mark appears next to this menu
command, the following Custom Tools toolbar is visible:
DocTool Toolbar
The buttons in the DocTool toolbar act as shortcuts for frequently used DocTool menu commands.
To show or hide this toolbar, choose View DocTool Toolbar. When a check mark appears next to
this menu command, the following DocTool toolbar is visible:
The following table describes each button in the DocTool toolbar:

Click this
button

this command
Click this
button

this command
DocTool Place Table
DocTool Update
DocTool Titles
DocTool Update All
DocTool Notes
P-CAD Schematic Workspace

The workspace is the logical design area within the P-CAD Schematic window. When you start
P-CAD Schematic, the full extent of the workspace is shown. As shown in the following figure, the
edges of the grid display determine the edges of the P-CAD Schematic workspace.
When you start P-CAD Schematic, the workspace contains a single schematic sheet. A schematic
design can require multiple sheets, to show the connection of the parts on the board. To learn
about sheets, see Schematic Sheets (page 19).
On the schematic sheet, a title sheet displays by default. As shown in the previous figure, a title
sheet contains a design border, zones, and a title block by default. To learn about title sheets, see
Title Sheets (page 98).
10
Prompt and Status Lines

Just below the P-CAD Schematic workspace lays the prompt line and status line. To show or hide
the prompt line or status line, choose View Prompt Line or View Status Line.
Prompt Line
The Prompt Line displays various messages that instruct you as to what actions you can perform
when a particular tool is enabled.
Status Line
Just below the prompt line lies the Status Line, which contains various features that give you more
control over you P-CAD Schematic workspace.
The following sections describe each element of the P-CAD Schematic status line.
X and Y Coordinate Boxes
The X and Y Coordinate boxes on the status line display the position of the mouse pointer as you
move it over the workspace. To move the pointer to a specific location on your workspace, type an
X and Y co-ordinate in the boxes.
Grid Toggle Button
Click the Grid Toggle button to switch between your absolute and relative grid settings. When you
click this button, the buttons label changes to indicate whether you can switch to your absolute or
relative grid settings.
Click
to switch to absolute grid mode. When active, the button background is white.
Click
to switch to relative grid mode. When active, this button background is colored.
Grid Combo Box

Use the Grid Combo box to select a new grid and to add grids to your design. To add a grid, type a
value in the box and press ENTER. The new grid becomes the current grid.
11
As a shortcut for selecting items from the box, you can press the following keys:
Press G to scroll forward through the list.
Press SHIFT+G to scroll back through the list.
Macro Record Button

To create and record macros on the fly, click the M button on the status line. When you click this
button, the button background changes to colored, and the macro recording process begins. After
you record a series of actions, click the M button again to stop recording.
When you record a macro with this button, P-CAD Schematic names the macro Sch_default.mac
and saves the file in the Macro folder in your PCAD installation directory by default. To learn more
about this feature, see Macro Record (page 362).
Sheet List Box and Scroll Buttons
Use the Sheet List and Scroll box as a shortcut for choosing Options Sheets. To make a sheet the
current sheet in view, select a sheet from the list. To scroll through all enabled sheets, click the
arrow buttons on the scroll box.
As a shortcut, you can also press the L key to scroll through the sheets in descending order. To
scroll through the sheets in ascending order, click the down arrow or press SHIFT+L.
Line Width List
The Line Width combo box shows a list of available line widths. Because this is a combo box, you
can select an existing line width or type a custom width in the box.
As a shortcut for selecting a line width from the box, you can press the W key to scroll forward
through the list. Or, press SHIFT+W to scroll back through the list.
You can also set line widths by choosing Options Current Line. For more information, see
Options Current Line (page 313).
Status Line Information Area
The Status Line information area displays information relevant to the action you are currently
performing. The status line shows the following types of data:
12
Identifies selected objects either specifically (type or reference designator) or generally

(number of items selected).
The delta X and delta Y measurements of objects being moved or line segments being
stretched.
The net name of selected nets.
Results of the Edit Measure command.
The next part being placed while placing parts.
Other Window Elements

As with most Windows-based products, the P-CAD Schematic window contains other elements:
Close, Minimize, and Maximize Buttons

Every P-CAD Schematic window has three buttons in the upper-right corner. You can click one of
the following buttons to perform one of these actions:
Click
to close the window and quit the P-CAD Schematic program.
Click
to minimize the window.
Click
to maximize the window.
Scroll Bars
Two scroll bars surround the P-CAD Schematic workspace. You can click the scroll arrows to move
the workspace up and down, or to the left and right. You can also drag the scroll box to move
through the workspace.
Shortcut Menu Commands

When you right-click an object that has been placed in a design, a shortcut menu appears. This
menu contains commands that can be performed on the selected object(s). The following table
describes these commands:
Choose this shortcut
menu command
To perform this action
Add to Net
A shortcut to connect a parts sub-selected pin to an existing net.
Add Vertex
A shortcut to add a vertex to a single selected line/line segment.
Align
A shortcut for Edit Align Parts. Parts can be aligned around a

selection point either horizontally or vertically, and as an option,
equally spacing the parts. For details, see Edit Align Parts (page 237).
Ascend
A shortcut for View Ascend. Ascends the hierarchy of the design

from the selected link to the corresponding module. For details, see
View Ascend (page 255).
Copy Matrix
A shortcut for Edit Copy Matrix. Duplicates selected objects based

on parameters you choose. For details, see Edit Copy Matrix (page
236).
Copy
A shortcut for Edit Copy. Allows you to copy the object to the
clipboard.
13

menu command
14
Cut
A shortcut for Edit Cut. Allows you to cut the object to the
clipboard. For information, see Edit Cut (page 203).
Delete
A shortcut for Edit Delete. This command deletes selected objects.

For details, see Edit Delete (page 234).
Descend
A shortcut for View Descend. Descends the hierarchy of the design

from the selected module to the corresponding link. For information,
see View Descend (page 255).
Edit Nets
A shortcut for Edit Nets. This command brings up the Edit Nets
dialog with the nets containing the selected objects highlighted in
the Net List box. See Edit Nets (page 240) for more information.
Explode
A shortcut for Edit Explode Part. This command allows you to

convert a symbol back to its basic primitives, creating a collection of
editable graphic objects. See Edit Explode Part (page 237) for details.
Highlight
A shortcut for Edit Highlight. This command highlights the selected

objects in the current highlight color set in the Colors tab of the
Options Display dialog. For information, see Options Display (page
297). It also highlights the corresponding items (for nets and
components) in P- CAD PCB if the DDE Hotlinks check box in the
Options Configure dialog is selected. For information, see Options
Configure (page 292).
Highlight Attached
Nets
Highlights nets attached to the selected objects in the current

highlight color. For information, see Options Display (page 297).
Net Info
Opens a read-only dialog containing information about the selected

net.
Properties
A shortcut for Edit Properties. Depending on the object(s) selected,

the appropriate Edit Properties dialog appears. For information, see
Edit Properties (page 211).
Remove from Net
Disconnects a parts sub-selected pin from the net.
Select Contiguous
Selects all ports and wires in the design visually connected to the
selected item.
Select Net
Selects all items in the net to which the selected item is connected.
Selection Point
Relocates a selection point for the selected object or objects.
Unhighlight
A shortcut for Edit Unhighlight. This command removes the

highlighting from the selected objects. For information, see Edit
Unhighlight (page 238).

menu command
Unhighlight Attached
Nets

Removes the highlighting from nets attached to the selected objects.
With P-CAD Schematic, you can use various features and tools only after you set them up properly.
The topics in this section show you how to set up the following configuration options for P-CAD
Schematic.
Showing or Hiding DataTips

A Data Tip shows context-sensitive information about buses, pins, symbols, and wires. To show or
hide DataTips in your workspace, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Options Display to open the Options Display dialog.
2.
Click the Miscellaneous tab.
3.
Choose one of these options:
To show DataTips, select the Show DataTips check box.
To hide DataTips, clear the Show DataTips check box.
15
The Large Cross cursor style and the View Snap to Grid command do not support the
DataTips feature. Enabling the Large Cross cursor style clears the Show DataTips check box and
makes the feature unavailable. Enabling the View Snap to Grid command disables the Show
DataTips feature.
4.
Click OK to close the Options Display dialog.
When the DataTips feature is turned on, you can view a Data Tip by placing the mouse cursor over
an object in your design.
Selecting a Default File Viewer

In P-CAD Schematic, the default file viewer is used for viewing reports; log files, error reports, etc.
To select a file viewer, do the following:
1.
Choose Options Configure to open the Options Configure dialog.
2.
Type the program name in the File Viewer box. For example, type: Notepad
If the program you want to use as the default file viewer is in a directory that is not included in
your system's path statement, type the pathname in the File Viewer box.
16
3.
Click OK to close the Options Configure dialog.
Setting the Current Zoom Factor

The current zoom factor is a value that determines the apparent enlargement of objects when you
zoom in or zoom out on a design. To set the current zoom factor, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Enter a value in the Zoom Factor box.

You must enter a zoom factor that is greater than 1.00 (i.e., 1.01 or greater).
3.
To learn how to zoom in and out on a design, see View Commands (page 251).
Setting the Autopan Percent Display

The autopan percent display controls the process of panning across your design. For example, an
autopan of 25% moves anything at the edge of the screen 25% closer to the center of the screen.
To set the autopan percent display, follow these steps from the Options Configure dialog:
1.
2.
Enter a number in the Autopan% Display box.
3.
Enabling Orthogonal Modes

You can use orthogonal modes when you place horizontal and vertical segments for wires, buses
and lines. In P-CAD Schematic, the 90/90 and 45/90 modes are enabled by default. To learn more
about orthogonal modes, see Aligning Objects (page 87).
Specifying a Net Increment Value

A net increment value defines the step value for incrementing net names when you use CTRL/Drag
Copy and Edit Copy Matrix commands. A value of 1 appears in the Net Increment Value box by
default. To learn more about the increment value, see Options Configure (page 292).
Choosing an ECO Format

You use the controls in the ECO Format frame to choose a format for ECO files. In P-CAD
Schematic, the ECO Format button is selected by default.
Enabling the AutoSave Feature

The AutoSave feature creates backup files of your current design at intervals you define. To enable
the AutoSave feature, follow these steps:
1.
17
2.
Select the Enable AutoSave check box.
3.
Notice that the Purge Previous Backups check box is selected by default. This option causes all
backups saved from the previous design session to be deleted when you begin a new design
session
4.
To turn the AutoSave feature off, clear the Enable Auto Save check box.
5.
When enabled, AutoSave wont be performed during auto-routing or if a tool is busy.
Compressing Binary Designs

Typically, compressed files take up less storage space. To automatically compress a binary file when
you save it, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the Compress Binary Designs check box.
3.
Enabling DDE Hotlinks

The DDE hotlinks feature gives you the ability to create a connection between two related design
files created in separate P-CAD programs. With this feature, you can explore the relationships
between designs when you run the following programs:
P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB/Relay
P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB Viewer.
With DDE Hotlinks, you can update information in one design and the feature automatically
updates the same information in a related design. For example, you could apply the current
highlight color to a part in a Schematic design and the DDE Hotlinks feature updates the related
part in P-CAD PCB. Or, when you highlight a net in a PCB design, the DDE Hotlinks feature
highlights the corresponding net in a related Schematic design.
To enable this feature, choose Options Configure and then select the DDE Hotlinks check box.
Using a Snappy Cursor

Choose View Snap to Grid to turn the snappy cursor on and off. When a check mark precedes the
command, a snappy cursor moves from grid point to grid point. When the command is not
checked, a free-floating cursor moves freely between grid points.
A snappy cursor can create a predictable point of reference when you move and rotate objects or
measure distances. A free-floating cursor can enhance your ability to select items in the workspace,
such as when you want to select a line that does not run true along grid points.
The View Snap to Grid command does not support the DataTips feature. When View Snap to
Grid is a checked command, the DataTips feature is disabled by default.
18
Schematic Sheets
Your current View Snap to Grid setting (on or off)is saved in the Sch.ini file when you quit the
program.
Schematic Sheets
A schematic design can be a single sheet or multi-sheet design. When you start P-CAD Schematic, a
new, untitled design window contains a single sheet. In this section, youll find instructions that
show you how to perform the following tasks:
Adding a Sheet
To add a sheet to a design, do the following:
1.
Choose Options Sheets to open the Options Sheets dialog.
2.
Type a name for the sheet in the Sheet Name box. For example, type: Sheet2
When you add a sheet, you must give it a unique name.

3.
Click Add. The new sheet name appears in the Sheets list.
When you add a sheet to a design, P-CAD Schematic automatically assigns the sheet a sequential
sheet number, which represents the order in which the sheet appears in the Sheets List.
Reordering Sheets
To reorder the sheets in a design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the sheet you want to move from the Sheets list.
3.
Click Move Up or Move Down.
When you move the sheet to a different position in the Sheets list, the sheet number adjusts
accordingly.
Defining the Current Sheet

To define the current sheet, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the sheet that you want to define as the current sheet from the Sheets list.
3.
Click Current. The asterisk (*) moves to the sheet you selected, to indicate that it is now the
current sheet.
The current sheet is the sheet that is actively in view. As a shortcut, you can also define the current
sheet by selecting a sheet from the Sheets list in the status line. For details, see Status Line (page
11).
19
Schematic Sheets
Renaming a Sheet
To change a sheet name, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the sheet that you want rename from the Sheets list.
3.
Type a new name for the sheet in the Sheet Name box.
4.
Click Modify. The sheet name changes in the Sheets list.
Deleting a Sheet
To delete the current sheet, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the sheet that you want to delete from the Sheets list.
3.
Click Delete. The sheet name no longer appears in the Sheets list.
Tracking Nets Across Sheets

P-CAD Schematic includes a combination of features with which you can track nets between sheets
of the design. To print a net tracked between the sheets in a schematic design, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Edit Nets to open the Edit Nets dialog.
2.
Select the desired net in the Net Names box. The sheets on which the net appears are
automatically selected in the Sheets box.
3.
Click Highlight to highlight the selected net.
4.
Click Print Sheets to open the File Print dialog.
5.
In the File Print dialog, click Print Options to open the Print Options dialog.
6.
Select the Print Highlighted Wires/Buses as Haloed check box. This option distinguishes these
highlighted nets in your print output.
7.
Click OK to return to the File Print dialog.
8.
Select the Tile Sheets check box to consolidate all of the net's sheets onto a single printed
page.
9.
To view the tiled sheets of the tracked nets on the screen, click Print Preview.
10. To send the tiled sheets of the tracked nets directly to the printer, click Generate Output.
20

You can open files that have been saved as Schematic Files (*.sch), Tango Series II ASCII Files
(*.s01), and P- CAD CFG Files (*.cfg). As a shortcut for opening files with the File Open
command, you can also use one of the following methods:
Use a drag-and-drop operation to open a Schematic File (*.sch). To do so, drag a file from the
Windows Explorer or File Manager and drop it on the P-CAD Schematic window.
To open a recently used file, click one the file names that appear below the Exit command in
the File menu.
When you open files that were created in the Schematic Version 3.05 or earlier, P-CAD Schematic
merges any global and local attributes in the file.
Opening Schematic Files (*.sch)

In P-CAD Schematic, design files saved in the Binary or ASCII format are given the *.sch file name
extension by default. To open a *.sch file, follow these steps:
1.
Choose File Open to display the Open dialog.
2.
Select Schematic Files (*.sch) from the Files of Type list.
3.
Select the file that you want to open.
4.
Click Open. Schematic opens the .sch file. As the file loads, several messages appear to
indicate the systems progress.
If an error or warning condition occurs when you open a file, P-CAD Schematic creates a log file
<Design-name.log. A message box also prompts you to view this file. When you click OK, the log
file appears in the Notepad by default. For details about possible error or warning conditions, see
Appendix C, P-CAD System Messages.
Opening Multisheet Designs

If youre opening a Design.cfg file, Schematic translates all the PDIF files into a single multi-sheet
design. Schematic also preserves the name of the *.cfg file you loaded. In the design, each sheet
has its own window. To switch between sheet windows, select the desired sheet from the Sheet
Display combo box on the status line.
Opening a Tango Schematic Series II File

The File Open command can read schematics in Tango Series II ASCII format. In Tango Series II,
each sheet in a design is saved as a separate file. When you open the first sheet file in a Series II
design, a dialog appears asking you if you want all subsequent sheets in the Series II design
converted into a single design file.
21
Before loading a Tango Series II file, you must do the following:
1.
Create a corresponding archived library containing all of the symbols found in your P-CAD
Schematic designs.
2.
Translate the archived Tango Series II library into a component/symbol library by choosing the
Library Translate command in P-CAD 2002 Library Executive.
Some cleanup may be necessary due to design complexity and interpretation differences due to
ambiguous design practices.
Opening an ASCII File

P-CAD Schematic supports the import and export of ASCII files, which contain complete design
information. This is useful to archive and restore designs in a readable format.
After a file is saved in ASCII format, other utilities may be used to perform these alterations:
Translation of design data from P-CAD Schematic to other design tools, and vice versa.
Automated modification of schematic designs with custom designs.
Interactive manual user modification of design data with text editing tools.
Errors and warnings generated while opening an ASCII file are written to a file named <designname.log, which automatically appears in the Notepad.
22
CHAPTER
Schematic Design Tutorials

This chapter contains the following five tutorials that will take you through a Schematic design
session from setup to printing:
Setting up a Schematic Design
Working with Schematic Objects
Generating Schematic Reports and Netlists
Printing a Schematic Design.
Tutorial 1 - Setting Up a Schematic Design

P-CAD Schematic provides you with a number of workspace options. This tutorial will show you
how to configure various options for the P-CAD Schematic workspace, such as workspace size, title
sheets, display options, measurements and grids. This tutorial uses some demonstration files that
are supplied with P-CAD.
For more information about the topics in this tutorial, press F1 for online Help, or refer to the
relevant chapters in this Users Guide.
Setting the Workspace Size

The workspace is the logical design area within the P-CAD Schematic window. To choose a size for
the workspace:
1.
Start P-CAD Schematic. An empty workspace named Untitled1 is displayed.
2.
23
Chapter 4: Schematic Design Tutorials
3.
In the Workspace Size frame, choose A.

The A-size workspace is the smallest of the predefined sheet sizes. For the design in this
tutorial, an A-size drawing is adequate. However, if this becomes too small, open the Options
Configure dialog and choose another size. You can switch to a smaller sheet at any time, as
long as all of the objects in your schematic fit within the area.
4.
Setting Up a Title Sheet

A title sheet can consist of a design border, zones and a title block. We will set up an A-sized global
title sheet for all the sheets you will create within a design session. You can also select different title
sheets for different sheets in a design by choosing the Custom sheet option. This option will
override the global default title sheet for each selected sheet.
Standard title sheets (filename.ttl) are supplied with P-CAD Schematic in the Titles folder of
your P-CAD installation directory. The title blocks supplied can only be changed, e.g. if you want
another text size or font, by modifying the original .ttl file. You may wish to create your own title
sheets later by modifying one of these files and saving it as a new .ttl file.
For more information about title sheets, refer to Options Commands, (page 287).
24
To set a global title sheet that will be automatically applied to all new sheets in your design:
1.
Open the Options Sheets dialog using one of the following methods:
Choose Options Configure to open the Options Configure dialog. In the Title Sheets
frame, click Edit Title Sheets.
Choose Options Sheets. Then, click the Titles tab.
Choose DocTool Titles.
2.
Select Global from the Sheets list box.
3.
Select Display Border. Notice that the border dimensions have automatically adjusted to allow
500mil (.5 inch) between the edge of your workspace and the edge of the border.
4.
Set up the zones that display in the border as reference marks. Type 4 in both # of Zones boxes
to create four zones in both horizontal and vertical directions and select Annotate Zone
Information.
5.
Now we can select a title block that has been supplied with P-CAD with text fields already
inserted for your design information. Click on Select in the Title Block frame to choose the
filename of an existing title block. The Open Title Block dialog displays.
25
26
6.
Navigate to the P-CAD Titles directory. Select ADT_AB.ttl and click Open to return to the
Options Sheets dialog. The file name ADT_AB.ttl appears in the Title Block frame.
7.
Within the title block we selected in the step above, there are design information fields that
display the values you enter in their appropriate place. When corresponding design
information has been entered for a field, a field result appears in place of the field code, e.g.
Schematic Design 1 replaces {Title}. To change the field codes into relevant design information
in the title block, click Fields to display the Design Info dialog.
8.
Select a field name you wish to include in the title block, e.g. Title, click on Properties and
enter the value in the Field Properties dialog, e.g. Schematic Design 1, and click OK.
9.
Repeat the step above for all required fields, e.g. Drawing Number, Revision and Drawn By,
and click on Close to complete and return to the Options Sheets dialog.
10. Click Modify to apply the changes and then Close. If you return to the Options Configure
dialog, click OK to close this dialog. The title sheet, border, and title block, with the design
information entered, now appear in the workspace, as shown below.
You can change the design information at any time by choosing File Design Info and clicking
the Fields tab to display the Fields Properties dialog.
11. Now we have set up our title sheet, lets save the design file by choosing File Save. In the Save
As dialog that appears, name your schematic Design1.sch and save it in the folder of your
choice.
If the last saved title block is displaying when opening a new file and you do not wish to use it,
remove the title block file from the Title tab of the Options Sheets dialog by clicking Remove,
then Modify and Close. Close all open design files until a blank untitled workspace is left, exit
P-CAD and then restart P-CAD Schematic before choosing File New.
27
Next we will set up the other workspace options that will be saved with this file.
Choosing a Unit Measurement Scale

In P-CAD Schematic, you can display units in mils, mm, or inches. To choose a unit measurement
scale:
1.
2.
In the Units frame, choose mm or inch. Notice that the Width and Height values in the
Workspace Size frame change as P-CAD Schematics 32-bit database converts all data to the
measurement scale you choose.
3.
Choose mil in the Units frame and click OK to close the Options Configure dialog.
Defining Color Preferences

You can define a background color, distinguishing colors for different objects and more using the
options in the Options Display dialog.
28
1.
Choose Options Display to open the Options Display dialog and click the Colors tab.
2.
Click a button in the Item Colors or Display Colors frame to open a color
palette.
3.
Click the color swatch in the palette that you want displayed and you are
returned to the Options Display dialog. The color you chose displays next to
the Item or Display button.
4.
From this Colors tab you can also change the junction size and bus connection
mode. For this tutorial, we will use the default settings, so click Defaults and leave the Options
Display dialog open.
Setting Up Miscellaneous Display Options

To set up miscellaneous display options, follow these steps from the Options Display dialog.
1.
2.
Select the following check boxes in the Miscellaneous frame:
Display Default PinDes
Display Open Ends
Display Part Gate Number
Scroll Bars
Show Data Tips.
3.
To show the ERC error indicators in your design, select Show in the ERC Errors frame.
4.
Choose Arrow in the Cursor Style frame and click OK to close the dialog.
Adding a Sheet
A design will always have one sheet open. You can add additional sheets at any time during a
design session. To add a sheet to a design:
1.
Choose Options Sheets to open the Options Sheets dialog and click on the Sheets tab.
29
2.
Type Sheet2 in the Sheet Name box and click Add. Sheet2 appears in the Sheets list box.
3.
Select Sheet1 in the Sheets list box. If an asterisk (*) does not appear next to Sheet1, click
Current to define Sheet1 as the current sheet.
4.
Click Close to exit the dialog. Notice that Sheet2 has been added to the list box on the status
line at the bottom of the screen.
5.
You can switch between sheets easily by selecting the required sheet name from the Sheet list
box on the status line, or clicking on the empty box next to it to display the Options Sheets
dialog and selecting the current sheet, or using the up and down arrows to scroll through the
sheet list.
Setting Up the Grid Spacing

You can set up a new grid spacing at any time during a design session. To add some new grids to
your design, such as a 50 mil and a 25 mil spacing:
1.
30
Choose Options Grids to open the Options Grids dialog.
2.
Type 50 in the Grid Spacing box and click Add. 50.0 is selected in the Grids list box.
3.
Select Visible and Dotted in the Visible Grid Style frame. Select Absolute in the Mode frame
and click OK to close the dialog. A dotted 50.0 mil grid appears in the workspace.
4.
Another way to change the grid is to type the new grid spacing into the Grid Select list box on
the status line. Type 25 and press ENTER to add the 25.0 grid spacing to the list. The 25.0 mil
grid appears in the workspace.
5.
To switch between the grid spacings you just created, select 50.0 from the Grid Select list box
on the status line to switch to the 50.0 mil grid.
6.
Choose File Save to save the settings you have chosen during this tutorial.
Zooming In and Out

You can use a number of commands to zoom in and zoom out on the schematic workspace.
1.
Rest the mouse pointer over the area you wish to view. Press the + key to zoom in on your
design. To zoom out, press the - key.
2.
Create a zoom window by choosing View Zoom Window or clicking

in the command
toolbar. Draw a bounding outline around the region of the design you want to zoom in on.
P-CAD Schematic zooms in on the region you select.
3.
Choose View Extent to view the extent of your design, that is, any objects placed.
4.
Choose View All to view the entire workspace, including the title border.
This concludes Tutorial 1. Please refer to Tutorial 2 to investigate working with Schematic objects.
31
Tutorial 2 - Working with Schematic Objects

In this tutorial Working with Schematic Objects, we will explore how to place the objects that
make up a schematic design, such as parts, wires, buses and ports. Off sheet connectors are also
investigated to show you how to place and connect parts and nets across sheets. Once we have
practiced some of the placement commands, well look at the various ways of selecting placed
objects and modifying their properties and finish with some useful commands for working with
nets and attributes.
relevant chapter in this Users Guide.
Object Placement
Placing Parts and Components
This section shows you how to place parts in your schematic design. A component contains logical
and electrical data and can have one or more parts. A symbol shows a graphical representation only
of the component and is used to display a part in a schematic design.
Opening a Library
A P-CAD library contains component and symbol information. Before you can place components or
symbols in a schematic design, you must open the libraries that contain the parts you want to use.
To set up a library to use:
32
1.
Open Design1.sch created in tutorial 1, or create a new schematic design file by choosing
File New.
2.
Choose Library Setup to open the Library Setup dialog.
3.
Click Add to open the Library File Listing dialog.
4.
Select Demo.lib, located in the Demo folder in your P-CAD installation directory.
5.
Click Open. The system path to the selected file appears next to the Path label and the name of
the selected library appears in the Open Libraries list.
6.
Click OK to close the Library Setup dialog.
You can also use a simple drag-and-drop operation to open a library file in P-CAD Schematic. To do
this, open the File Manager or Windows Explorer. Navigate to the folder that contains the file you
want to open. Then, select the file, drag it to the P-CAD Schematic window, and release the mouse
button to open the library.
Placing Parts
Now that the appropriate library is open, you can start placing parts.
1.
Open the Place Part dialog using one of the following methods:
Choose Place Part.
Click
in the placement toolbar.
The following figure shows you the collapsed view of the Place Part dialog.
33
2.
Click Browse>> to expand the Place Part dialog to display the symbol associated with the
selected component.
3.
Select 74LS244 in the Component Name list box. As shown in the following figure, the number
2 appears next to the Num Parts label, to indicate that the component package contains two
parts.
4.
Click OK to close the Place Part dialog. In the P-CAD Schematic workspace, a ghosted outline
of the first part in the 74LS244 component package appears.
5.
To place the first part of the 74LS244 component package:
Move the mouse pointer to drag the ghosted outline of the part to the left of the
workspace center.
As you drag the component across the workspace, the information box on the status line
indicates that you will be placing the first part of the component package, RefDes U1:A.
Click the workspace to place the part. Notice that the information box now indicates that
you will be placing RefDes U1:B, which is the second part of the component package.
A RefDes distinguishes each part in a component package and generally contains a prefix and a
suffix.
The prefix typically contains a letter and number. For example, integrated circuits start with the
letter U (e.g. U1), resistors (R1), capacitors (C1), connectors (J1), switches (SW1) and so on.
The suffix indicates that the part is a member of the component package. For example, the
74LS244 package contains two parts: U1:A and U1:B. The A indicates that the part is the first
member of the U1 component package, and B indicates that it is the second part of the U1
package.
6.
34
To place the second part of the 74LS244 component package (U1:B), move the cursor to the
right of U1:A. While you are positioning a part you can increase or decrease the numbering of
the next part or RefDes using the following shortcut keys:
To change the displayed part number to the next available value, press the P key. To select
the next available reference designator, press D.
To return the RefDes to U1:B, press SHIFT+P until you return to the previous part number.
Press SHIFT+D to select the previous available reference designator. Pressing these keys
decrements the RefDes.
7.
Click the workspace to place U1:B in your design.
8.
Right-click to quit placing the 74LS244 component package.

Notice that the Place Part button in the placement toolbar remains indented. This indicates
that you are in placement mode. If you click the workspace, the Place Part dialog would appear
so you could place another component type. Cancel out of part placement mode by selecting
another tool.
9.
Choose the Select tool using one of the following methods:
Press S or choose Edit Select.
Click
in the command toolbar.
10. Select part U1:A in the schematic workspace again.

11. Hold down the CTRL key and drag the ghosted outline of the part so it is just above U1:A.
12. Release the mouse button to place a copy of the part. Notice that part is labeled U2:A,
indicating it is the first part (A) of a new component package (U2).
Sheet 1 of your schematic design should now resemble the following illustration.
Switching Between Sheets to Place Parts

This section shows you how to switch from Sheet1 to Sheet2, so you can place a part on Sheet2.
Later in this tutorial we will wire these parts together and place sheet connectors.
1.
Select Sheet2 from the Select Sheet list box in the status line.
35
2.
Open the Place Part dialog using one of the following methods:
Choose Place Part.
Click
3.
Select 74154 from the Component list box. Notice that this component package has only one
part.
4.
Click OK to close the Place Part dialog. Notice that the information box on the status line
indicates that you will be placing RefDes U3.
5.
Place the part on the left side of Sheet2 by clicking the workspace.
6.
Right-click to quit placing the 74154 component package.

Notice that the Place Part button in the placement toolbar remains indented. This indicates that
the placement tool is active. If you clicked the workspace, the Place Part dialog would appear
so you could select another component to place.
7.
Select Sheet1 from the Select Sheet list box on the status line.
8.
Click the workspace to open the Place Part dialog.
9.
Select the 74LS138 component from the Component list box.
10. Click OK to close the Place Part dialog. Notice that the information box on the status line
indicates that you will be placing RefDes U4.
11. Place the U4 part to the right of U1:B by clicking the workspace.
Sheet1 of your schematic design should now resemble the following illustration.
Placing Wires
This section shows you how to place wires in your schematic design. You will place wires in your
design to connect the parts you have just placed as shown below.
36
1.
Select the Place Wire tool using one of the following methods:
Choose Place Wire.
Click
2.
Hold down the left mouse button on U1:B pin 9 and drag the mouse pointer towards U4 pin 1.
Click where you want to place vertices (corners).
3.
While placing a wire, try selecting other orthogonal modes by pressing the O key. Also you can
flip the wire by pressing the F key.
4.
Release the mouse button when you reach U4 pin 1 to place the wire. Notice that the
information box on the status line indicates that you have placed NET00000.
After you place a wire, the Place Wire button in the placement toolbar remains indented. This
indicates that the wire placement tool is active. If you click the workspace, you would place
another NET00000 wire segment.
5.
Right-click or press ESC to stop placing wire segments for NET00000. The information box on
the status line indicates that you will be placing NET00001.
6.
Connect U1:B pin 7 with U4 pin 2. Then, right-click to stop placing NET00001. By default, P-CAD
Schematic places wires with a 10.0 mil width.
Changing the Current Wire Width

The current wire width is the active width setting that is used when you place wires in a design. It is
set for display purposes only. In P-CAD Schematic, the wire width is set to Thin (10.0 mil) by default.
To change this setting:
1.
Choose Options Current Wire to open the Options Current Wire dialog.
37
2.
Choose the User option button and type 12.0mil in the text box and click OK.
3.
Connect U1:A pin 12 with U4 pin 3, as shown in the following figure. Then, right-click to stop
placing NET00002. Sheet1 of your schematic design should now resemble the following
illustration.
If you place a wire segment in the incorrect position, choose Edit Select and then choose Edit
Undo. Then restart the wire placement tool by choosing Place Wire. You can also add a new
vertex to a single wire by selecting it, right-clicking and choosing Add Vertex from the menu.
Placing an Open-ended Wire
With P-CAD Schematic, you can place a wire in a schematic design without starting the wire at a
pin. To place an open-ended wire:
1.
Choose Place Wire or click
2.
Click and hold down the left mouse button at the left side of the
schematic workspace. Then, drag the pointer to U1:A pin 1 and release
the mouse button to place the wire. A square appears on the open end
of the wire, as shown.
If a square does not appear on the open end of the wire, you must turn on the Display Open
Ends feature found in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog.
38
3.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select.
4.
Select the wire you just placed. Then, right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut
menu to open the Wire Properties dialog.
5.
Select the Display check box.

At this time, you could rename the wire using the options in the Net tab of the Wire Properties
dialog. For this tutorial, leave the default name that appears in this field.
6.
Click OK to close the Wire Properties dialog. Use the zoom in

command (+) to see the net name on the wire.
7.
Press the SHIFT key and select the net name that appears above
the wire. When the selection box appears, release the SHIFT key
and drag the net name to the left. Then, release the mouse
button to place the net name in its new position, as shown.
Naming Nets by Placing Power Parts

Power parts have an automatic net naming feature. When you place a power part in a schematic
design and attach it to a net, the net name changes to the name defined by the power part. To
automatically name a net by placing a power part in your design:
1.
Open the Place Part dialog by choosing Place Part or click
2.
Select GND from the Components list box and click OK to close
the Place Part dialog.
3.
Click the open end of the wire to place the GND part. The open
end symbol disappears, to indicate that the connection is
complete.
As shown, the net name of the wire changes to GND because the
GND component is a power part.
Automatic Junction Placement
When you connect a wire to another wire, P-CAD Schematic automatically places a junction at the
connection point. To see how P-CAD adds junctions:
1.
Rest the mouse pointer on the ground wire you have just placed.
2.
Choose Place Wire and draw a connection to U1:B pin 19.

Notice that a junction is automatically placed and the new wire is added to the ground net.
Junction size can be changed by choosing Options Display.
3.
Connect U4 pin 15 with U2:A pin 1. Draw the connection as shown in the following figure, so
you can later see how to move multiple items.
39
4.
Choose File Save.
Placing Buses
To place a data bus in your schematic design:
1.
Select the bus placement tool by using one of the following methods:
Choose Place Bus.
Click
2.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer across the workspace to draw a horizontal
bus below the parts youve placed in your design.
3.
Right-click to end bus placement.
Connecting Wires to a Bus

To connect wires to the bus just placed:
1.
Choose Place Wire or click
2.
Place three wires to connect the bus to the following pins: U1:A pin 2, U1:A pin4 and U1:B pin 11.
You can start or end the wires anywhere along the bus. Sheet 1 of your design should now
resemble the following diagram.
40
Placing Ports
Ports identify unconnected subnets of a single net and give you the ability to explicitly identify
subnets on one or more sheets. Placing ports in a design also prevents unintentional net merges.
To place a port:
1.
Open the Place Port dialog using one of the following

methods:
Choose Place Port.
Click
2.
Click in the workspace and the Place Port dialog displays.
3.
Type IN1 in the Net Names box and clear the Increment Port
Name check box.
4.
Click
in the Port Shape frame. Ports with two
connections are placed in-line and those with only one
connection are attached to the left, right, above or below the
wire. Click OK to close the dialog.
5.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the port to the wire
connecting U1:A pin 2. Release the mouse button to place it.
If you need to rotate the port during placement, press R. To flip the port, press F.
6.
Place another port on the wire connecting U1:B pin 11 with the bus by clicking the desired
location.
7.
Choose another command, e.g. S for Edit Select, to quit port placement mode.
41
Placing Ports to Continue a Net on Another Sheet

To create global nets that continue from one sheet to another, you need to create a port through
which the wires of the net will pass to the next sheet. You can also then add annotated sheet
connectors that show the connecting sheets name and the zone location.
First of all, well create the port for a net we will name OUT1 that goes from Sheet1 to Sheet2.
1.
Choose Place Port or click
2.
Click
3.
Choose Horizontal in the Pin Orientation frame and click OK.
4.
Click U4 pin 7 to place the port and press S for Edit Select to end port placement.
5.
Double-click on the port you just placed to open the Port Properties dialog and click the Net
tab.
6.
Rename the net by typing OUT1 in the Net Name box and click OK. The
new net name appears inside the port symbol.
7.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the ghosted outline of the
port away from the pin. Then, release the mouse button to place the
port. Notice a wire is automatically added to fill the gap, as shown.
in the placement toolbar to open the Place Port dialog.
in the Port Shape frame and select Two-pin in the Pin Count frame.
Connecting a Net to a Part on Another Sheet Using a Port

Now we will place a port to connect the continued net OUT1 on Sheet2 to component U3. You
could switch to Sheet2 by selecting this sheet from the Sheets list box on the status line.
Alternatively, you can jump to Sheet2.
42
1.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select and then choose Edit Parts to open the Edit
Part dialog.
2.
Select U3 in the Parts list and click Jump. The mouse pointer rests on the reference point for
U3 on Sheet2.
3.
Choose Place Port or click

in the placement toolbar. Click in the workspace to open the
Place Port dialog. Then, define the characteristics of the port using the following specifications:
Type OUT1 in the Net Name box.
Click
Choose Horizontal in the Pin Orientation frame and click OK.
in the Port Shape frame and select Two-pin in the Pin Count frame.
4.
Place the port at U3 pin 23.
5.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select and select and drag the port to the left, away
from the pin. Sheet2 of your schematic design should now look like this.
Lets quickly check that net OUT1 does connect across the sheets. To do this:
1.
Choose Edit Parts to open the Edit Parts dialog.
2.
Select U3 from the Parts list box.
43
3.
Click Highlight Attached Nets and click Close to exit the dialog. Notice the current highlight
color is applied to OUT1 on both Sheet1 and Sheet2.
Using Annotated Sheet Connector Symbols

You can place an annotated sheet connector to indicate that the net continues on another sheet.
Annotated sheet connectors show the connecting sheets name and zone location using P-CAD
Schematics zone intelligence, so you must have a sheet border with zones displayed for this
feature to work. Also Show Cross Referencing must be selected in the Miscellaneous tab of the
Options Display dialog.
For information about using sheet borders with zones references, refer to P-CAD Schematic
Tutorial 1 Setting up a Schematic Design.
First we must place in and out sheet connector symbols that are supplied in Demo.lib.
1.
Go to Sheet1 and zoom in around the port named OUT1. Set your grid spacing to 25mil at this
stage for accurate placement.
2.
Choose Place Part or click
3.
Select SHEETOUT
from the Component Name list box and place it on the spare pin at
the end of the port OUT1 connected to part U4.
4.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select to exit out of part placement mode.
5.
Now go to Sheet2 and place a part named SHEETIN

OUT1 connected to part U3.
in the placement toolbar to open the Place Part dialog.
on the spare pin of the port named
To display the annotated sheet connectors:
1.
Choose Options Display and click the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog.
2.
Select the Show Cross Referencing check box in the Sheet Connector Cross Referencing frame
and click OK. The sheet connectors display in the workspace, e.g.
which means
this net continues on Sheet2 at zone location A, 2. On Sheet2, the sheet connector will display
the cross reference back to Sheet1, e.g.
When you display cross references, all sheet connectors on all sheets are annotated. If a nets
location is moved or if a sheet connector is added or deleted from the net, the sheet connector
cross references for all sheet connectors associated with that net are automatically updated.
You can use these annotated sheet connectors to jump to its cross reference on another sheet
by double-clicking on the SHEETIN or SHEETOUT part and clicking on the Sheet Connector tab
in the Parts Properties dialog.
44
3.
Select the Cross Referenced Sheet Connector for the sheet you wish to go to and click on
Jump. You are taken to the selected sheet and the cursor displays on the cross-referenced
sheet connector.
Placing Text
To place text in your schematic design:
1.
Choose Place Text or click
2.
Click on the workspace where you want the text to be positioned and the Place Text dialog
displays. Click on More to expand the dialog, if necessary.
3.
Type in the text and choose a predefined style from the Text Style list.
4.
Click Place to display the text on the schematic design.
5.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select to exit out of text placement mode.
in the placement toolbar. A positioning cursor
appears.
For information about creating new text styles, refer to Options Text Style, (page 314).
Now we have placed a few objects, we will look at the various ways of selecting them.
45
Selecting Objects
This section of the tutorial shows you how to select single and multiple objects. Well be practising
on the parts and wires that you have placed earlier in this tutorial.
If the Show DataTips feature is enabled in the Miscellaneous tab of Options Display, a Data Tip
appears when you move the cursor over an object in your design. Data Tips show context-sensitive
information about design objects and can assist you in selecting the appropriate object.
Selecting Single Objects

To select a single object:
1.
Press the + (plus) key to zoom in on your workspace. This makes viewing objects easier.
2.
Press S or click the Select button

Select.
3.
Click an object to select it. The object will display in the selection color (set in Options
Display) with a bounding box around it.
4.
To deselect the object, click in a blank space in your workspace to cancel the selection.
on the command toolbar as a shortcut for choosing Edit
Selecting Multiple Objects

To select multiple objects:
1.
Select a part. Hold down the CTRL key and select another part (Ctrl+Click). Notice that both
parts are selected and the bounding box includes all selected parts.
2.
Click a blank space to cancel the selection of the parts.
Subselecting Objects
You can select objects that make up a part or component. For example, you can select a pin that
belongs to a component. To subselect an object:
1.
Place a component in the workspace using the Place Component command.
2.
Press S or click the Select button on the command toolbar as a shortcut for choosing Edit
Select.
3.
Hold down the SHIFT key and click on a pin that belongs to the component. Notice that only
the pin is selected.
4.
Now, you can perform actions on the pin. For example, you can right-click the pin and choose
Properties from the shortcut menu to query the pin.
Block Selecting Objects

To select a group of objects, you can perform a block select. To block select:
1.
46
Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor across your workspace to draw a bounding
outline around two or three parts.
2.
Release the mouse button to select the parts.
3.
Deselect the parts by clicking in a blank area of the workspace.
Block Selecting Wires

To change your block selection criteria to select all the wires in your design so we can display their
net names:
1.
Choose Options Block Selection to open the Options Block Selection dialog.
2.
Click Clear All to clear the default selection of all items. All of the item check boxes will
become blank and the item buttons become shaded.
3.
Click the Wire check box until a solid check mark appears.
4.
Choose Outside Block in the Select Mode frame and click OK.
5.
Draw a bounding outline in an empty area of the workspace. Release the mouse button to
select all of the wires in your design.
6.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to open the Wire Properties dialog
and click the Wire tab.
7.
Click the Display check box until a solid check mark appears.
At this point, your design should look like the following diagram:
47
8.
Click OK to close the dialog. Notice that net names now appear on all wires.
Block Selecting Using a Selection Mask

You can define block selection criteria to specify which particular objects are selected when you
perform a block select. This time, we will block select only the 74LS244 components, we placed
earlier by using their Type to define the selection criteria.
48
1.
Choose Options Block Selection. The Block Selection dialog appears. The enable/check
boxes have three states: checked (included); blank (excluded) or shaded (masked with
additional selection criteria).
2.
Click the Clear All button to clear the default selection of all items.
3.
Click the Parts check box until a shaded check mark appears. When the Parts button becomes
available, click Parts. The Part Selection Mask dialog appears.
4.
Type 74LS244 in the Type text box or choose it from the Type list.
5.
Click OK to save the changes and return to the Options Block Selection dialog.
6.
Select Inside Block as the Select Mode and click OK to set your selection criteria.
7.
Choose View Extent to make sure the entire design is displayed in the workspace.
8.
Draw a bounding outline around the entire design. When you release the mouse button,
notice that only the 74LS244 parts are selected.
Restoring the Block Selection Criteria

Remember to clear your filter when you have finished using Block Selection. To restore your block
selection criteria:
1.
2.
Click Set All to select all of the check boxes in the Items frame. Choose Inside Block in the
Select Mode frame and click OK.
Selecting Highlighted Objects

You can select objects that have already been highlighted on screen with the highlighter feature.
1.
First we will highlight a few objects by selecting them, right-clicking and choosing Highlight
from the shortcut menu. Deselect the objects and they will display in the Highlight color set
using Options Display (default color is turquoise).
2.
Now to select the highlighted objects again, choose Edit Select Highlighted. Only the objects
highlighted in step 1 will be selected.
49
Notice that the Edit Select Highlighted command selects all highlighted objects, regardless of
the highlight colors that have been applied to the objects in a design.
3.
Right-click and choose Unhighlight from the shortcut menu.
4.
Click anywhere in the workspace. Notice that the highlight color is removed from all selected
objects.
To remove the highlight color from all objects, you can also choose Edit Unhighlight All.
Selecting Collocated Objects

When objects overlap so that you cannot select any one of them, you can switch between the
collocated objects to select the correct one.
1.
Add some objects that are collocated (in the same position) and position the cursor on top of
them.
2.
Click the left mouse button to toggle between objects. Information about the currently
selected item displays in the status line, e.g. Part U1:A selected.
3.
Delete these objects by selecting them and pressing the DELETE key.
Now that we have gone through the different selection modes, its time to look at what can be
done with objects when they are selected.
Modifying Objects
This section of the tutorial covers moving, rotating, resizing and changing properties of placed
objects.
Moving Objects
1. Select the object(s) to be moved.
2.
Click on the object (or within the bounding box of several selected objects) and drag the
cursor to the new location.
The following topics show you the various methods you can use to move parts in a design.
Moving Parts by RefDes
To move parts by Reference Designator:
1.
50
Choose Edit Move by RefDes to open the Edit Move by RefDes dialog.
2.
Select U2:A from the RefDes list box and click OK.
3.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the ghosted outline of U2:A so it rests to the right
of its current position.
4.
Release the mouse button to place the part in its new position.
Notice that U2:A moves to the right and that the connections are maintained. In addition, Edit
Move by RefDes dialog opens again, so you can move another part.
5.
Click Cancel to close the Edit Move by RefDes dialog.
Moving Parts by Block Selecting

To move parts using the block selection feature:
1.
Draw a bounding outline around U2:A and the two wire segments closest to pin 1, as shown in
the following figure.
If your bounding outline does not select one of these items, hold down the CTRL key and
select the missing items. Then, hold down the CTRL button and complete step 2.
2.
Drag the selected items to the right so that U2:A is above U4. Notice that the long horizontal
segment shortens automatically, maintaining connectivity.
51
Moving Components and Wire Segments

This section shows you how to move a component that is attached to a wire segment.
1.
Select U2:A and move it up one or two grid points. Notice that the wire becomes nonorthogonal.
2.
Restore the orthogonal by selecting the diagonal wire segment.
3.
Drag the left endpoint up one or two grid points to create a 90-degree corner.
To avoid creating a diagonal, you could have selected both the wire and U2:A before moving
the part upwards. To select multiple items, hold down the CTRL key and select the items of
your choice.
Moving Wires and Maintaining Connectivity

To see the connectivity maintained when moving wires:
1.
Select a vertical wire segment in your design.
2.
Drag the wire to the left and back to the right. Notice that connectivity is maintained.
Remember that when moving items, you can always undo the action by pressing the U key,
choosing Edit Undo, or by clicking the Undo button on the command toolbar.
Resizing Objects
Selected objects can be resized by selecting and moving their editing handles.
1.
Select an object in your design, e.g. a wire or bus.
2.
Clicking on an editing handle and drag the cursor (with the outline of the object) to stretch the
object.
Rotating and Flipping Objects

Selected objects can be rotated and flipped.
1.
Select an object and rotate it by 90 degrees counterclockwise by pressing the R key.
2.
Flip the object in the X direction (i.e. about the Y axis) by pressing the F key.
Placed objects with connections will attempt to reconnect each time, so pressing the left
mouse button while you choose R or F, will stop reconnections until you release the mouse
button.
Changing Properties
This section looks at assessing and changing an objects properties.
1.
There are a couple of ways to display an objects Properties dialog:
52
Double-click on an object
Select an object and choose Properties from the right-click menu
Select an object and choose Edit Properties.
A Properties dialog displays, such as the Parts Properties dialog below.
2.
Make any necessary changes and click OK.
Changing the Width of a Selected Wire

You can change the thickness of a selected wire by changing its properties.
1.
Select the first wire segment of NET00001.
2.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to open the Wire Properties dialog.
As shown in the following figure, the Wire tab is selected for you by default.
3.
Choose the Thick option in the Width frame to change the wire thickness to 15.0 mil and click
OK. The displayed width of the selected wire changes to 15.0 mil.
53
4.
Select the wire segment again. Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to
open the Wire Properties dialog.
5.
Restore the 10.0 mil wire width by choosing the Thin option button in the Width frame and
clicking OK to close the Wire Properties dialog.
Renumbering Reference Designators

Before you verify your design and generate output, you should renumber your reference
designators (RefDes). To see how renumbering works with parts:
54
1.
Place three RES500 resistors in the workspace, as shown below.
2.
Press S as a shortcut for choosing Edit Select.
3.
Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog.
4.
Choose the following settings:
Choose RefDes in the Type frame.
Choose Top to Bottom in the Direction frame.
Choose Auto Group Parts in the RefDes frame.
5.
Click OK to close the Utils Renumber dialog. A warning displays a message that states this
operation is undoable. Click Yes to continue.
6.
Notice that the reference designators have been renumbered in top-to-bottom order within
prefix types.
In particular, your resistors are renumbered starting with R1, and the ICs are renumbered starting
with U1. Notice also, renumbering of U3 and U4 was done across sheets.
Adding Values after Placing Parts

You can add values after you place a part. To practice this:
1.
Select R1 and R2.
2.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to open the Properties
dialog and click on the Symbol tab.
3.
Type 10 in the Value box and click OK. Notice the field results for the value field
changes to 10 for each selected resistor.
Deleting Objects
1. Select all of the RES500 parts you placed.
2.
Press DELETE, or right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. The resistors are
removed from your design.
Copying and Pasting Objects

This section investigates copying and pasting objects and circuits.
Copying a Group of Objects Using Drag-and-Drop
To copy the group of selected objects :
1.
Block select the section of your circuit as shown below.
2.
Choose View All.
3.
Hold down the CTRL key and drag the selected group of objects to an empty part of the
workspace and release. Notice that you can view the exact distance of the move in the X and Y
coordinates boxes on the status line.
4.
Zoom in to view the copied block by pressing the + key.
55
5.
Probe the wires in the group of copied objects by selecting a wire and choosing Properties
from the shortcut menu. You will notice the following about copied items:
Global nets maintain their original names. Global nets include nets with ports, e.g. IN1,
nets attached to power parts, e.g. GND, and hidden power nets.
Nets that are not global are assigned unique default system names, e.g. NET00002.
Components are given unique reference designators.
Copying Circuitry
Suppose a section of circuitry you have completed previously could be used in more than one area
of your design. In this situation, you could copy and paste the desired data, including net names,
net attributes and net information.
To copy and paste a section of circuitry:
56
1.
Add a new sheet to the design and name it Sheet3.
2.
Select the group of objects that you just copied using the drag-and-drop method.
3.
Copy this group of parts to the clipboard using one of the following methods:
Choose Edit Copy
Right-click and choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
4.
Go to Sheet 3 and choose View All.
5.
Choose Edit Paste Circuit to open the Edit Paste Circuit dialog.
6.
Select the Create new refdes using qualifier check box. This appends the specified characters
to all the components in the copied data.
7.
Type the characters to append to each RefDes in the Qualifier edit box, e.g. type A.
8.
Choose the Add to end of name option to append A to the end of the RefDes name.
Now you can select the nets whose names you want to modify and specify the type of change
you want to apply.
9.
Select the Create new net name using qualifier check box in the Nets frame and type _A in the
Qualifier box.
10. Choose the Add before numeric suffix button. In the Example frame, notice that your qualifier
(_A) will be placed after the T in NET and before the first zero in the net name (i.e.,
NET_A00001).
11. In the Maintain Original Net Names frame, select the Global Nets check box. This maintains
the current names for all global nets and also selects all of the global nets in the Net Names list
box. In this tutorial, all the nets are global. Optionally, you can choose individual nets to
maintain their original names by checking the box next to each net.
12. If you were copying the circuitry from another design where net attribute values may be
different than the values of the same attributes in the destination file, you must choose how to
handle the merge from the options in the Net Attributes frame.
Since this copy and paste operation is within the same design and one of the options must be
enabled, select the Merge Favor Design check box. This option keeps all of the net attribute values
as they currently exist.
Pasting the Copied Circuitry
When all selections have been made in the Edit Paste Circuit dialog:
1.
Click the OK button to display the positioning cursor
2.
Click the left mouse button and the ghosted outline of the copied items appears.
3.
Drag the objects to their destined location in the middle of the sheet and release the mouse
button. The copied data is placed in the workspace as shown below.
4.
Notice that the RefDes and net names are modified with the qualifiers that you added. Each
time you paste this same circuitry the qualifier is incremented to the next available name for
each component or net name.
5.
To quit using the Paste command, right-click, or press the ESC key, or choose another
command.
in the workspace of Sheet3.
57
Working with Your Design

This section takes a closer look at some options you may need to use when working with nets and
attributes. Before you start, make sure Design1.sch is the current design.
Working with Nets

Now well have a look at some commands you may need when working with nets in a design.
Selecting a Subnet or an Entire Net
To select a subnet or an entire net:
1.
Select any segment on the IN1 net, which is the net that attaches U1:B to the bus.
2.
Right-click and choose Select Contiguous from the shortcut menu to select the physically
connected wires only.
3.
Right-click and choose Select Net from the shortcut menu. Notice now that the entire net is
selected.
Viewing Nets in a Bus

If you ever need to recall what nets are attached to your bus, this information is readily available. To
view the nets in a bus:
1.
2.
Select Bus in the Type frame.
3.
Select BUS00000 from the Bus Names list. Notice that a list of attached nets appear in the Edit
Nets box and click Close to exit the Edit Nets dialog.
Renaming Nets
This section shows you how to rename the nets you have already placed.
1.
58
Choose Utils Rename Nets. Click the workspace to open the Utils Rename Wire/Port dialog.
2.
Type the following text in the Net Name box: DATA0. Select the Increment Name check box
and click OK to close the dialog.
3.
Click each net in your design to name them DATA1, DATA2 and DATA3 respectively.
4.
Right-click or press ESC to stop renaming nets. The Utils Rename Nets tool remains active, so
select another command to quit this mode, e.g. S for Edit Select.
Splitting a Net
To split a net, we can place parts or delete sections of a net.
1.
Place a RES500 resistor on the horizontal GND wire directly above U1:B.
2.
Probe the wires on both sides. Note that the GND net is split.
3.
Select the vertical GND wire at the junction and press DELETE. Notice that the GND net is split
again.
4.
Choose Utils Rename Nets and click the workspace to open the Utils Rename Wire/Port
dialog.
5.
Type IN2 in the Net Name box, choose Contiguous Wire in the Domain frame and click OK.
6.
Click the IN1 wire on the right side of the object group. Notice only the selected subnet is
renamed.
Working with Attributes

P-CAD Schematic provides you with predefined attributes that can be associated with nets or
components or used to add extra data to the design, e.g. physical or manufacturing information.
59
You can also create user-defined attributes. All or selected attributes can be included in a
customized Attributes report generated using File Reports.
Attributes values can be simply displayed on a design using the Place Attribute command. If you
are creating your own symbols and require attributes such as ResDef, Type and Description of a
part to be visible, you would place the attributes this way. Component attributes, such as
Description or Reference to a web site, can be made visible on placed parts when added through
the Attributes tab of the Properties dialog of a selected component.
Attributes, however, are a far more powerful feature when set to define design rules. By defining
the value of some attributes, e.g. Net, Clearance or Physical attributes, a design rule for each
attribute is automatically created, e.g. defining the clearance rules that will apply when routing the
board in P-CAD PCB. These design rules are stored with the design and can then be passed to
P-CAD PCB via the netlist.
For more information about attributes, refer to Place Commands, (page 259).
Adding Net Attributes
In the example we will use below, a Width attribute of 20mil will be set for the net OUT1. Setting
such an attribute will also create a Width design rule for this net. This design rule will automatically
set the width of all tracks in OUT1 to 20 mil when you route the board in PCB using the netlist
generated from this schematic design.
60
1.
Choose Edit Nets to open the Edit Nets dialog and click OUT1 in the Net Names list box.
2.
Click Edit Attributes to open the Attributes dialog. Attributes can be added or deleted through
this dialog. Click Add to open the Place Attribute dialog.
3.
Select Net from the Attribute Category list box. A list of attributes associated with that category
appears in the Names list box.
4.
Select Width from the Names list box and type 20.0mil in the Value box and click OK. The
attribute name and value appears in the Attributes dialog.
5.
If you need to modify a selected attribute, click Properties from this dialog to open the
Attribute Properties dialog again. Click OK until you return to the Edit Nets dialog and click
Close.
6.
Now to check that the design rule has been created, choose Options Design Rules, click on
the Net tab and select OUT1. The Width rule appears in the Net Rules frame.
61
7.
Click Close and save your design file by choosing File Save.
This concludes Tutorial 2. Please refer to Tutorial 3 to learn how to verify a schematic design.
62
Tutorial 3 - Verifying a Schematic Design

Welcome to the P-CAD Schematic tutorial Verifying a Schematic Design. During this tutorial, we
will check that a design is valid according to the Electrical Rules Check (ERC). The ERC utility will
find any errors in the design, such as unconnected pins or wires, or rule violations. This tutorial
uses a demonstration file that is supplied with P-CAD.
Design Verification
P-CAD Schematic offers a range of Electrical Rules Checks (ERCs) that you can use to verify a
design. This section shows you how to set up the rules you will be checking for and the level of
severity, how to run the ERC report and then view the errors on screen. Finally we will have a go at
fixing the errors that have been purposely included in a demonstration schematic file.
For more information about the options in Electrical Rules Check utility, refer to the Utils
Commands, (page 329).
Setting up the ERC Options

1.
Open ERC.sch from the Tutorial folder of the P-CAD installation directory.
2.
Choose Utils ERC to open the Utils Electrical Rules Check dialog.
3.
Select all of the check boxes in the Design Rule Checks frame.
4.
Select the View Report check box to present an on-screen report when the checks are
complete and select the Summarize Ignored Errors check box.
5.
Select the Annotate Errors check box to place ERC error indicators in your design. These
indicators graphically identify violation locations.
63
6.
Click the Severity Level button to open the Rules Severity Level dialog.
Notice the severity levels for most rules are set to Error as indicated by a Yes in the Error
column. You can change the severity level of a rule by selecting a rule in the list and choosing
one of the options Error, Warning or Ignored in the Severity Level frame. Only Errors will
display on the design when Annotate Errors is turned on. Warnings and ignored rules will only
show on the ERC report.
7.
We will set a few rules to be ignored because the rigorous testing of the ERC will display errors
that have been proven to be correct design choices for this schematic, e.g. pins have been
correctly named as bidirectional in this case but may be problematic in a different design.
Select the following rules and choose the Ignored button in the Severity Level frame: Bi Pin To
Power Pin, Power Pin To Bi Pin, No Input Pins In Net and No Output Pins In Net.
64
8.
Click OK to close the Rules Severity Level dialog and return to the Utils ERC dialog.
9.
Click OK to begin the ERC process. ERC will check all rules and will summarize those set to the
Ignored severity level.
10. When the process is complete, an ERC report appears in the text editor, e.g. Notepad, as shown
below. A copy is automatically saved to file with the filename defaulting to the name of the
design file with an .erc extension.
Five errors and one warning will be reported, including a single node net, some unconnected
wires and bus/net violations. An unconnected pin will be flagged as a warning.
11. You can print the report by choosing File Print. Keep it open for cross referencing.
Viewing any Errors in the Design

1.
Switch from the report to your design by clicking the workspace and notice that ERC error
indicators
appear at error locations. Each error marker contains error information.
2.
To find and view information about all the errors, choose Utils Find Error. The Find Errors
dialog displays with Error 1 information.
65
3.
In the Error Number scroll box, type another number or click the arrows to show information
for all errors. The Description area shows the first error in the selected category, the error
number and the reason for the error. The Categories drop-down list allows you to limit the
type of errors listed, e.g. only Unconnected Wire errors.
4.
Select Error Number 1 from the Error Number scroll box and click Jump To. You are switched
to the workspace, the error indicator is selected and the cursor is placed on it.
5.
To view information about any other visible error indicator while in the workspace, select the
indicator, right-click, and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to display the Find Errors
dialog again. Alternatively, just double-click on an unselected error indicator.
6.
Note that an error indicator for an unconnected pin on part J8:2-2 (co-ordinates 3050.0, 3000.0)
is not shown because it was flagged as a Warning only in the ERC severity rules. You can only
view warnings in the ERC report.
Fixing Errors in the Design

Now we will have a look at fixing the design errors found in this schematic.
66
Fixing the Single Node Net and Unconnected Wire Errors

1. Select Error Number 1 again from the Error Number scroll box of the Find Errors dialog. The
description tells us its a single node net error. Click Jump To. The cursor is placed on that
selected error indicator.
2.
Now double-click the second error indicator on that wire. Error 3 information will display in
the Find Errors dialog, indicating an unconnected wire. Click back to the workspace and
double-click on the next indicator to the right (Error 2) which is also an unconnected wire
error. These three errors are therefore related to the break in the wire.
3.
Click back on the workspace and fix the error by connecting the wire. This will resolve Errors 1,
2 and 3.
4.
If you wish to delete the errors from the list as you solve them, click Override Dont Display
Again in the Find Errors dialog.
Fixing the Bus/Net Errors

Now we will look at the remaining two errors, which are bus/net errors.
1.
Click on the Find Errors dialog box, select Error 4 (Bus ENBUSS only has one ref to net EN4) and
Jump To. The clue lies in the fact that there is only one reference to net EN4. There should be a
reference for the net going into the bus and another for it coming out again. This error
description therefore implies that net EN4 is not properly connected to ENBUSS.
2.
Find net EN4 by choosing Edit Nets, selecting EN4 from the Net Names list and click on Jump
to Node. Now highlight net EN4 by selecting any wire in it, right-click and select Highlight Net.
The entire net is highlighted for easy tracing.
3.
View the entire net EN4 by zooming and scrolling around the workspace. You will notice that
EN4 goes into ENBUSS but then is wired straight into part U9:D instead of coming out of
ENBUSS first. This is the design error we will have to fix.
4.
Since EN4 is individually wired directly to U9:D as well as attempting to go through the bus,
one solution to this error is simply to select the wire segment that connects to ENBUSS and
press DELETE. Alternatively, you could modify the wiring from U9:D pin 13 back into the
ENBUSS.
5.
Now well fix the last error, Error 5 Bus DATABUSS only has one ref to net EN1. Highlight net
EN1 (see step 2 for details) to trace the net through the design. It appears that the net is
connected to the wrong bus (DATABUSS).
6.
Select the wire segment that goes from U6:A pin1 to DATABUSS and stretch it to ENBUSS. A
new bus connector is displayed. Delete the old bus connector marker.
7.
Finally, lets just check that warning of an unconnected pin that appeared on the report as
Warning 1 -- Unconnected pin J8:2-2 on sheet:Sheet1 at mils (3050.0,3000.0). This appears to be
simply a mistake, so delete the part by selecting it and pressing DELETE.
67
8.
Choose Utils ERC to rerun the ERC report and to clear the indicators of all errors that have
been fixed. Check that there are no more errors in the ERC report. Choose File Exit to close
the ERC report and exit from the text editor.
9.
Save and close the design.
The following suggestions form a basic strategy for resolving multiple errors in a design. First of all,
run ERC checking only for single node nets, no node nets and unconnected pins and wires. Fix any
errors and then rerun ERC to check for bus/net and net connectivity rules. Fix errors and rerun for
component rules. Finally, select only the electrical and hierarchy rules (if you have a hierarchical
design) and rerun ERC. With each pass, the number of related errors should diminish.
Now you have verified your design, please refer to Tutorial 4 for instructions about generating
reports and netlists.
68
Tutorial 4 - Generating Reports and Netlists

Welcome to the P-CAD Schematic tutorial Generating Schematic Reports and Netlists. During this
tutorial, we will generate reports using a demonstration file that is supplied with P-CAD. Then we
will generate a netlist from this file that will include all the component and net information in the
design.
This section covers generating standard reports from your schematic design, such as a Bill of
Materials (BOM) and Attributes, Global Nets and Parts Usage reports. These reports can be viewed
on screen, saved in a file or sent to a printer. You can customize your reports to include format
options, like headers and footers, or set data selection or sort options.
For more information about customizing your reports, refer to the File Commands, (page 169).
Generating a Report
To generate a report:
1.
Open the schematic design file Digdemo.sch from the P-CAD Demo directory.
2.
Choose File Reports. The File Reports dialog appears.
3.
In the Reports to Generate list, select the check boxes that correspond to the type of reports
you want to generate.
4.
Click Filename. The Reports File Save As dialog appears.
69
5.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the report file and type a name for the
report file in the File Name box.
6.
Select Report Files (*.*) from the Save As Type list and click Save. You return to the File Reports
dialog.
7.
In the Report Destination frame, choose one of the following buttons:
8.
Screen - Sends the output to a file and opens the file using the Notepad Utility.
File - Sends the output to a file.
Printer - Sends output directly to the printer without creating files.
In the Style Format frame, choose one of the following buttons:
Separated List - Puts all data in character-separated format. This format can be imported
into other spreadsheet and database programs.
P-CAD Report - Produces a report format with columns and spaces, etc.
If you choose Separated List, select a separator from the List Separator list.
The list separator character displayed in the box is used for both imported and exported files.
The default character is your computers regional setting.
9.
Click Generate and the selected reports will display on the screen in your text editor, such as
an Attributes report displayed in Notepad below, or will be sent straight to the printer or
nominated file.
Generating Netlists
With P-CAD Schematic, you can generate netlist that lists the components and nets in your design.
Typically, a netlist is used by a printed circuit board editor, such as P-CAD PCB, to form the basis of
your board design.
70
To generate a netlist:
1.
Open the schematic design file Digdemo.sch, located in the P-CAD Demo directory.
2.
Choose Utils Generate Netlist. The following Utils Generate Netlist dialog appears.
3.
Click Netlist Filename. The following Netlist File dialog appears.
4.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the netlist file and type a name for the
netlist file in the File name box.
5.
Select Netlist Files (*.net) from the Save As Type list and click Save. You return to the Utils
Generate Netlist dialog.
6.
In the Netlist Format list, select P-CAD ASCII as your netlist format.
The P-CAD ASCII format supports attribute passing. If you select this option, you may also
select the Include Library Information check box.
7.
Click OK to generate the netlist. The netlist is saved with the filename and in the directory you
specified.
This concludes Tutorial 4. Please refer to Tutorial 5 for information about printing your schematic.
71
Tutorial 5 - Printing a Schematic Design

Welcome to the P-CAD Schematic tutorial Printing a Schematic Design in which we will look at
setting up print jobs. This tutorial uses a demonstration file that is supplied with P-CAD.
This final tutorial covers printing or plotting your schematic design. First, well check the
printer/plotter and page setups, then set the print options, before previewing and generating a
print job that goes directly to the printer.
Setting Up a Printer or Plotter

To set up or change the printer or plotter settings on your computer:
1.
Choose File Print Setup to open the Print Setup dialog.
2.
Select a print device from the Name list box. This list shows the printers and plotters that have
been installed on your computer.
3.
Select the paper size and source from the corresponding list boxes in the Paper frame and
choose Landscape in the Orientation frame.
4.
Click Properties to open the Properties dialog and configure other print parameters and click
OK.
Since print parameters are device-specific, the options in the Properties dialog depend upon
the print device you selected.
5.
72
Click OK to close the Print Setup dialog.
Setting Up Page Setup Options

For each sheet, you can scale your image to fit standard or custom size papers, define a print
region, set horizontal and vertical offsets, show a title, and rotate the image. Individual sheets
within a design can have different options set and these are saved with the design. We will print
our Digdemo.sch file in this section.
To define your page setup options:
1.
Choose File Print to open the File Print dialog.
2.
Select the sheet(s) from the Sheets list to which you are applying these options and click Tile
Sheets and Scale to Fit Page to display all sheets on one page.
3.
Click Page Setup to open the Page Setup dialog.
For more information about options in this dialog, such as Print Region, refer to the File
Commands, (page 169).
73
4.
Select Title to display the title block on the printed image.
5.
Click Update Sheet to apply your changes to the print sheet and click Close to return to the
File Print dialog, where we can set the print options.
Setting Up Print Options

With the Print Options dialog, you can set up various print options, such as color and display.
1.
Click Print Options from the File Print dialog to open the Print Options dialog and click the
Colors tab.
2.
Choose your print colors using one of these methods:
74
If you have a color printer, click a command button in the Item Colors or Display Colors
frame. When the color palette appears, click a color swatch.
3.
If you have a black and white printer, click the Defaults button. This sets all color options
to monochrome. We recommend that you use this setting to avoid undesirable output
when your printer converts color settings to grayscales.
Choose Small, Large or User in the Junction Size frame.

Notice that you can enter a value in the Size box only when you choose User. You can enter a
value in inches, centimeters, etc. However, the value must be between 0 - 10 mm.
4.
Click the Miscellaneous tab. In this tab, you can choose to show or hide ERC error indicators
and set other miscellaneous print options as shown in the following figure.
5.
Well use the default settings, so click the Defaults button and click OK to return to the File
Print dialog.
Previewing a Print Job

To check that the print job you have set looks right, preview the print job.
1.
Click Print Preview in the File Print dialog. The specified print output appears on your screen,
such as the Digdemo schematic below.
75
2.
Click the Zoom In button to zoom in on the center area of the current page. Use the scroll bars
to move to the desired viewing region to check that the print job is correct.
3.
Click Print to send the current print jobs directly to the printer, or click Close to close the Print
Preview window and return to the File Print dialog.
Generating Printouts and Printing Sheets

After you have defined your page setup and print options, return to the File Print dialog to print the
sheets.
76
1.
Click Set All in the File Print dialog to enable all the sheets in the design.
2.
Click Generate Printouts to print the selected sheets.
CHAPTER
Working with Objects

Consistent with other Windows compliant interfaces, the P-CAD user interface provides you with
the menu choices, dialogs, options, and feedback based on what is appropriate given the current
state of your design and P-CAD. The interface provides power, flexibility, and logical choices based
on the object(s) currently selected and the command or process currently being invoked.
This chapter includes detailed information on such topics as:
Placing Objects
Selecting Objects
Defining Object Selection Preferences
Block Selecting a Group of Objects
Moving Objects
Aligning Objects
Using Orthogonal Modes
Resizing an Object
Pasting Objects
Object Properties
Editing Nets
77
Chapter 5: Working with Objects
Placing Objects
Placing Objects
To place an object in a schematic design, choose a command from the Place menu or click a button
in the Placement toolbar shown in the following figure:
When you choose a Place command, the tool remains active until you choose another command.
For example, when you choose Place Wire, you remain in wire placement mode until you choose
another command, such as Place Port or Edit Select.
Each Placement Command operates differently. Some objects require the interaction of a dialog
before the object can be placed (e.g., content of text), but the general placement characteristics are
the same.
For example, when you choose Place Line, P-CAD Schematic automatically places a line segment
each time you click the workspace. Whereas, when you choose Place Pin and click the
workspace, a dialog box appears. After you set the pin characteristics using the options in the
dialog, P-CAD Schematic places a new pin each time you click the workspace.
Placing an Object
There are two methods than you can use to place an object. For quick placement, click the
workspace. For more precise placement, hold down the left mouse button and drag the object into
position. Then, release the mouse button to place the object. You remain in placement mode until
you right-click or press ESC.
When you place objects in your design, P-CAD Schematic places the object at a grid point,
regardless of your cursor setting. For more information, see Options Grids (page 295). To learn
more about object placement, see Place Commands (page 259).
Selecting Objects
This section summarizes the techniques you can use to select objects in a schematic design. Once
you are familiar with these techniques, you can define various object selection preferences. For
details, see Defining Object Selection Preferences (page 81).
Selecting an Object
Use the single selection feature to select an object in your design. To select an object, follow these
steps:
1.
Choose one of these methods to enable the select tool:
78
Click
in the Command toolbar
Selecting Objects
2.
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Click an object in the workspace.
When you select an object, the object appears in the selection color set in the Options Display
dialog. To change this color, see Choosing a Selection Color (page 82).
To cancel your selection, click anywhere in the workspace.
Selecting Multiple Objects

Use the multiple selection feature when you want to select more than one object at a time. To
select multiple objects, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Hold down the CTRL key and click the objects that you want to select.
P-CAD Schematic is set up to use the CTRL key for multiple selections by default. To change this
behavior, see Selecting Part of an Object (page 79).
To cancel your selection, click anywhere in the workspace.
Selecting Part of an Object

The subselection feature lets you select a part of an object. For example, you can select a single pin
in a part. To select part of an object, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Hold down the SHIFT key and click the part of the object that you want to select.
P-CAD Schematic is set up to use the SHIFT key for subselections by default. To change this
behavior, see Selecting Part of an Object (page 79).
Once selected, you can view and in some cases modify properties associated with the part of the
object. For example, if you selected a pin, you can open a Properties dialog for the pin and then
change the pin style. To cancel your selection, click anywhere in the workspace.
79
Selecting Objects
Selecting Collocated Objects

When objects on different sheets overlap, you can switch between the collocated objects, to select
objects that reside on different sheets. When objects overlap, do the following:
1.
2.
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Hold down the SPACEBAR and click the left mouse button to switch between the collocated
objects.
Pressing the SPACEBAR twice is equivalent to a mouse click (a press and release of the mouse
button).
Selecting All Objects

To select all objects in a design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Choose Edit Select All.
When you select an object, the object appears in the selection color set in the Options Display
dialog. To change this color, see Choosing a Selection Color (page 82).
To cancel the selection of all objects, choose Edit Deselect All or click outside the selection box.
Selecting Highlighted Objects

If youve applied a highlight color to objects in your design, you can select all of those objects. To
do this, follow these steps:
1.
2.
80
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key
Choose Edit Select Highlighted. The highlighted objects are selected.
The highlighter features interact with DDE hotlinks feature, to enable the exchange of hotlink data
between two P-CAD programs. In Schematic, hotlink data consists of highlighting and
unhighlighting commands for parts and nets. In PCB, hotlink data is for components and nets.
Selecting a Net
There are two ways you can select all items in the net to which an item is connected.
Choose Edit Nets and select a net from the list in the dialog that appears. Then, click Select.
Right-click a net and choose Select Net from the shortcut menu.
In both cases, the complete net is selected, subject to any criteria set in Options Block Selection.
For information, see Defining Block Selection Criteria (page 83).
Selecting Contiguous Net Objects

With the select contiguous feature, you can select all contiguous net objects of a selected net. Net
objects are contiguous if they are visually connected on the design. For instance, wires are
contiguous if they are connected from endpoint to endpoint. If a net consists of multiple subnets,
only the sub-net to which the selected item belongs is selected.
To use the select contiguous feature, right-click a wire or port, then choose Select Contiguous from
the shortcut menu. This feature only works for one net at a time.

With P-CAD Schematic, you can also use the block selection feature. For details, see Block
Selecting a Group of Objects (page 82).

You can define various object selection preferences for P-CAD Schematic. This section provides
you with information on your options. To learn about the techniques you can use to select objects,
see Selecting Objects (page 78).
Setting the CTRL/SHIFT Behavior

By default, P-CAD Schematic is set up to use the CTRL key for multiple selections and the SHIFT key
to select part of an object. However, you can reverse this setting. To do this, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Options Preferences to open the Options Preferences dialog.
2.
Click the Mouse tab.
3.
In the Ctrl/Shift Behavior frame, choose the Ctrl subselects; Shift extends selection button.
4.
Click Close in the Options Preferences dialog.
To learn how to extend a selection, see Selecting Multiple Objects (page 79). For instructions on the
subselection process, see Selecting Part of an Object (page 79).
81
Specifying a Selection Point

When you select one or more objects, a selection point appears at the closest grid point to the
center of the selection box by default. However, you can change the location of this point by
following these steps:
1.
Select one or more objects.
2.
Right-click and choose Selection Point from the shortcut menu.
3.
Press and hold down the left mouse button. Then, drag the ghosted outline of the selection
point into position. The following figure shows you a selection point.
4.
Release the mouse button to set the selection point at the cursor location.
When you cut or copy an object from a design, the selection point moves to the Clipboard or block
file. When you paste an object, the selection point snaps to the grid.
If the selection point is off-grid when a move operation begins, then it is automatically snapped to
the nearest grid point and all the selected objects move the same relative distance.
Parts can be vertically or horizontally aligned around a selection point. To do this, place a selection
point at the point of alignment, choose Edit Align Parts, and then set the desired alignment
options in the dialog that appears.
Choosing a Selection Color

When you select objects in a P-CAD Schematic design, the objects appear in the selection color set
in the Options Display dialog. To choose a selection color, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click the Colors tab.
3.
In the Display Colors frame, click Selection. A color palette appears.
4.
Click a color in the palette. Then, click
5.

The block selection feature gives you the ability to select a group of objects. You can configure this
feature to include or exclude specific types of objects and your selection criteria can be as specific
or as general as you choose.
The procedures in this section show you how to perform the following use and set up the block
selection feature.
82
Moving Objects

To block select a group of objects, follow these steps:
1.
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
2.
Drag the cursor diagonally across an area of the design to draw a selection box around a
region.
3.
Release the mouse button. Any objects that match your block selection criteria are selected. To
learn how to define block selection criteria, see Defining Block Selection Criteria (page 83).
To remove the selection box, click outside the box.
Defining Block Selection Criteria

You can configure the block select feature to select all objects, objects by type, or even objects
with specific parameters. To define block selection criteria, follow these steps:
1.
2.
In the Items frame, select the check boxes that correspond to the objects you want to block
select.
Some check boxes have corresponding command buttons (e.g., Line, Part, Pin). To make a
command button available, click a check box until a shaded check mark appears. Then, click the
button to open a Selection Mask dialog. You use the options in these dialogs to narrow your
selection criteria. For more information, see Edit Properties (page 211).
3.
4.
In the Select Mode frame, choose of the following buttons:
Inside Block. Choose this button to select all items within the selection box.
Outside Block. Choose this button to select items outside the selection box.
Touching Block. Choose this button to select all items inside or touching the selection
box.
Click OK to close the Options Block Selection dialog.
Moving Objects
There are several ways to move objects in a P-CAD Schematic design. When moving an object, any
connections rubber band to maintain the established nets.
83
Moving Objects
Moving an Object
There are two basic methods for moving objects in P-CAD Schematic:
Select the object that you want to move and drag it to a new position.
Select an object and press the arrow keys.
With either method listed above, you can move one or multiple objects. To move multiple objects,
draw a bounding outline around the group of objects to move. Then, drag them to a new position
or press the arrow keys.
As described in the following sections, you can also move objects during the placement process or
with the Edit Move by RefDes command.
Moving Objects During Placement

You can move parts, wires, buses, ports, points, text, attributes, fields and IEEE symbols before you
place them in a design. To move an object during the placement process, follow these steps:
1.
Choose a command from the Place menu. For example, choose Place Port. The Place Port
dialog appears.
2.
Use the controls in the Place Port dialog to specify the characteristics of the port you are about
to place. Then, close the dialog box.
3.
Press and hold down the left mouse button. Then, drag the ghosted outline of the object to a
location.
4.
Release the mouse button to place the object at the cursor location.
As a shortcut for holding down the mouse button during a drag-and-drop operation, press the ALT
key and click the workspace. When the ghosted outline of the object appears, move the object to a
location and press ALT to release the object at the cursor location.

To move parts by reference designator, follow these steps.
1.
84
Moving Objects
If you select parts in your design before you open this dialog, those parts are selected in the RefDes
list when the dialog appears
2.
Use one of the following methods to select parts from the RefDes list:
To select one part: Double-click a RefDes in the list. Or, select a RefDes from the list and
then click OK or press ENTER.
To select all parts: Click Select All. Then, click OK.
To select a range of parts: Hold down the SHIFT key and click the first and last parts in the
range to select. Then, click OK or press ENTER.
To select various parts: Hold down the CTRL key and click each part to select. Then, click
OK or press ENTER.
To search for parts in the RefDes list: type search criteria in the Select RefDes By box and
then press ENTER.
When the Edit Move by RefDes dialog closes, the status line shows the name of the Next
RefDes to move. You are in placement mode.
To cancel your selection, press ESC or right-click. This reopens the Edit Move by RefDes dialog,
so you can choose another part to move.
3.
Choose one of these methods to place the parts:
For quick placement, click the location at which you want to place the part.
For precise placement, do the following: (1) press and hold down the left mouse button or
press the SPACEBAR. (2) Move the ghosted outline of the part to a location. If appropriate,
press F to flip or R to rotate the part. (3) Place the part by releasing the mouse button or by
pressing the SPACEBAR.
85
If you selected multiple parts, the status line shows the Next RefDes to move. To skip to the
next RefDes, press N. To move to the previous RefDes, press B.
4.
Once youve moved all of the selected parts, the Edit Move By RefDes dialog appears. You have
these options:
To move another part, select it from the RefDes list.
To close the Edit Move by RefDes dialog, click Cancel or press ESC.

You can rotate and flip many objects in your design. When you rotate or flip an object, P-CAD
Schematic rotates the object about the selection point. For details, see Specifying a Selection Point
(page 82).
For items with associated connections, hold down the left mouse button while rotating or flipping
to prevent reconnection attempts each time you rotate or flip. Connections are changed when the
left mouse button is released.
To find out which objects you can rotate or flip, see the appropriate section in Place Commands
(page 259).
Rotating Objects During Placement

To rotate an object during the placement process, follow these steps:
1.
Choose a command from the Place menu. For example, choose Place Port.
2.
Click the workspace to place the selected object. If a dialog appears, use the options in the
dialog to specify the characteristics of the object you are about to place. Then, close the dialog
box.
3.
Hold down the left mouse button. Then, press R to rotate the object 90 degrees.
4.
Release the mouse button to place the object in your design.
Rotating Objects in a Design

To rotate an object that has been placed in a design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
86
Click
Choose Edit Select
Press the S key.
Select the object that you want to move. Then, press R to rotate the object 90 degrees.
Aligning Objects
Flipping Objects
To flip an object that has been placed in a design, select the object that you want to flip. Then, press
F to flip the object. When you flip an object, P-CAD Schematic flips the object about the selection
point. For details, see Specifying a Selection Point (page 82).
Aligning Objects
Aligning Parts Horizontally or Vertically
To align parts horizontally or vertically, follow these steps:
1.
Select the parts to align. Only parts can be selected for this command to be enabled.
2.
Right-click the parts and choose Selection Point from the shortcut menu. This is the point
about which the parts will be aligned, either horizontally or vertically.
3.
Place the selection reference point by clicking in the workspace. Without selecting a selection
reference point, the alignment and part spacing options are shaded.
4.
Choose Edit Align Parts. The Edit Align Components dialog appears:
5.
Select either horizontal or vertical alignment.
6.
To align the parts with equal spacing, select the Space Equally check box and enter the Spacing
value. The spacing value is the distance between the reference points of the parts.
7.
Click OK and the selected parts will be aligned.
Aligning Parts To Grid

To align parts to grid, follow these steps:
1.
Select the parts to align to grid. Only parts can be selected for this command to be enabled.
87
2.
Choose Edit Align Parts. The Edit Align Parts dialog appears.
3.
Click OK and the selected parts will be aligned to grid. Each selected off-grid part will be
moved to the nearest grid point.

During the line placement process, you can press the O key to switch between the enabled
orthogonal modes. The available orthogonal modes are divided into the following mode pairs:
90/90 Line-Line Mode: Both lines are either horizontal or vertical (displayed perpendicular to
each other). For long, the first segment is always longer than the second. For short, the first
segment is shorter. To switch between the two configurations, press the F key.
45/90 Line-Line Mode: The first mode makes the first segment displayed at a 45-degree angle
and the second segment is either horizontal or vertical. The second mode makes the first
segment either horizontal or vertical and the second segment. To switch between the two
modes, press the F key.
Enabling Orthogonal Modes

To enable an orthogonal mode, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Options Configure. The Options Configure dialog appears.
2.
In the Orthogonal Modes frame, select the following check boxes to enable a mode pair.
90/90 Line-Line Mode
45/90 Line-Line Mode
For placing lines, the modes are limited to line segments (no arcs).
3.
After you enable the orthogonal modes, you can switch between the enabled modes, or switch
between the mode pairs. For instructions, see Switching Between Orthogonal Modes (page 89) and
Switching Between Mode Pairs (page 89).
88
Resizing an Object
Switching Between Orthogonal Modes

Press the O key to switch between the orthogonal modes. The non-orthogonal mode straight-line
mode is always available, no matter which orthogonal modes are enabled.
Switching Between Mode Pairs

Press the F key to switch between the mode pair of the orthogonal mode you are in. The nonorthogonal mode straight-line mode is always available, no matter which orthogonal modes are
enabled.
Unwinding Segments
You can unwind (undo a segment by pressing the BACKSPACE key) wires, lines, and polygons.
When you place a multiple segment object, you can press the BACKSPACE key to delete the
previous segment. If you have finished placing the object by right clicking, then the unwind
function does not work. You can undo the placement of a finished object (Edit Undo), but you
cannot unwind it.
Resizing an Object
You can resize an object by clicking one of its handles and dragging to stretch the object. Object
handles are the squares that appear when you select certain objects (e.g., arcs or polygons).
Handles appear only if you select one object, and if the object can be resized.
The resize function varies among the different objects. However, some objects cannot be resized
(e.g., pins).
For example, to resize an arc you click one of the endpoint resize handles and drag the endpoint to
increase the sweep angle. To resize a polygon, you can grab one of its vertex handles and move it
to change the polygon.
When you move a polygon handle that is on an edge between two vertices, a new vertex is created
(allowing you even more reshaping). You can delete a vertex by moving it to an adjacent vertex and
releasing.
Lines, wires, buses, arcs, and polygons can be resized.
Cutting and Copying Objects

In P-CAD Schematic, you can cut or copy objects to the Clipboard, which is a temporary storage
area on your computer that houses the information that you want to transfer between designs,
89
documents, etc. You can also copy objects to a Meta file or block file. For details, see Copying
Objects to a File (page 91).
Cutting Objects from a Design

You can cut objects from a design and paste them to another location, design, or program. To cut
an object from a design, follow these steps:
1.
Select the objects that you want to cut.
2.
Choose Edit Cut or press CTRL+X.
The objects move to the Clipboard. When you cut objects from nets, you can get a variety of
results, depending on what you cut and the makeup of the net from which you remove it. For
example, deleting a wire from a net may split the net if the net is a contiguous net.
Cutting Objects From Nets

When you choose Edit Cut to remove objects from nets, the results depend on what you cut and
the makeup of the net you remove it from.
90
If you remove a wire from the middle of a net (bc in the example above):
If the deleted wire has a system-assigned net name (for example, NET00001) then one of the
nets is given a new system-assigned net name, while the other retains the original net name.
If the deleted wire was connected to a global net, the subnet still attached to the port or power
symbol retains the original net name, while the other net is renamed to a unique systemassigned net name.
If both subnets are connected to a port or power symbol, then both subnets will retain the
original name.
If the wire was connected to a jumper pin and nothing else is connected to that jumper pin.
Then all the jumpered pins are removed from the net.
If you delete a wire that isolates a pin from the rest of the net, you end up with a disconnected
node that is no longer part of any net. For example, in the above figure, if you delete wire cd, the
node d becomes isolated from the net.
Copying Objects to the Clipboard

You can copy objects and move them to the Clipboard. To do this, follow these steps
1.
2.
Choose Edit Copy or press CTRL+C.
The object moves to the Clipboard. You can then paste the contents of the Clipboard into your
design, to another design, or even another program.
Copying Objects to a File

To copy objects to a block or Meta file, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Choose Edit Copy to File. The Edit Copy to File dialog appears.
3.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the file.
4.
Type a name for your file in the File Name box.
5.
Select one of the following file formats from the Save as Type list:
6.
Block Files (*.blk). A file format that stores the information that you want to transfer
between P- CAD Schematic designs.
Meta Files (*.wmf). An image file format that can be transported between computers.
Click Save.
Copying Objects within the Same Design

To copy objects within the same design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Hold down the CTRL key. Then, drag the ghosted outline of the selected objects to a position.
3.
Release the mouse button to place a copy of the selected object at the cursor location.
Copying Nets
When you copy a contiguous net, P-CAD Schematic always creates a new system-assigned net
name. CTRL/Drag and Copy Matrix provide automatic net name incrementation based on
increment values you set using the Options Configure dialog.
91
Pasting Objects
Nets are contiguous if they are visually connected on the design. For instance, wires are contiguous
if they are connected endpoint to endpoint.
When wires are placed down, without being connected to an existing net, they are automatically
given a unique net name, for example, NET00001. These system-assigned nets can subsequently be
renamed, or ported to a new or existing net.
The Wire Properties and Utils Rename Net commands allow you to rename a selected net.
Copying a Matrix
A matrix is an array of circuit elements. With the Edit Copy Matrix command, you can duplicate
one or more selected objects in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
For example, you could choose this command to select a pin and create a column of four pins, or
you can select an existing column and create any number of additional columns.
To create a matrix of objects, follow these steps:
1.
Select the objects that you want to duplicate.
2.
Choose Edit Copy Matrix to open the Edit Copy Matrix dialog.
3.
In the Number of Columns box, specify how many duplications you want to perform
horizontally. In the Column Spacing box, enter a value to determine the spacing between
duplications and in which direction (positive=right, negative=left) to duplicate.
4.
In the Number of Rows box, specify how many duplications you want to perform vertically. In
the Row Spacing box, enter a value to determine the spacing between duplications and in
which direction (positive=up, negative=down) to duplicate.
You will receive an error message if what you specify for your duplication is too large to fit in
the Workspace.
5.
Click OK. If your duplication is unsatisfactory, choose Edit Undo to reverse the action.
Pasting Objects
Once you cut or copy information to the Clipboard or a block file, you can paste the objects into a
schematic design. This section summarizes the techniques you can use to paste objects in a design.
92
Pasting Objects
You must have enough space in the target workspace location for the items you are pasting. If the
space isn't sufficient or you are too close to the edge, the data cant be pasted to the design.
Pasting Clipboard Objects

To paste the contents of the Clipboard to a design, follow these steps:
1.
Cut or copy information to the Clipboard.
2.
Move the cursor to the location where you want to paste the information.
3.
Choose Edit Paste From Clipboard or press CTRL+V.
To learn how to copy information to the Clipboard, see Copying Objects to the Clipboard (page
91).
Pasting From a File

To paste objects from a file to a design, follow these steps:
1.
Copy information to a file. For instructions, see Copying Objects to a File (page 91).
2.
Choose Edit Paste From File or Edit Paste Circuit form File. The Edit Paste from File dialog
appears.
3.
Select the file that stores the objects you want to paste in your design. Then, click Open. The
cursor takes the shape of a crosshair cursor.
4.
Click the workspace at the location at which you want to paste the contents of the file.
To learn how to copy objects to a file, see Copying Objects to a File (page 91).
Splitting a Net
The naming of nets separated as a result of a cutting, moving, or pasting action depends on
whether the nets were global or local. This situation may arise when a wire is deleted from a net or
when a 2-pin part is inserted over a wire segment.
If the original wire has a system-assigned net name (for example, NET00001) then one of the
If the original wire was connected to a global net, the sub-net still attached to the port or
power symbol retains the original net name, while the other net is renamed to a unique
system-assigned net name.
If both sub-nets are connected to a port or power symbol, then both sub-nets retain the
original name.
Net splitting occurs if an inserted part has only two pins, and it is inserted over a single wire
segment.
93
Object Properties
Object Properties
With P-CAD Schematic, you can gain access to a Properties dialog that contains context-sensitive
information about and object in a design.
When displaying the properties of multiple objects, the result depends on whether the objects are
of the same type.
If the objects are the same type, but have different styles or other characteristics, then the
Properties dialog appears, but specific information about the objects will be blank or grayed where
the information differs between objects.
You can enter information in the dialog and click OK, and then all of the selected objects uniformly
take on the characteristics (e.g., dimensions) of what you specified in the dialog. You can use the
block selection mask to restrict selection. For information, see Options Block Selection (page 287).
Although you cannot display the properties of objects of different types, you can perform other
edit commands.
Opening a Properties Dialog

To open a Properties dialog, choose one of these methods:
Select an object and choose Edit Properties.
Right-click an object and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Double-click an object. A Properties dialog only displays if youve selected the Double-Click
Displays Properties check box in the Mouse tab of the Options Preferences dialog.
Editing Nets
This section discusses deleting objects from nets, managing net connections and the edit nets
function.
Deleting Objects from Nets

When you delete objects from nets, you get a variety of results depending on what you delete and
the makeup of the net from which you delete the objects. The function of smart nets is to maintain
certain connections when objects such as wires, parts, and net nodes are deleted. In general, the
following can occur.
If you remove a wire from the middle of a net:
94
symbol retains the original net name, while the other net is renamed to an unique systemassigned net name.
Editing Nets
If both sub-nets are connected to a port or power symbol, then both sub-nets will retain the
original name.
node that is no longer part of any net.
Managing Net Connections

A single symbol pin or a parts sub-selected pin can be connected to a net. To do this, right-click
the pin and choose the Add to Net command. When the Add to Net dialog appears, select a pin you
must supply the name of the existing net to which it will be connected.
A symbol pin connected to a net can be disconnected from the net. To do this, right-click the pin
and choose the Remove from Net command. The pin remains in the design as a single pin.
Using the Edit Nets Dialog

You can also use the Edit Nets dialog to select nets, edit net attributes and rename and delete nets
and buses. A net is an electrical connection (e.g., two pins connected by a wire). Buses are a
graphical representation of a bundle of one or more wires used to show multiple parallel wires on
the schematic.
If you click the Edit Attributes or View Attributes button, the Attributes dialog appears. Within the
collection, each attributes name and value appear in the column.
Adding an Attribute: To add an attribute, click the Add button to open the Place Attribute
dialog. Add a pre-defined attribute by choosing first the Category and then the desired
attribute. To add a new attribute, select {user-defined} in the Name list and enter the name for
the attribute. Enter the Value for the attribute and click OK, and the attribute is added to the
table.
Editing Attribute Properties: To edit an attributes properties, select an attribute from the table
and click the Properties button (or double-click the attribute) to open the Place Attribute
dialog.
Deleting an Attribute: Highlight an attribute in the table and click Delete.
Launching a Reference Link: When the special attribute Reference, whose value is a reference
link, is added to the pattern, you can select the Reference attribute and click Launch to launch
an application or web address to display a document or web site.
95
CHAPTER
Documentation Tools
The Documentation Toolbox focuses on accelerating the development of a complete, informative
documentation package that details the fabrication, assembly, and testing of the printed circuit
board. This chapter includes the following topics:
Title Sheets
Revision Blocks
Fields and Field Sets
Sheet Connector Cross Referencing
Net Index Tables
Note Tables
Power and Ground Tables
Revision Note Tables
Spare Gate Tables
Working with Tables
Reporting on Schematic Designs
Generating Reports
Generating a Netlist
97
Chapter 6: Documentation Tools
Title Sheets
Title Sheets
With P-CAD Schematic, you can create custom title sheets for each sheet in your schematic design
or you can select one of P-CADs standard title sheets to use on all of the sheets in your design.
Custom title sheets give you the ability to add a design border, zones, and a title block
independently, using the combination and layout that best fits your design needs. For
instructions, see Creating a Custom Title Sheet (page 101).
Standard title sheets are a collection of title sheet templates that come with P-CAD Schematic.
These sheets contain a design border, zones, and title block by default. For instructions, see
Using a Standard Title Sheet (page 100).
A title sheet can contain several items. As shown in the following figure, a title sheet can contain a
design border, zones, and a title block.
Before you create a custom title sheet or use a standard sheet, you should be familiar with the basic
components of a title sheet: design borders, zones, and title blocks.
Design Borders
Depending on your workspace size, the design border around a title sheet has a default dimension
of 1/2 inch (500mils or 12.7mm) inside each edge of the workspace. The following table details the
standard workspace sizes and the corresponding border dimensions in P-CAD Schematic:
98
Title Sheets
Workspace Size
Dimensions (inches)
Workspace Size
Dimensions (millimeters)
8.5 x 11
A4
210 x 297
11 x 17
A3
297 x 420
17 x 22
A2
420 x 594
22 x 34
A1
594 x 841
34 x 44
A0
841 x 1187
Zones
A design border and its zones are the primary components in a schematic title sheet. Like a road
map, zones divide the horizontal and vertical areas of the design into various sections. The
following figure shows you a portion of a design border and its zones:
The zone intelligence in P-CAD Schematic give you the ability to track nets between sheets and
automatically include these net locations as annotations in your design. This feature is enabled by
default, whether or not the zones are displayed in the workspace. However, to prevent overlay, it is
recommended that you turn off the display of the border and zones when you use a standard title
sheet.
Title Blocks
You can place a title block on any sheet, which includes design information such as, Title, Author,
Design Number and Revision fields. The following figure shows you a sample title block:
99
Title Sheets
The structure of a title block can be unique for each schematic sheet. P-CAD Schematic includes
several schematic title block files that you can use in your design.
You can create your own title block files. In addition, you place fields within the block. These fields
can also be unique to each sheet. For information, see Fields and Field Sets (page 103).
In P-CAD Schematic, title block files have the *.ttl file name extension. In P-CAD PCB, title block
files have the *.tbk file name extension.
After you are familiar with the basic components of a title, see one of the following topics to learn
how to include title sheets and related components in your design:
Using the Global Title Sheet (page 100).
Using a Standard Title Sheet (page 100).
Creating a Custom Title Sheet (page 101).
Using the Global Title Sheet

To use the global title sheet, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Options Sheets.
Choose Options Configure. Then, click Edit Title Sheets in the Title Sheets frame.
2.
When the Options Sheets dialog appears, click the Titles tab.
3.
From the Sheets list, select the sheet to which you want to apply the standard title sheet.
4.
Choose Global.
5.
Click Modify.
6.
Click Close.
Unless otherwise specified, the global title sheet appears on every sheet in your design by default.
Using a Standard Title Sheet

A standard title sheet includes a design border and zones. Several title sheet files are available in
the Titles folder, which is located in your installation directory. To use one of these title sheets in
your design, follow these steps:
1.
100
Title Sheets
2.
3.
From the Sheets list, select the sheet to which you want to assign the standard title sheet.
4.
In the Title Block frame, click Select. The Open Title Block dialog appears.
5.
Select the title sheet file you want to use and click Open. Standard title sheet files are located
in the Titles folder of the P-CAD installation directory and have the *.ttl file name
extension.
6.
(Optional) Turn off the display of the design border and its zones:
To turn off the display of the design border, clear the Display Border check box.
To turn off the display of the zones, clear the Annotate Zone Information check box.
To correspond to the zoned perimeter included on the standard title sheet, enter information
in the Borders and Zones frames. However, it is recommended that you turn off the display of
the design border and its zones to prevent overlay. The border selections specify the
dimensions of the perimeter; the default border dimensions correctly specify the bounds of a
standard title sheet. The zones selections specify the number of zones in the horizontal and
vertical directions. The zone intelligence is enabled whether or not the zones are displayed
and is included to annotate a sheet connector or to complete one of the tables of design data.
7.
Click Modify to apply your changes to the selected sheet.
8.
Click Close.
Creating a Custom Title Sheet

To create a custom title sheet that you can later use in P-CAD Schematic designs, follow these
steps:
1.
Create a one-sheet design in P-CAD Schematic. For title sheets, you may place:
Lines
Arcs
Polygons
Text
Attributes
Fields
2.
Choose File Save As. The Save As dialog appears.
3.
Navigate to the Titles folder in your P-CAD installation directory.
4.
In the File name box, type the file name and file name extension as shown in the following
example: title.ttl
101
Title Sheets
When you type the file name, you must enclose the filename and file name extension in
quotation marks (e.g., TitleA.ttl).
5.
Click Save.
You can now use the custom title sheet in your designs. For instructions on using a custom title
sheet, see the following section.
Using a Custom Title Sheet

To use a custom title sheet in a design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
In the Sheets list, select the schematic sheet on which you want to place the title sheet
components.
4.
Choose Custom. The options in the Titles tab become available.

If you choose Global, P-CAD Schematic uses the Global title sheet. The Global title sheet
contains a design border, zones, and a title block by default.
5.
In the Border frame, select the Display Border check box to show a border in the workspace.
6.
In the Relative Origin frame, type a value in the Height and Width boxes. Then, type a value in
the X and Y boxes.
Alternatively, select the Size to Workspace check box to use the default border size and
location.
7.
102
To add zones to the design border, follow these steps:
In the Horizontal frame, select the Alpha or Numeric button and the Ascending or
Descending button.
In the Vertical frame, select the Alpha or Numeric button and the Ascending or
Descending button.
Select the Annotate Zone Information check box.
Select a text style from the Text Style box.
8.
If you want to add a title block, enter values in the File Name and Lower Right Offset boxes in
the Title Block frame. For information, see Title Block (page 99).
9.
(Optional) To add a title block, follow these steps:
Revision Blocks
Click Select. When the Open Title Block dialog appears, select a *.ttl file from the
Titles folder in your P-CAD installation directory.
Select the Field Set, which includes the fields to place in the title block. For details on
assigning a field set to a sheet, see Fields and Field Sets (page 103).
10. Click Modify. This assigns the chosen title sheet components to the selected sheets. Repeat
from step 1 for other sheets if desired.
11. When you click Close, the modified sheets show the border, zones, and title blocks specified.
Revision Blocks
A revision block details the differences between versions of a design. In P-CAD Schematic, a
revision block is placed as a Revision Note Table. For more information, see Revision Note Tables
(page 114). The following figure shows you an example revision block, as it looks in a schematic
design.

A field acts as a placeholder for specific design information and you can insert a field anywhere in a
design or title block. For example, if you insert the Title field in a design, P-CAD Schematic
automatically displays the design title wherever the field is placed. After you place a field in a
design, either a field code or field result appears.
P-CAD Schematic includes the following fields by default: Approved By, Author, Checked By,
Company Name, Date, Drawing Number, Drawn By, Engineer, Revision, Time and Title. You can
also create custom fields to include in a design.
As shown in the following illustration, a field code appears between the braces (e.g., {Drawing
Number} or {Date}). A field result appears when any corresponding design information exists (e.g.,
Title (Digdemo.sch), Size (C), and Rev (5s).
103
You can also group fields into field sets and then assign a set to a schematic sheet. P-CAD
Schematic automatically updates the field information as field values change, based on the field set
of the sheet on which they are located.
To learn how to use fields and field sets in a design, see one of the following topics:
Adding a Custom Field (page 104).
Placing Fields in a Design (page 105).
Changing Field Results (page 105).
Adding a Field Set (page 105).
Assigning Field Sets to Schematic Sheets (page 107).
Adding a Custom Field

To add a custom field to a design, follow these steps:
104
1.
Choose File Design Info. The Design Info dialog appears.
2.
Click the Fields tab.
3.
Click Add. The following Field Properties dialog appears.
4.
Type a name for the custom field in the Name box.
5.
Type a value for the custom field in the Value box.
6.
Click OK to close the Field Properties dialog. You custom field appears in the spreadsheet of
the Fields tab.
To learn how to place fields in a design, see the following procedure.
Placing Fields in a Design

To place a field in a design, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Place Field or click the Place Field button in the Placement toolbar.
2.
Click the workspace. The Place Field dialog appears.
3.
Select a field from the Name list. For example, select Approved By.
4.
Click OK to close the Place Field dialog.
5.
Click the workspace in the location at which you want to place the field. The field code
{Approved By} appears.
6.
To place another field, click the workspace again and repeat steps 3 - 5.
7.
To exit field placement mode, choose Edit Select or another menu command.
When design information exists for a field, a field result replaces the field code. For more
information, see Changing Field Results (page 105).
Changing Field Results

When corresponding design information exists for a field, a field result appears in place of the field
code (e.g., J.Smith replaces {Approved By}). To change field results, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Open the Field Properties dialog using one of the following methods:
Double-click the field name.
105
Select the field name and click Properties.
4.
When the Field Properties dialog appears, enter information in the Value box. For example,
enter a name, as shown in the following figure:
5.
Click OK to close the Field Properties dialog.
6.
Click Close in the Design Info dialog. The value you entered appears in the field placeholder.
Adding a Field Set

You can group fields into distinct field sets, which can contain fields such as title, author, drawing
number, etc. To create a field set, follow these steps:
106
1.
Choose File Design Info. The File Design Info dialog appears.
2.
3.
Click Field Sets. The Field Sets dialog appears.
4.
Click Add. As shown in the following figure, the name Field Set 1 appears in the Fields Sets list
and the Field Set Name box.
5.
In the Field Set Name box, type a name for your new field set.
6.
Click Close to return to the Fields tab of the File Design Info dialog. Your new field set is
available in the Field Set list.
Assigning Field Sets to Schematic Sheets

You can assign sheet-specific field sets to the sheets in a schematic design. To do this, follow these
steps:
1.
2.
Click the Titles tab.
3.
Select the sheet to which you want to apply the field set from the Sheets list.
4.
Select a field set from the Field Sets list. For instructions on adding sets to this list, see Adding a
Field Set (page 106).
5.
Click Modify to apply your changes to the selected sheet.
6.
Click Close.

When a schematic sheet contains zones, you can cross-reference the sheet connectors. A sheet
connector is annotated with the zone location of all other cross sheet connectors associated with
the same net on all schematic sheets. For more information, see one of the following topics:
Sheet Connector Overview (page 107)
Annotating Sheet Connectors (page 108)
Viewing Sheet Connector Properties (page 110)
Jumping to Sheet Connectors (page 110)
Sheet Connector Overview

To create a component to use as a sheet connector, you must save it as a Sheet Connector. Sample
sheet connectors (i.e., SHEETIN, SHEETOUT) are located in the Demo.lib file in the Demo folder of
your P-CAD installation directory.
A cross-referenced sheet connector is annotated with the sheet name or sheet number, as well as
the alphanumeric zone location of all instances of sheet connectors belonging to the same net. A
sample cross-referenced sheet connector is displayed in the following figure:
107
A sheet connector indicates that the attached net is continued on another sheet. It has no net
intelligence, with the exception that when placed in a schematic design, the value attribute is set to
the net name. You can display the net name, along with the sheet connectors zone location. For
details, see Annotating Sheet Connectors (page 108).
If the value attribute of a sheet connector changes, it will automatically be reset to the net name
when you load the design into P-CAD Schematic.
A sheet connector does not impact whether the net is local or global. For the net to be global, a
sheet connector must be used in conjunction with a port. The port designates the net as global; the
sheet connector provides the ability for cross sheet annotation.
These sheet connector cross-reference zone locations can be summarized in a net index table. This
table can be placed on a schematic sheet for reference. For information, see Net Index Tables (page
111).
Zone locations of global nets are automatically included in the Global Nets report. For information,
see File Reports (page 177).
Annotating Sheet Connectors

When a net spans more than one schematic sheet, a sheet connector is a graphical indication that
the net continues on another sheet. Using P-CAD Schematics zone intelligence, you can record the
sheet on which the net is continued. The sheet connector can be annotated with the connecting
sheets name and its zone location on that sheet.
To annotate a sheet connector, follow these steps:
108
1.
Choose Options Display. The Options Display dialog appears.
2.
3.
In the Sheet Connector Cross Referencing frame, select the Show Cross Referencing check
box as shown in the following figure:
4.
Select a text style for the cross-reference text from the Text Style list.
5.
Specify the desired X and Y Offset from the part origin to the beginning of the cross-reference
text.
6.
The title sheet border must be zoned to include alphanumeric zone locations in the reference,
although the zones need not be displayed.
When you choose to display cross-references, all sheet connectors on all sheets are annotated. If a
nets location is moved or if a sheet connector is added or deleted from the net, the sheet
connector cross-references for all sheet connectors associated with that net are automatically
updated.
If updating the sheet connector cross-reference causes the annotation to fall outside the
workspace, the annotation is relocated to its original offset point on the workspace. Subselect and
drag the cross-reference text to move it.
Originally the cross-reference annotations for a single sheet connector are organized in a column
at the offset point. You can subselect the annotations and relocate them. The relocated annotations
will be automatically rescreened based on the sheet name. The resequencing order is from left to
right, then from top to bottom, as shown in the following example:
Sheet1[A3] Sheet2[C5] Sheet3[H4]
Sheet4[B2] Sheet5[D1]
Sheet6[J4]
Sheet7[K5]
109
Viewing Sheet Connector Properties

To view sheet connector properties, follow these steps:
1.
Select a cross-referenced sheet connector.
2.
Open the Part Properties dialog choosing one of the methods:
Choose Edit Properties.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Part Properties dialog appears, with the Sheet Connector tab selected:
This tab lists the net name, sheet, and zone information of the selected sheet connector, and
all sheet connectors belonging to the same net on other sheets.
Jumping to Sheet Connectors

You can jump to a sheet connector of the same net on another sheet:
110
1.
Select a sheet connector.
2.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Part Properties dialog appears.
3.
Select the sheet connector to which you want to jump in the Cross-referenced Sheet
Connectors list.
4.
Click Jump. The focus of the window jumps to the selected sheet connector.
Net Index Tables
Net Index Tables

A net index table summarizes the sheet connector cross-references in a design. This table can be
placed on a schematic sheet as a reference of net locations. The following is a sample net index
table:
The sheet connectors must be cross-referenced between sheets in order to include zone
information in a net index table. For details, see Annotating Sheet Connectors (page 108).
When the nets are relocated or the sheet connector information of the current design is otherwise
modified, the net index table should be updated to reflect the design changes. For instructions, see
Updating Tables (page 118).
You can also select a net index table and choose Edit Properties. Through the Properties dialogs
you can change a variety of object characteristics but not the table type or the design data
contained within the table. With table properties, you can modify the tables line width, name, and
text style.
A table is updated when its properties are modified.
Placing a Net Index Table

To place a table in a design, follow these steps:
1.
Choose DocTool Place Table. The Place Table dialog appears.
2.
Select Net Index Table from the Table Type list.
111
Note Tables
3.
Type a name for the table in the Table Name box. The name of the table type appears in this
box by default.
4.
Select a text style for the table from the Text Style list.
5.
Click OK to close the Place Table dialog.
6.
Click the workspace at the location at which you want to place the table. A table cannot be
placed outside the workspace.
7.
(Optional) To place another table, click the workspace again. Then, repeat steps 2 - 6.
8.
To quit placing tables, choose Edit Select or another menu command.
Note Tables
A note table contains any notes that youve added to your design. To learn how to place a notes
table in a design, see Placing a Notes Table (page 113).
Adding Notes to a Note Table

To add notes to a note table, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click the Notes tab.
3.
Click Add.
4.
Type a note in the next available Note Text box.
5.
Click Close.
After you add or delete revision notes to a table, you must update the table. For instructions, see
Importing Text Files as Notes

To import a notes file, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click the Notes tab.
3.
Click Import. The Open dialog appears.
4.
Select the file to import and click Open. You return to the Design Info dialog.
5.
Click Close.
Exporting Notes to a Text File

To export a notes file, follow these steps:
112
1.
2.
Click Export. The Save As dialog appears.
3.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the text file.
4.
Type a name for the text file in the File name box.
5.
Select Text Files (*.txt) from the Save as type list.
6.
Click Save.
Placing a Notes Table

1.
2.
Select Note Table from the Table Type list.
3.
box by default.
4.
5.
Choose the following options.
In the Note Numbering frame, choose Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Enter a value in the Width of Note Numbering box.
6.
7.
8.
(Optional) To place another table, click the workspace again. Then, repeat steps 2 - 6.
9.

A power table summarizes the power and ground nets in a schematic. This table can be placed on a
schematic sheet for reference. The following figure shows you a power table:
113
The table includes the reference designator of all components that have power and ground pins.
You can choose to include all pins, or restrict it to include hidden pins only. You can also restrict by
reference designator prefix.
The power table summarizes the reference designator, component type, component pattern, and
the power and ground nets for the components power pins.
Placing a Power Table

To place a power and ground table in your design, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select Power Table from the Table Type list.
3.
box by default.
4.
5.
In the Pins to Include frame, choose Hidden Pins Only or All Pins.
In the Components to Include frame, choose Only RefDes Prefix or All Components.
6.
7.
8.

A revision block details the differences between versions of a design. An example revision block is
shown as follows:
114
In P-CAD Schematic, a revision block is placed as a Revision Notes Table. To learn how to place a
table in the design, see Placing a Revision Note Table (page 116).
Adding Revision Notes to a Table

To add revision notes to a table, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Click the Revisions tab.
3.
Click Add.
4.
Type a revision note in the next available Note Text box.
5.
Click Close.
After you add or delete revision notes to a table, you must update the table. For instructions, see
Importing Text Files as Revision Notes

To import a text file as a revision note, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Click Import. The Open dialog appears.
4.
5.
Click Close.
Exporting Revision Notes to a Text File

To export a notes file, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Click Export. The Open dialog appears.
4.
5.
Click Close.
115
Spare Gate Tables
Placing a Revision Note Table

1.
2.
Select Revision Note Table from the Table Type list.
3.
box by default.
4.
5.
In the Note Numbering frame, choose Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Enter a value in the Width of Note Numbering box.
6.
7.
8.
Spare Gate Tables

A spare gate table summarizes the last used, unused, and spare gates in a design. This table can be
placed on a schematic sheet to determine which components have all parts included in the design.
The following figure shows you a sample of a spare gate table:
116
Working with Tables
The last used and not used columns contain the last placed and the remaining unused reference
designators for each reference designator prefix included in the design. The spare gate column
includes the reference designator and section number of any unused gate, when at least one
section of the multigate component is included in the design.
Placing a Spare Gate Table

1.
2.
Select Spare Gate Table from the Table Type list.
3.
box by default.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Working with Tables

P-CAD Schematic gives you the ability to create and insert a variety of tables in your schematic
design. Once youve placed a table in your design, you can modify and update the information
using the procedures described in this section.
Modifying Tables
To modify a table, follow these steps:
1.
Select the table that you want to modify.
2.
Choose one of the methods to open the Table Properties dialog.
Choose Edit Properties.
Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3.
(Optional) To change the table name, type a new name in the Table Name box.
4.
(Optional) To change the text style, select a style from the Text Style list.
5.
(Optional) To change the line width, type a new value in the Line Width box.
6.
If you are updating a Power Table, you can modify the following information.
In the Pins to Include frame, choose All Pins or Hidden Pins.
In the Components to Include frame, choose All Components or Only RefDes Prefix.
117
7.
Click OK to close the Table Properties dialog.
Updating Tables
If you modify any of the data that is included in a table, you must update the table. To do this,
follow these steps:
1.
2.
Choose one of these methods to update tables:
Select one or more tables and choose DocTool Update.
Select one table. Then, right-click and choose Update from the shortcut menu.
Choose DocTool Update All to update all of the tables and diagrams in your design.
A warning message appears to notify you that the update action cannot be undone. Click Yes
to acknowledge this message.

The report options in P-CAD Schematic give you the ability to choose which fields appear in a
report, the sort order, as well other formatting options such as lines per page, headers, footers, etc.
These options are saved with the design file when you quit P-CAD Schematic.
Reports Available in P-CAD Schematic

P-CAD Schematic provides you with a collection of standard reports to help you track and manage
the schematic design process. The following reports are available:
Attributes Report
Bill of Materials Report
Global Nets Report
Last Used RefDes Report
Library Contents Report
Parts Location Report
Parts Usage Report.
You can customize a standard report or you can create a custom report, based on one of the
existing reports. For instructions, see Customizing a Standard Report (page 119) or Creating a
Custom Report (page 120).
Attributes Report
The Attributes Report lists all of the design-level attributes that are assigned to the parts and nets in
your schematic. The Attributes Report contains two sections: Component Attributes and Net
Attributes.
118
Generating Reports
For instructions, see Generating Reports (page 119).
Bill of Materials Report

The Bill of Materials Report lists the parts in your schematic diagram, as well as any attributes you
have selected for inclusion in the report.
To add attributes from a non-P-CAD source, click the Import Files button in the Customize Report
dialog. For details on importing files, see the P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide.
The Count field is system-generated at the time the report is produced. Selection criteria cannot be
applied to the Count field.
Global Nets Report

The Global Nets Report lists the sheets on which a net appears, for each global net in your
schematic design. A global net is any net that includes a port, a power symbol, or a hidden power
pin. It can consist of one or more ported subnets, subnets connected by power symbols, one or
more hidden power pins with the same net name, or a combination of all the above.
The sheet connectors must be cross-referenced between sheets in order to include zone
information in a Global Nets report. For details, see Annotating Sheet Connectors (page 108).
Last Used RefDes Report

The Last Used RefDes Report lists the last used reference designator for each component type in
your schematic design.
Library Contents Report

The Library Contents Report lists all of the components in any open libraries. To learn how to open
a library, see Library Setup (page 325).
Parts Location Report

The Parts Location Report lists the reference designator, sheet number, and sheet location of each
part in your schematic design.
Parts Usage Report

The Parts Usage Report lists all unused parts of multipart components in your schematic design. It
can help you minimize the total number of components used in a design.
Generating Reports
Customizing a Standard Report
To customize one of the standard reports provided with P-CAD Schematic, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select a report in the Reports to Generate list.
119
Generating Reports
3.
Click Customize. The Customize Report dialog appears. Notice that the title bar displays the
report type.
4.
Set your custom report options as appropriate.
5.
Click OK to close the Customize Report dialog.
After you customize a report, you can generate it. For instructions, see Generating a Report (page
123).
Creating a Custom Report

When you create a custom report, you base it on a standard report and give it a unique name. To
create a custom report, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the report on which you want to base your custom report from the Reports to Generate
list.
3.
Click Customize. The Customize Report dialog appears. Notice that the title bar displays the
type of report you are customizing.
4.
Set your report options as appropriate. For instructions, see one of the following topics:
Setting Format Options (page 121).
Setting Data Selection Options (page 121).
Setting Sort Options (page 122).
5.
Click Add. The Report Configuration dialog appears:
6.
Type a name and file name extension for the custom report in the Enter Report Name box. For
example, type: Digdemo.bom
7.
Click OK to return to the File Reports dialog.
Your new report is listed by name in the Reports to Generate list. You can now generate the report
output. For instructions, see Generating a Report (page 123).
If you select and generate both the custom report and the one on which it was based, both results
are output in a single file or report. To get individual outputs, generate each report separately.
120
Generating Reports
Setting Format Options

If you generate a report using the P-CAD Report or Separated List style format, you have various
formatting options. To set these formatting options, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Format tab.
2.
If you are setting up the format for a Separated List, skip to step 6. Otherwise, continue with
steps 3 - 7.
3.
Type a header and footer in the Header and Footer boxes.
4.
In the Page Format frame, select the following check boxes as appropriate:
Use Header: Includes the information you specified in the Header box.
Use Footer: Includes the footer information entered in the Footer box.
Design Info: Includes the information you entered in the File Design Info command and
dialog.
Date/Page: Includes the current date and the page number.
Pagination: Allows you to create your own pagination (lines per page).
5.
In the Lines per Page box, type the number of lines you want printed on each page.
6.
Type a file name extension in the File Extension box. Each report has a file name extension that
appears in this box by default.
7.
In the Separated List frame, choose one of the following option buttons:
Include Report Preface: Select this check box to include a report preface.
Include Column Headers: Select this check box to include column headers at the top of
your report.
To set the width of a single column, click the Selection tab. Next, choose a field from the
spreadsheet. Then, click the Format tab and type a width for that column in the Column Width
box. Columns are set to 20 characters in width by default.
Setting Data Selection Options

To set data selection options for your report, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Selection tab.
2.
Select a section from the Report Section list. This list is only available for the Attributes Report.
3.
In the Show column, select the check boxes that correspond to the fields you want to include
in the report.
4.
To change the order of the fields in the list, select a field and click Move Up or Move Down.
121
Generating Reports
5.
If you can add attribute fields to a report, the Add Row button is available. Click this button to
open the Select Attribute dialog.
6.
Select an attribute from the list and click OK. A row of data is added to the report spreadsheet
in the Selection tab.
7.
To set report criteria for a row of data, enter information in the appropriate cells of the Criteria
(And) and Or columns. To learn how to enter information in these fields, see Selecting Report
Criteria (page 122).
8.
To add an Or column to the report spreadsheet, click Add Column. Then set additional report
criteria.
Setting Sort Options

1.
Click the Sort tab.
2.
Select a section from the Report Section list. This list is only available for the Attributes Report.
3.
In the Available Fields list, select the fields you want to include in the report.
4.
Add the field to the report using one of the following methods:
5.
Select a field from the Selected Fields list and click Insert. P-CAD Schematic inserts the
field above the field you select.
Click Append. The fields you want to include appear at the bottom of the Selected Fields
list.
In the Sorting Order frame, choose Ascending or Descending to define the sort order for the
list.
Selecting Report Criteria

The following table shows the operators available for use in the Criteria (And) and the Or columns:
Use this operator
=
To perform this function

Exactly equal to
If used with a wildcard operator, * or ?, this operator becomes literal. It
searches for a set of characters with, for example, a question mark at the
end.
122
<
Less than
>
Greater than
<=
Less than or equal to
>=
Greater than or equal to
<>
Not equal to
Generating Reports
IsLike
If used with a wildcard operator, IsLike means is similar to. For example,
IsLike 5* could be 50, 510, 5, etc.
If not used with a wildcard operator, IsLike is equivalent to =.
IsNotLike
If used with a wildcard operator, IsNotLike means is not similar to. For
example, IsNotLike 5* could be 14 or 20 or 42, but not 50, 510, or 5.
If not used with a wildcard operator, IsNotLike is equivalent to <>.
Exist
The attribute exists.
NotExist
The attribute does not exist.
AnyValue
The attribute exists and it has some value.
NoValue
The attribute exists, but it is assigned no value.
Generating a Report
After youve set up your custom report options, you can generate a report. To do this, follow these
steps:
1.
2.
In the Reports to Generate list, select the check boxes that correspond to the type of reports
you want to generate.
3.
Click Filename. The Reports File Save As dialog appears.
4.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the report file.
5.
Type a name for the report file in the File name box.
6.
Select Report Files (*.*) from the Save As type list.
7.
Click Save. You return to the File Reports dialog.
8.
In the Report Destination frame, choose one of the following buttons:
9.
Screen. Sends the output to a file and opens the file using the Notepad Utility.
File. Sends the output to a file.
Printer. Sends output directly to the printer without creating files.
In the Style Format frame, choose one of the following buttons:
Separated List. Puts all data in character-separated format. This format can be imported
into other spreadsheet and database programs.
P-CAD Report. Produces a report format with columns and spaces, etc.
If you choose Separated List, select a separator from the List Separator list.
123
The list separator character displayed in the box is used for both imported and exported files.
The default character is your computers regional setting.
10. Set any customized options for an individual report type. For instructions, see Customizing a
Standard Report (page 119) or Creating a Custom Report (page 120).
11. Click Generate Reports.
With P-CAD Schematic, you can generate netlist that lists the components and nets in your design.
Typically, a netlist is used by a printed circuit board editor, such as P-CAD PCB, to form the basis of
your board design.
To generate a netlist, follow these steps:
124
1.
Open a schematic design file.
2.
Choose Utils Generate Netlist. The following Utils Generate Netlist dialog appears.
3.
Click Netlist Filename. The following Netlist File dialog appears.
4.
Navigate to the directory in which you want to save the netlist file.
5.
Type a name for the netlist file in the File name box.
6.
Select Netlist Files (*.net) from the Save As type list.
7.
Click Save. You return to the Utils Generate Netlist dialog.
8.
In the Netlist Format list, select one of the following formats for your netlist:
P-CAD ASCII
Tango
FutureNet Netlist
FutureNet Pinlist
Master Designer
EDIF 2.0.0
Pspice
Xspice.
The P-CAD ASCII format supports attribute passing. If you select this option, you may also
select the Include Library Information check box.
9.
Click OK to generate the netlist. The netlist is saved with the filename and in the directory you
specified.
125
CHAPTER
DDE Hotlinks
DDE Hotlinks provides a means of linking component and net highlight information between
P-CAD Schematics and P-CAD PCB applications. This chapter includes the following topics:
Setting up the DDE Hotlinks Feature
Using DDE Hotlinks

About DDE Hotlinks
The DDE Hotlinks feature gives you the ability to create a connection between two related design
files created in separate P-CAD programs. With this feature, you can explore the relationships
between designs when you run the following programs:
P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB/Relay
P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB Viewer
With DDE Hotlinks, you can update information in one design and the feature automatically
updates the same information in a related design. For example, you could apply the current
highlight color to a part in a Schematic design and the DDE Hotlinks feature updates the related
part in P-CAD PCB. Or, when you highlight a net in a PCB design, the DDE Hotlinks feature
highlights the corresponding net in a related Schematic design.
Enabling DDE Hotlinks

To the DDE Hotlinks feature in P-CAD Schematic, follow these steps:
1.
127
Chapter 7: DDE Hotlinks
2.
Select the DDE Hotlinks check box.
3.
Selecting the Current Highlight Color

To select the current highlight color, follow these steps:
128
1.
2.
3.
Click Highlight to open the color palette.
4.
Click a color in the palette.
5.
Close the palette.
6.
Using DDE Hotlinks
Using DDE Hotlinks

Highlighting Parts
To highlight parts so you can explore the relationships between parts in a Schematic and PCB/Relay
design, follow these steps:
1.
Start P-CAD Schematic and open a .sch design file.
2.
Start P-CAD PCB and open a .pcb design file.
3.
Choose Edit Parts to open the Edit Part dialog.
4.
Select a part in the Parts list box.
5.
Click Highlight.
6.
Click Close to exit the Edit Parts dialog box. The part remains selected in P-CAD Schematic and
highlighted in P-CAD PCB/Relay.
7.
Click anywhere in the P-CAD Schematic workspace to cancel the selection of the. The part
appears in the current highlight color.
Unhighlighting Parts
1.
Choose Edit Parts to open the Edit Part dialog.
2.
Select a part in the Parts list box.
3.
Click Unhighlight.
129
Using DDE Hotlinks
4.
Click Close to exit the Edit Parts dialog box and to remove the highlight color from the part in
both programs.
5.
Select a part in the P-CAD Schematic workspace.

When you rest the mouse pointer over the parts in your design, a Data Tip appears.
6.
Right-click the part and choose Highlight from the shortcut menu. The part remains selected in
P- CAD Schematic and the corresponding part becomes highlighted in P-CAD PCB/Relay.
7.
Click anywhere in the P-CAD Schematic workspace to cancel the selection of the part. The part
appears in the current highlight color.
8.
Right-click the part again and choose Unhighlight from the shortcut menu.
Highlighting and Unhighlighting Attached Nets

To explore the relationship between the nets in a Schematic and PCB/Relay design, follow these
steps:
1.
Select a part in P-CAD Schematic.
2.
Right-click and choose Highlight Attached Nets from the shortcut menu. In both programs, all
attached nets become highlighted, included bus connections, junctions, ports, wires, and pins.
3.
Select the again. Then, right-click and choose Unhighlight Attached Nets from the shortcut
menu. This removes the highlight color from all nets attached to the selected part.
4.
In P-CAD Schematic, choose Edit Parts to open the Edit Parts dialog box.
5.
Select part U23 in the Parts list.
6.
Click Highlight Attached Nets. In both programs, all attached nets become highlighted,
included bus connections, junctions, ports, wires, and pins.
7.
Click Close to exit the Edit Parts dialog box. Notice that the nets appear in the current highlight
color.
8.
Choose Edit Unhighlight All to remove the highlight color from all of the objects.
Highlighting Nets
To highlight nets in a design, follow these steps:
1.
130
Using DDE Hotlinks
2.
Select AD3 in the Net Names list box.
3.
Click Highlight.
4.
Click Close to exit the Edit Nets dialog box.
Selecting All Highlighted Objects in a Design

When you want to perform editing functions on a group of highlighted objects, follow these steps:
1.
Highlight one or more objects in your design.
2.
Choose Edit Select Highlighted to select all of the highlighted objects in a design
If a highlighted object is not selected when you choose Edit Select Highlighted, open the
Options Block Selection dialog and change your block selection criteria.
131
CHAPTER

P-CAD provides powerful Electrical Rules Checking (ECR) capabilities. The information contained in
this chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring the ERC Feature
Using ERC Error Annotation

Setting up Checks and Severity Levels
An electrical rules check verifies that your design does not violate the rules set up in the Utils
Electrical Rules Check dialog.
To set up these rules, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Utils ERC to open the Utils Electrical Rules Check dialog.
133
Chapter 8: Verifying a Schematic Design
By default, a file name for the ERC report automatically appears next to the Filename button.
2.
Click Filename to open the Electrical Rules Check Report dialog box.
3.
Change the name of the file in the File name box.
4.
Select the check boxes of your choice in the Design Rule Checks frame, to apply specific rules
to the design for validation.
5.
Select the View Report check box in the Report Options frame to automatically display the
report when the validation process is complete.
Before you click OK to start the validation process, you will set up the ERC report options and
choose Severity Levels as described in the next lesson.
6.
134
Select all of the check boxes in the Design Rules Checks frame. The following describes each
option:
Single Node Nets: Reports all nets with only one node.
No Node Nets: Reports all nets with no nodes.
Electrical Rules: Reports incompatible pin types connected together. For example, two
output pins connected together or an output pin connected to a power pin.
Unconnected Pins: Reports all pins that are not connected to any other pins (single node
nets). This includes pins that are not connected to anything at all.
Unconnected Wires: Reports all wires that are unconnected (floating). An unconnected
wire is one that is not attached to a pin.
Bus/Net Rules: Reports on nets only referenced once in a bus (i.e., a wire goes into a bus,
but doesn't come out).
Component Rules: Reports on all components that are on top of other components.
Net Connectivity Rules: Reports on power net errors. This option is discussed in more
detail later in this chapter.
Hierarchy Rules: Reports on module and link errors. Each module must have a link
attribute with pins of matching electrical type and quantity. These module and link pins
must be connected. All link pins must be placed within the design and have an attribute
referencing a valid link component.
7.
Select the Annotate Errors check box to annotate all errors.
8.
Click Severity Level to open the Rules Severity Level dialog.
9.
Select one or more rules in the list box. Then, change the severity level to Ignored. To do this,
choose the Ignored button in the Severity Level frame.
10. Click OK to return to the Utils Electrical Rules Check dialog.

11. To summarize the errors you set to a severity level of Ignored, select the Summarize Ignored
Errors check box.
12. Click OK to validate the design.

The system performs its Electrical Rules Checking according to the options you have specified.
ERC error indicators are created for you to display, select, and view if the severity level has
been set to Error.
Rules with a severity level of Warning are written to the report but not annotated in the
design.
The rules whose severity level was set to Ignored are not annotated in the design, but will
be summarized in the report, since you selected the Summarized Ignored Checks check
box.
Every time you choose Utils ERC, all existing ERC error indicators are removed.

The lessons in this section explains how to use the ERC error annotation options.
Finding ERC Errors

To find ERC errors, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Utils Find Errors to open the Find Errors dialog box.
135
2.
From the Categories drop-down list, select Net Connectivity. Information about the first error
in that category appears in the description area. The last error you viewed remains in the
description area until another error is requested.
If your design has a number of errors, such as unconnected pins, and you do not want to see
those errors when scrolling through the list of errors in the Find Errors dialog, check the
Override Dont display this error again option. Conversely, you can choose to display only
the errors that have overrides applied to them by enabling the Show Only Overrides option.
3.
View another error by using one of the following methods:
If you know the number of the error, enter it in the Error Number box and click Find.
Information about that error appears in the description area.
You can scroll through the errors using the up and down arrows next to the Error Number
box until you find the error you want to view.
Click Jump To and the error finder positions the cursor in the center of the error indicator
in your design.
Overriding Error Displays

The display of overridden, annotated errors can be globally controlled. To do this, follow these
steps:
1.
2.
3.
Select the Display Overridden Errors check box.
When enabled, any error indicator whose display has been overridden will appear in the design as
an inverted triangle.
To hide overrides from view, clear the Display Overridden Errors check box in the Miscellaneous
tab of the Options Display dialog. When the check box is enabled, an overridden error indicator
appears as an inverted triangle in your design.
136
Block Selecting Error Indicators

If you want to include ERC error indicators in a block selection,
1.
2.
Click Clear All to cancel the selection of check boxes in the Items frame.
3.
Select the ERC Errors check box in the Items frame.
4.
Click OK to close the Options Block Selection dialog box.
Overriding ERC Errors

Individual ERC error indicators can be removed from the design without being resolved when you
override their display. You may want to hide errors such as unconnected pins when the errors will
not be resolved and you do not want to see them in the design.
To apply an override, follow these steps:
1.
Select an error.
2.
Right-click and choose Override from the shortcut menu.

To remove an override from a selected error, right-click and choose Unoverride from the
shortcut menu.
Fixing and Deleting ERC Errors

The recommended method for using ERC error annotation to fix design errors is as follows:
1.
Choose Utils Find Errors to view the errors.
2.
Display an error you want to correct and go directly to it in the design by clicking the Jump To
button. Continue resolving the errors in the design in this same manner until all errors have
been fixed.
3.
Select an error indicator and press the DELETE key. You can delete the ERC error indicators
from your design as they are resolved.
4.
Another way to delete ERC error indicators is to choose Utils ERC; all existing error indicators
are deleted, and the program flags only the remaining errors. Or you can leave the ERC errors
on the sheet. The next time you choose the Utils ERC command, all existing ERC error
indicators will be removed automatically.
137
CHAPTER
Printing a Schematic
This chapter includes the following topics:
Setting up Printers and Plotters
Setting up Print Jobs.
Setting up Printers and Plotters

This section explains how to set up a printer or plotter in P-CAD Schematic. Before set up a print or
plot job, you must install a printer or plotter on your system. For instructions, see your Windows
documentation.
Print Features
Printing in P-CAD Schematic contains many useful features:
Flexible print options, where each sheet in a print job can be defined with unique printing
options such as preset and custom scaling, print region, X and Y offset, and more.
Color options, where you can customize color output (if you are using a color printer).
Preview, where you can verify the layout of the output before sending to the printer.
Batch printing of multiple sheets.
Selecting a Printer or Plotter

To select the printer or plotter that you want to use from P-CAD Schematic, follow these steps:
1.
Choose File Print Setup to open the Print Setup dialog.
139
Chapter 9: Printing a Schematic
Setting up Print Jobs
2.
Select a print device from the Name list. This list shows the printers and plotters that have been
installed on your system.
3.
Select a paper size and paper source from the corresponding list boxes in the Paper frame.
4.
Choose Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation frame.
5.
Click the Properties button to open a dialog box in which you can specify other print
parameters. Then, click OK to close the Properties dialog.
Because print parameters are device-specific, the options in the Properties dialog depend upon
the print device you selected.
6.
Click OK to close the Print Setup dialog box.
You have selected a print device. You can now define your page setup options.

Defining Image Options, Image Scale, and a Print Region
For each sheet, you can scale your image to fit standard or custom size papers, define a print
region, set horizontal and vertical offsets, display a title, and rotate the image.
140
1.
2.
Click Page Setup to open the Page Setup dialog.
You can set different print options for each sheet in a design. However, this procedure shows
you how to define you page setup options for a single sheet.
3.
Select Sheet 1 in the Sheets list.
4.
Choose one of the buttons in the Image Scale frame to select an image scale to the selected
sheet.
Although you will not choose the Scale to Fit Page button in this tutorial, choosing this option
would scale the print region to fit on a single page. Page size is determined by your print
driver.
5.
Select the Title check box in the Image frame to display a title around your design. A title
prints only if you have set one up with the Options Configure dialog.
6.
In this tutorial, you will define a print region in your design. To do this, clear the Sheet Extents
check box to enable the other fields in this frame. Then, click Define Region. The workspace
appears.
If you prefer to print the entire design, select the Sheet Extents check box in the Print Region
frame and skip to step 7. Select this option only if you want to print the entire design.
7.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the workspace to draw a
bounding outline around the desired print region.
141
8.
Right-click or press ESC. An information message appears to confirm the coordinates of the
selected print region. Click Yes to accept these coordinates.
9.
A message appears, warning you to apply these changes to the print job/sheet. Click OK to
acknowledge this message.
The Page Setup dialog reappears. In the Print Region frame, the X and Y coordinates display
for the lower left and upper right corners of the print region.
10. Click Update Sheet to apply these changes to the print job/sheet.
11. Click Close to close the Page Setup dialog and return to the File Print dialog.
You have set up your page options. Next, you will set up your print options. For instructions, see
Setting your Print Options (page 142).
Setting your Print Options

With the Print Options dialog, you can set up various print options. This dialog contains two tabs:
Colors and Miscellaneous. To use this dialog, do the following:
1.
2.
Click Print Options to open the Print Options dialog.
3.
4.
Choose your print colors using one of these methods:
142
If you have a color printer, click a command button in the Item Colors or Display Colors
frame. When the color palette appears, click a color swatch and then close the palette.
5.
If you have a black and white printer, click the Defaults button. This turns all colors to
monochrome. We recommend that you use the defaults setting to avoid undesirable
output when color settings are converted to grayscales.
In the Junction Size frame, choose the Small, Large, or User radio button.
Notice that you can enter a value in the Size text box only when you choose the User radio
button. You can enter a value in inches, centimeters, etc. However, the value must be less than
or equal to 100 mils.
6.
Click the Miscellaneous tab. In this tab, you set the size or ERC error indicators and reference
points. In addition, you set other miscellaneous print options as shown in the following figure:
To use the default settings, click the Defaults button.
7.
8.
In the ERC Errors frame, choose one of these buttons:
Show. Enables the display of ERC errors in your printed design.
Hide. Disables the display of ERC errors in your printed design.
No Change. Keeps the current display setting.
Select these check boxes in the Miscellaneous frame:
Draft Mode: Enables a thin outline of the design components in the printed output.
Thin Stroked Text: Prints text in its stroke mode.
143
9.
Display Open Ends: Prints an indicator showing any open ends.
Display Part Gate Number: Enables the printing of Part Gate Numbers.
Print Highlighted Wires & Busses as haloed: Distinguishes any wires or buses that are
currently highlighted as haloed lines.
Click OK to return to the File Print dialog.
You have set up your print options. Next, you will learn how to preview your print job.
Previewing a Print Job

Before you print a document, you can view it in a print preview window. To open this window, click
the Print Preview button in the File Print dialog. The print preview window contains these options:
Print: Sends the current print jobs to the printer.
Next Page: Displays the next page of the print output in the Print Preview window.
Prev Page: Displays the previous page of the print output in the Print Preview window.
Two Page/One Page: Allows you to view two pages at a time or only one page.
Zoom In: Zooms in on the center area of the current page. Use the scroll bars to move to the
desired viewing region.
Zoom Out: Zooms out on the current page.
Close: Closes the Print Preview window.
Generating Printouts
After you have defined your page setup and print options, return to the File Print dialog to print the
sheets. The following shows you how:
1.
In the File Print dialog, click Set All to enable all the sheets in the design.
2.
Click Generate Printouts to print the highlighted sheets.
Now that youve generated a printout, you will learn how to use the override settings on print a job.
Override Settings
You have two options for overriding your print settings. You can print your current schematic
window, or you can scale the print area to fit on a single page. The following lessons guide you
through each option.
Printing the Current Window

To print the current window, follow these steps from your design workspace:
1.
144
Use the View commands to select the desired window in Schematic. For example, zoom in on
an area in your current design.
2.
Choose File Print. The File Print dialog appears.
3.
Highlight the sheet to print in the Sheets list box.
4.
In the Override Settings frame, select the Current Window check box.
Selecting the Current Window check box overrides the Print Region settings for the current
sheets print job.
5.
Click Generate Printouts. P-CAD Schematic prints out the print job with the region defined by
the current window. The printout may be on one page, or on many pages, depending on the
size of the window and the printer settings.
Scaling to Fit Page

When printing, you can override the page settings for all sheets so that the print output is scaled to
fit on a single page. To print scaled print jobs, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Select the Scale to Fit Page check box in the Override Settings frame.
3.
Select the desired print job(s) in the Sheets list. To define a new sheet print job, click the Page
Setup button and follow the instructions in Defining Image Options, Image Scale, and a Print
Region (page 140).
4.
Click Generate Printouts. P-CAD Schematic prints out the contents of the selected sheets. The
print output is scaled to fit exactly on a page. The page size is set by the print driver. See your
print drivers options for the page sizes.
The File Print Scale to Fit Page overrides the scale settings for all print jobs. To scale an individual
sheets print job to fit a single page, use the Scale to Fit Page check box in the Page Setup dialog.
145
CHAPTER
10

The Design Technology Parameters (DTP) feature gives you the ability to capture design
information, including net class definitions and design rules. With this feature, you can create and
save design information in a DTP file, which can then be used in any P-CAD design. This chapter
includes the following topics:
Introducing the DTP Feature
Opening and Creating DTP Files
Working with DTP Files
Introducing the DTP Feature

What is DTP?
The Design Technology Parameters (DTP) feature gives you the ability to capture design
information, including net class definitions and design rules. With this feature, you can create and
save design information in a DTP file, which can then be used in any P-CAD design.
About DTP Files

A design technology parameters file (*.dtp) gives you the ability to create and save information
that is associated with various aspects of a P-CAD design, such as Class to Class rules, net class
definitions, and more.
The data in a DTP file is organized in a hierarchical structure with the following levels: Files,
Groups, Sections, and Items. As shown in the following figure, the Digdemo.dtp file contains a
group named Digdemo. Within this group are several Sections, such as Class To Class Rules, Global
Rules, and so on. Each section contains a collection of items. For example, the Global Rules section
contains two items: Bottom and Top.
147
Chapter 10: Design Technology Parameters
When you create a design, you can also create a DTP file and organize the information as
appropriate. You can then build, browse, and modify the hierarchy of your DTP file. To do this, use
the options in the Design Technology Parameters dialog shown in the previous figure.

The procedures in this section familiarize you with the DTP file creation process.
Opening a DTP File

To create a new DTP file or to open an existing file, follow these steps:
1.
Start P-CAD Schematic and open a design file. For example, open Digdemo.pcb, which is
located in the Demo folder of your P-CAD installation directory.
2.
Choose File Design Technology Parameters to open the Design Technology Parameters
dialog. The system path and DTP file name appears next to the Technology Filename button.
Creating a DTP File

To create and save a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
148
dialog.
2.
Click Technology Filename to display the Open dialog.
3.
Type a name for your DTP file in the File name box. For example, type: Digdemo1
4.
Select Design Technology Parameter Files (*.dtp) in the Files of type list.
5.
Click Open to display the following Open dialog:
149
6.
Click Yes. The new DTP file name appears next to the Technology Filename button in the
Design Technology Parameters dialog, as shown in the following illustration.
When you create a DTP file, only the Filename appears in the list box. To add groups, sections,
and items, see one of the following sections: Adding a Group (page 150), or Adding a Section
(page 151).
7.
Click Close to the exit the Design Technology Parameters dialog.
Adding a Group
To add a group to a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
150
dialog.
2.
Open the DTP file that you want to modify by clicking the Technology Filename button. For
example, open Digdemo1.dtp.
3.
Click New Group to open the New Group Name dialog.
4.
Type a name in the New Name box. For example, type: Group1
5.
Click OK to close the New Group Name dialog. The new group name appears in the DTP tree,
as shown in the following figure:
6.
Click Close to exit the Design Technology Parameters dialog.
Adding a Section
To add a section to group in a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
dialog.
2.
Open the DTP File of your choice by clicking the Technology Filename button. For example,
open Digdemo1.dtp.
151
152
3.
Select a group in the DTP tree. For example, select Group1. The label on the New Group
button changes to New Section.
4.
Click New Section to open the New Section Type dialog.
5.
Select the check boxes that correspond to the sections you want to create.
6.
Click OK to close the New Section Type dialog. The selected sections appear in the DTP tree,
as shown in the following figure:
Adding an Item
To add an item to a section in a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
dialog.
2.
Open the DTP File of your choice by clicking the Technology Filename button. For example,
open Digdemo1.dtp.
3.
Select a section in the DTP tree in the Design Technology Parameters dialog. For example,
select Net Class Definitions. The label on the New Section button changes to New Item.
4.
Click New Item to open the Enter Net Class Name dialog.
5.
Type a name in the New Name box. For example, type: ITEM1
6.
Click OK to close the Enter Net Class Name dialog. The new item appears in the appropriate
section of the DTP tree.

Once you created a DTP file, you can browse and modify the contents of that file. In addition, you
can update a file with information from your active design, as well as copy DTP data to your design.
This section contains procedures that show you how to perform these actions and more.
Browsing the Contents of a DTP File

To browse the contents of a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
dialog.
2.
Click Technology Filename to display the Open dialog.
3.
Navigate to the directory in which the DTP file is located. For example, navigate to the Demo
folder in the P-CAD installation directory.
4.
Select the DTP file that you want to open from the list. For example, select Digdemo.dtp.
5.
Click Open. The DTP filename appears next to the Technology Filename button.
If a .dtp file is read-only, the Read-only check box is selected and the term read-only appears
next to the filename. You cannot modify or delete a read-only DTP file.
153
6.
Expand a group or section by clicking the + sign. When a group or section is expanded, the sign appears.
7.
Collapse a group or section by clicking the sign. When a group or section is collapsed, a +
sign appears.
Use the options in the Design Technology Parameters dialog to set up the design technology
parameters, copy parameter data to or from a design, view or modify data properties, and browse
or modify the files hierarchy. To learn more about these options, see the appropriate section in
this chapter.
Renaming a Group or Item

To rename a group or item, follow these steps:
1.
Select a group or item in the DTP tree.
2.
Click Rename to open the Rename Net dialog.
3.
Type a name in the New Name box.
4.
Click OK to close the Rename Net dialog. The new name appears in the DTP tree.
Deleting DTP File Information

To delete information from a DTP file, follow these steps:
154
1.
dialog.
2.
Select a group, section or item in the DTP tree.
3.
Click Delete to open a Warning dialog.
4.
Click Yes to delete your selection. If you are deleting a group or section, all objects within that
group are deleted. This action cannot be undone.
Viewing Item Statistics

To the statistics of an item in a DTP file, follow these steps:
1.
dialog.
2.
Select an item in the DTP tree to make the Statistics button active. Click Statistics to open an
Item Statistics dialog.
3.
Click OK to close the Item Statistics dialog. This dialog contains information about
modifications made to the item.
Updating a DTP Group with Design Information

To update a group in a DTP file with information from the active design, follow these steps from the
Design Technology Parameters dialog:
1.
Select a group in the DTP tree. For example, select Digdemo, as shown in the following figure.
155
2.
Click Update From Design to open the Select Section Type dialog.
3.
Select the check boxes that correspond to the sections you want to update. For example, select
all of the check boxes, as shown in the following figure.
4.
Click OK to close the Select Section Type dialog. If the update. If the update is successful, the
following message appears.
5.
Click OK to close the Information message box.

You can also update individual sections in a DTP file by selecting a section from the DTP tree
and clicking Update from Design.
Copying DTP Data to a Design

To copy DTP data to a P-CAD design, follow these steps:
156
1.
dialog.
2.
Select a group or section in the DTP tree. For additional information about your options, see
Setting up Attribute Handling for Copy Actions (page 158).
3.
Click Copy To Design. If the information that you want to copy will change any existing
information, the Overwrite Warning dialog appears.
4.
Click one of the following buttons to acknowledge the message:
Click Yes to overwrite the information specified in the Message dialog.
Click Yes to All to overwrite the information listed in the Message dialog, as well as any
other potential warnings associated with the section.
Click No to keep the information as is.
Click Cancel to cancel the copy action.
If the selected item does not exist in the design, it is added automatically. Net rule and net
class definition items are not created if they do not exist in a design.
157
Setting up Attribute Handling for Copy Actions

You can copy sections to a design: Class To Class Rules, Net Class Definitions, Net Class Rules, and
Net Rules. When you select one of these sections in your DTP tree, the options in the Attribute
Handling on Copy frame become active as shown in the following figure:
The following describes each option in the Attribute Handling On Copy frame:
Replace Design Attributes: Choose this button to replace the rules associated with an item in a
design with the rules associated with an item in the DTP file.
Merge Attributes: Choose this button to merge the rules associated with the item in the DTP
file with rules associated with the item in the design. When you choose this button, P-CAD
Schematic favors the rules of the DTP file over the rules of the design.
For information about item-specific options, see Item-Specific Information About Copy Actions
(page 158).
Item-Specific Information About Copy Actions

The following information explains how P-CAD Schematic supports the copy action for various
objects in a DTP tree.
Class to Class Rules. If a design has two net classes, you can merge or replace the class to class
rules. If a class to class rule doesnt already exist, a rule is created. To merge or replace class to class
rules, choose the appropriate button in the Attribute Handling on Copy frame before you click the
Copy to Design button.
Replace Design Attributes: Choose this option to place a designs class-class rules with the
rules from the Class to Class Rule Item.
Merge Attributes: Merges the rules of the Class to Class Rule Item with the designs class-toclass rules, favoring the Class to Class Rule Item rules over the design.
If both net classes do not exist in the design, a class to class rule is not created.
Layer Rules. Layer rule items cannot be updated from P-CAD Schematic.
Layer Sets. Layer set items cannot be updated from P-CAD Schematic.
Net Class Definitions. If a net class of the same name exists in the design, its net members are
replaced with the net members defined by this Item. The net class rules are not changed. If a net
class of the same name does not exist in the design, it is not created.
Net Class Rules. If the net class already exists in the design, you have a choice of two options: to
merge or to replace the net class rules. To choose between the merge or replace options, choose
158
the corresponding option in the Design Technology Parameters dialog before clicking Copy to
Design.
Replace Design Attributes: Replaces a designs net class rules with the rules from the Net Class
Rule Item.
Merge Attributes: Merges the rules of the Net Class Rule Item with the designs net class rules,
favoring the Net Class Rule Item rules over the design.
The net class, with the Net Class Rule Item rules, is created if it does not already exist in the
design.
Net Rules. If the net already exists in the design, you have a choice of two options: to merge or to
replace the net rules. To choose between the merge or replace options, choose the corresponding
option in the Design Technology Parameters dialog before clicking Copy to Design.
Replace Design Attributes: Replaces a designs net rules with the rules from the Net Rule Item.
Merge Attributes: Merges the rules of the Net Rule Item with the designs net rules, favoring
the Net Rule Item rules over the design.
If the net does not already exist in the design, the net, with its Net Rule Item rules, is not
created.
Pad Styles. Pad style items cannot be updated from Schematic.

Via Styles. Via style items cannot be updated from Schematic.
Modifying Item Properties

To view or modify the properties of an item in a DTP tree, follow these steps:
1.
Choose File Design Technology Parameters to open the Design Technology Parameters dialog.
2.
Select an item in the DTP tree.
3.
Click Properties to open an item-specific dialog.
Properties of certain items (pads, vias, global rules, layer sets) cannot be accessed in P-CAD
Schematic. In such cases, the Properties button is shaded and not available.
When you modify properties of items in your parameters file using Properties, the changes are
made immediately to the file. If you want to create a new design technology file based on an
existing file, first make a copy of your original design technology file, saving the copy under the
new name. Then, modify the design technology file copy.
If the design technology parameters file is read-only, P-CAD Schematic discards any changes youve
made.
Class to Class, Net Class, and Net Rules Properties

To open the Attributes dialog, select a class to class rule, net class rule, or net rule item in the File
Design Technology Parameters tree. Then, click Properties.
159
The two-column spreadsheet in the Attributes dialog shows the collection of net attributes. Within
the collection, each attributes name and value appear in the column.
Adding an Attribute: To add an attribute, click Add to open the Place Attribute dialog. Add a
predefined attribute by choosing first the Category and then the desired attribute. To add a
new attribute, select {user-defined} in the Name list and type the name for the attribute. Type
the Value for the attribute and click OK, and the attribute is added to the table. Complete
instructions on using the Place Attribute dialog are found in Place Commands (page 259).
Editing Attribute Properties: To edit an attributes properties, select an attribute from the table
and click the Properties button (or double-click the attribute) to open the Place Attribute
dialog.
Deleting an Attribute: Highlight an attribute in the table and click Delete.
To launch a reference link: When the special attribute Reference, whose value is a reference
link, is added to the item, you can select the Reference attribute and click Launch to start a
program or to launch Internet Explorer to reference additional information about the item.
Global Layer Rules Properties

P-CAD Schematic does not support Layer rule properties.
Layer Set Properties

P-CAD Schematic does not support Layer set properties.
160
Net Class Definition Properties

To open the Net Class Definition dialog, select a net class definition item in the File Design
Technology Parameters tree. Then, click Properties.
Use this to create net classes and add nets to the class. For details, see Options Net Classes (page
309).
To add a net class definition:
1.
Type a layer name in the Net Name box.
2.
Click Add.
3.
Repeat the process until you have added all nets to the class.
Pad Style Properties

Pad style properties are not available from Schematic.
Via Style Properties

Via style properties are not available from Schematic.
161
CHAPTER
11
Simulating a Circuit Design

With the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator you can perform an array of mixed-signal simulations on
your design. Simulations are run directly from your schematic (including multi-sheet designs),
providing an easy way to investigate the performance of a circuit throughout the design cycle.
The analog/mixed-signal simulation engine uses an enhanced version of Berkeley SPICE3f5/XSPICE,
allowing you to accurately simulate any combination of analog and digital devices without manually
inserting D/A or A/D converters. This mixed-signal or mixed-mode simulation is possible
because of the inclusion of accurate, event-driven behavioral models for digital devices, including
TTL and CMOS.
Due to the complexity of digital devices it is generally not practical to simulate them using
standard, non-event-driven, SPICE instructions. For this reason, the simulator includes a special
descriptive language that allows digital devices to be simulated using an extended version of the
event-driven XSPICE. The digital devices included in the simulation-ready schematic libraries are
modeled using the Digital SimCode language.
The simulator allows unlimited circuit-level analog simulation and unlimited gate-level digital
simulation. Circuit size is only limited by the amount of RAM you have in your system.
The Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator runs in a separate application, called the Design Explorer. When
you select Run from the new Simulate menu in the P-CAD 2002 Schematic Editor the schematic is
analyzed and an XSPICE netlist is generated. This netlist is automatically opened in the Design
Explorer, a simulation performed, and the results displayed as waveforms in the Design Explorer's
oscilloscope-like waveform display window.
The types of analyses supported include: AC small signal, Transient, Noise and DC transfer, Monte
Carlo analysis, parameter and temperature sweeping, and Fourier analysis. Analyses can be
configured in either the P-CAD 2002 Schematic Editor, or in the Design Explorer. Refer to the online help for more information on using the circuit simulator.
163
Chapter 11: Simulating a Circuit Design
Using the P-CAD Circuit Simulator

Configuring the Schematic
Before you can successfully simulate your circuit you need to ensure that your schematic contains
all the necessary information. In general, the following rules must be adhered to before you will be
able to run any of the available simulations:
All components and parts in the schematic must properly reference a simulation device model.
You must place and wire up suitable signal sources to provide drive to the circuit during
simulations.
The circuit must include a Ground net.
If necessary, you must set the initial simulation conditions of the circuit using the .IC and .NS
devices.
Selecting simulation-ready schematic components

To perform simulation analyses, all parts placed on your schematic must contain special simulationspecific information which tells the simulator how these components are to be treated. In general
this means that schematic parts must include a reference to an appropriate SPICE device model.
This information is defined as attributes of the component symbol.
The easiest way to create a schematic for simulation is to use simulation-ready parts from the new
P-CAD 2002 component libraries. There is a complete Library Index included with the new P-CAD
2002 component libraries (Library Index.XLS). Refer to the New features.WRI file for details on
how to use this index to locate simulation-ready components. In most cases you simply place a
simulation-ready component, set the value (such as the resistance) and simulate. Each component
includes all the information required for SPICE simulation, including designator prefix information
and pin mapping for multiple-gate components.
SPICE supports many extended features that allow you to more accurately model component
behavior, for example specifying the operating temperature of a transistor. This extra information is
entered into the pre-defined SimFields in the Attributes tab of the components' Properties dialog
after the component has been placed on the schematic sheet.
Setting up the Simulation Analyses

To select which simulation analyses are enabled, select Simulate Setup from the P-CAD 2002
Schematic Editor menus. The Analyses dialog will pop up, the required analyses are enabled in the
General tab of the dialog.
When you run a simulation, data for all enabled analyses will be calculated and displayed in the
simulation waveform viewer window. Click the Help button in this dialog for information about
each type of analysis, and for information on the other options in the Analyses Setup dialog.
164
Running a Simulation
Once the required analyses are enabled and the parameters of the enabled analyses are configured
in the appropriate tab in the dialog, you are ready to run the simulation.
To run a simulation:
1.
Choose Simulate Setup from the main menu in P-CAD Schematic to setup the analysis. The
Design Explorer window opens and the Analyses Setup dialog displays.
Alternatively, choose Simulate Run and the simulation is run straight away. You can also run
the analysis from the Design Explorer menus when the simulation netlist is the active
document.
2.
Select the criteria for the simulation n the appropriate tab of the Analyses Setup dialog and
click Run Analysis. The Circuit Simulator runs the analysis. Refer to the online help for more
information about the setup dialog.
An Xspice netlist is generated from the design and placed in the same directory as the schematic.
This is then imported into a design database (.ddb file) of the same name as the schematic and
the database opened in the Design Explorer 99 SE. The netlist that was generated in P-CAD
Schematic is then loaded and passed to the simulation engine.
165
The first time a simulation is run on a design, a default configuration file (.cfg) will be created.
When you make any changes in the Analyses Setup dialog, they are stored in this .cfg file and
subsequently applied to future simulations of that particular design. The setup information in the
configuration file is added to the netlist when the simulation is run. No setup information is
contained in the netlist generated by P-CAD.
You can also generate the Xspice netlist from your P-CAD Schematic design, using the Utils
Generate Netlist command. You are then free to import the netlist into Design Explorer 99 SE and
run the simulation at a later stage, from the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator.
Information can also be directly added into the netlist, by manually editing the .nsx file using the
Design Explorer's Text Editor. Upon running the simulation, a dialog will appear, giving you the
option to use the netlist file as is, or to ignore the setup information that has been added and use
the configuration file instead.
The attributes that must be specified in order to make a part simulatable, are all part of the
Simulation category in the Place Attribute dialog / Attribute Properties dialog. These attributes
consist of: SimType, SimModel, SimFile, SimPins, SimNetlist, SimDefaults and SimFields 1-16.
The .ddb file is created if it does not already exist (in the same directory as the .sch and .nsx
files). If it does exist, the netlist file generated will replace the previous version of the same name.
The XSpice netlist exported directly from Schematic does not contain any setup information. This
information is added to the netlist from the configuration file, to create a modified netlist which is
stored external to the .ddb, when the simulation is run. Upon completion of the simulation, the
modified netlist file is deleted.
If a simulation is already running (started from the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator) and you start a
simulation with the same netlist from P-CAD, then the netlist will be imported to the .ddb, but
simulation will not proceed because a simulation is already running. This is the same for a
simulation running on a different netlist.
Working with Simulation Waveforms

When you run a simulation, a simulation results document is created and displayed in the
waveform analysis viewer.
When the waveforms appear the results of each analysis performed during the simulation run are
displayed on separate tabs (these tabs are at the bottom of the window), click on a tab to examine
the results of that analysis, as shown below.
166
The waveform viewer window operates much like an oscilloscope, simply adjust the scale options
in the Browse SimData panel to show exactly the part of the waveform that you would like to
examine. The Waveform analysis pane also includes measurement cursors for taking
measurements directly from the waveforms.
Click on the appropriate tab at the bottom of the window to display the results for that type of
analysis. Operating Point results are displayed as a list of voltage, current and power calculations
for nodes or devices.
Troubleshooting simulation problems

When a circuit will not simulate you must identify if the problem is in the circuit, or the process of
simulation. To troubleshoot simulation problems, read the topics listed in the Simulation
troubleshooting topics listed in the on-line help and work through the suggested points, trying one
at a time.
Sometimes during a simulation a message will be displayed reporting errors or warnings. These
messages are saved in a text document (DesignName.ERR).
Warning Messages
Warning messages are not fatal to the simulation. They generally provide information about
changes that SPICE had to make to the circuit in order to complete the simulation. These include
invalid or missing parameters, and so on. Digital SimCode warnings may include information such
as timing violations (tsetup, thold, trec, tw, etc.) or significant drops in power supply voltage on
digital components. Note that valid simulation results are normally generated even if warnings are
reported.
Error Messages
Error messages provide information about problems that SPICE could not resolve and were fatal to
the simulation. Error messages indicate that simulation results could not be generated, so they
must be corrected before you will be able to analyze the circuit.
167
CHAPTER
12
File Commands
Using the File Commands
File commands allow you to open, save, and print designs and output reports in P-CAD Schematic.
Most of the File commands cannot be undone: once an action is taken, it cannot be reversed using
the Undo command
File New
Choose File New to open a new, untitled design window. The File New command clears the
styles, sheet definitions, and sheet sizes for the new design. All design parameters are returned to
their default settings.
File Open
Choose File Open to open a file the P-CAD Schematic window. When you choose this command,
the Open dialog appears. In this dialog, you can choose the directory and filename of the file you
want to open.
169
Chapter 12: File Commands
File Close
Notice that the default file name extension in the Files of Type list is *.sch. This file name
extension applies to binary P-CAD Schematic designs as well as ASCII files. Other file name
extensions include:
.s01 to open Tango Series II ASCII files.
.cfg to open PCAD CFG files.
To learn more about the options in the Open dialog box, see your Windows documentation. To
learn how to open files in P-CAD Schematic, see Opening Design Files (page 21).
File Close
Choose File Close to close the currently active design window. If the design has been changed
but not yet saved, you are asked whether or not you want to save your changes before closing. If
you have opened more than one design window, the next window will become the active window.
If you close the last open design, a new, untitled design window appears.
File Save
Saves the changes to the active design and creates a backup file (.bak). When you choose File
Save, the file remains open so you can continue working on it, and a backup file is created. The file
name and location are unchanged by this command.
Saving a File with ECOs

To save a file that has ECOs attached, follow these steps:
170
1.
Choose File Save. Pending Engineering Change Orders (ECOs) must be appended to an ECO
file or discarded when a design file is saved. If there are pending ECOs, the following dialog
appears:
2.
The ECO filename appears at the top of the dialog. It is the last used ECO file. To change it,
click ECO Filename.
3.
Type a file name in the File name box, or select a file from the list area. Click Save to return to
the Save ECOs dialog.
File Save As
4.
In the Comments box, type any comments that can help document the ECOs.
5.
To append ECOs to the ECO file, click Append ECOs to File.
6.
To discard ECOs, click Discard ECOs. Once discarded they cannot be recovered.
For more information on ECOs, see the following sections:
Utils Record ECOs (page 338)
Utils Import ECOs (page 339)
Utils Export ECOs (page 340)
Saving an ASCII File

If a P-CAD ASCII file type was selected in the File Type list box in the File Save dialog, a P-CAD
ASCII file is generated instead of a P-CAD binary file.
File Save As
Choose File Save As to save a copy of the active design. When you save a copy of the design, you
can specify a unique file name and location to save the file. This command also creates a backup
file (.bak). You can either name a new file or save an existing file to a new name.
When you choose this command, the File Save As dialog appears. In this dialog, choose the folder
and type the new filename. The Save in list displays the current folder and any files in that folder.
The File name box lets you type or select a file name with the extension specified in the Save as
Type list box. The default file name extension is .sch. This extension applies to P-CAD Schematic
designs as well as ASCII files.
Saving a Copy of a File

To save a copy of a file, to a different name or location, follow these steps:
1.
Choose File Save As to open the Save As dialog.
2.
Type a name for the file in the File name box.
3.
If the current folder is not appropriate, then navigate to the appropriate directory in which you
will save the file.
4.
Make sure the correct file name extension appears in the Save As Type list box.
5.
Click Save to save the file as you have specified.
6.
If there are pending ECOs, you are prompted to save them. For detailed instructions, see File
Save (page 170).
171
File Print
File Print
Choose File Print to print one or more sheets in your current schematic design. When you
choose this command, the File Print dialog appears.
From the File Print dialog, you can create print settings for all of the sheets in a design, or you can
create custom print settings for each sheet. When you close this dialog, your settings become part
of the design file.
The File Print dialog contains the following options:
172
Sheets (list). Shows all of the sheets in your active design. Choose one or more sheets from this
list.
Set All (button). Click this button to select all sheets in the Sheets list box.
Clear All (button). Click this button to cancel the selection of all sheets in the Sheets list box.
Page Setup (button). Click this button to open the Page Setup dialog. For more information,
see Page Setup Dialog (page 173).
Print Options (button). Click this button to open the Print Options dialog. For more
information, see Print Options Dialog (page 174).
Generate Printouts (button). Click this button to send your current print job to the printer.
Tile Sheets (check box). Select this check box and click Print Preview to display all sheets of the
schematic on your screen. The sheets are resized and arranged side-by-side so that all are
File Print
visible and none overlap. When you print with this option selected, the tiled sheets are output
to a single printed page.
Print Preview (button). Click this button to view your design in a print preview window.
Minimum Line Width (spin box). Select or type the minimum desired printed line width.
Override Settings Frame

Current Window. Select this check box to print only what appears in your active window. For
example, if you are zoomed in on your design, select this check box to print only the area in view.
Scaling to Fit Page. Select this check box to override the page scale settings for all sheets. For
example, if you select this box the print output for each sheet is adjusted to fit on one page.
Page Setup Dialog

To open the Page Setup dialog, click Page Setup in the File Print dialog.
The Page Setup dialog contains the following options:
Sheets (list box). Select one or more sheets from the list to define page setup options. After
you select your print options, click Update Sheet
Update Sheet (button). Change any print options and then click this button to update the
sheets print options.
Close (button). Click this button to return to the File Print dialog.
173
File Print
Image Options Frame

Rotate (check box). Select this check box to rotate the printed image clockwise by 90 degrees.
Title (check box). Select this check box to print the design title with your design. To assign a title to
a design, use the Options Configure dialog. Clear this check box to omit the title block from the
printout.
X Offset and Y Offset (boxes). Type a value to offset your printout horizontally or vertically by that
value. The default unit is the value set in Options Configure. You can override the default units by
entering the units with the value (e.g., mil, mm, in).
Print Region Frame

Sheet Extents (check box). Select this check box to print the entire design. Notice that the Lower
Left Corner and Upper Right Corner boxes are not active when this check box is selected. Clear this
check box to define a print region.
Define Region (button). Choose this button to define a print region. The Page Setup dialog is
hidden and the design window is displayed. Click and hold the left mouse button to define a
selection window. Click the right mouse button to return to the Page Setup dialog.
Lower Left Corner/Upper Right Corner (value box). Manual alternative to the Define Region button.
Type the lower left and upper right limits of the desired print region.
Image Scale Frame

User Scale Factor (button). Choose this button to increase or decrease the size of the print job by a
specific factor. The value you enter affects the X axis and Y axis equally. For example, 0.100 reduces
the output by a factor of 10, while 10.00 increases the output by a factor of 10.
Scale to Fit Page (button). Choose this button to scale the print job to fit on a single page. When
selected the User Scale Factor, X offset, and Y offset boxes are not active.
Print Options Dialog

To open the Print Options dialog, click Print Options in the File Print dialog. This opens the Print
Options dialog. Like the Options Display dialog, this dialog contains both a Colors tab and a
Miscellaneous tab.
Colors Tab
The following figure shows you the options in the Colors tab. To learn about these options, see
Options Display (page 297).
174
File Print
The Colors tab contains the following options:

Default (button). Click this button to restore the default color scheme for your printed output.
Item Colors Frame

To select a color for an item, click the corresponding button in this frame. When you do, a color
palette appears. Choose a color from the palette by clicking the appropriate button. The palette will
automatically close.
Display Colors Frame

To select a color for a display item, click the corresponding button in this frame. When you do, a
color palette appears. Choose a color from the palette by clicking the appropriate button. The
palette will automatically close.
Junction Size Frame
Small (option button). Choose this option to use the small junction size in the printed output.
Large (option button). Choose this option to use the large junction size in the printed output.
User (option button). Choose this option define a custom junction size for the printed output.
Then, enter a value in the User box.
User (box). When you choose the User button, enter a value to define a custom junction size
for the printed output. Your entry can be in inches, centimeters, etc., as long as the value is
between 0 - 10 mm.
175
File Print
Miscellaneous Tab
The following figure shows you the options in the Miscellaneous tab. To learn about these options,
see Options Display (page 297).
The Miscellaneous tab contains the following options:
ERC Errors Frame
Show (button). Choose this button to show ERC errors in the workspace.
Hide (button). Choose this button to hide the display of ERC errors in the workspace.
No Change (button). Choose this button to keep the current display setting.
Size (text box).Type a value in this box to set the size of ERC errors. Your entry can be in inches,
centimeters, etc., as long as the value is between 0 - 10 mm. If you do not choose a size, the
default is 100 mil.
Miscellaneous Frame
176
Draft Mode (check box). Select this check box to show these two items in your design: (1) a
thin, singlepixel outline for pads, vias, and text. (2) a segmented and outlined representation
of arcs, lines, and any line segment objects such as, polygons, cutouts, etc. Draft mode
improves redraw speed and helps you view segment overlaps.
File Print Setup
Thin Stroked Text (check box). Select this check box to show text in thin line mode. Clear this
check box to display text in regular mode.
Display Open Ends (check box). Select this check box to show open ends on unconnected pins
and wires. Open ends appear as open squares, and no longer appear when a positive
connection is made.
Display Part Gate Number (check box). Select this check box to show a parts reference
designator gate number. You can also use the Print Options dialog to show or hide the gate
number in your hardcopy. The options are independent of each other, so you can show the
gate number on screen for editing, but hide it from your hardcopy at the same time.
Print Highlighted Wires and Busses as Haloed (check box). Select this check box to distinguish
any wires or buses that are currently highlighted in your Schematic as haloed lines.
File Print Setup

Choose File Print Setup to view a list of installed printers. This command also lets you to set the
current printer. You can also change device-specific parameters. When you choose File Print
Setup, a dialog similar to the one in the following figure appears.
To learn about the options in this dialog, see your Windows and printer documentation.
File Reports
Choose File Reports to generate various reports. P-CAD Schematic provides you with a collection
of standard reports to help you track and manage the schematic design process. For information on
a specific report, see Reporting on Schematic Designs (page 118).
When you choose File Reports, the following File Reports dialog appears:
177
File Reports
The File Reports dialog contains the following options:
Filename (button). Click this button to select a design file. By default, the name of the active
design file appears here. Any report settings defined in this dialog apply only to the file that
appears in the Filename area. This is also the file to which reports are saved and stored.
Delete (button). Click this button to remove a custom report from the design. You cannot
delete any predefined reports.
Customize (button). Click this button to open the Customize Report dialog. For details on the
fields in this dialog, see Customize Report Dialog (page 179). To learn how to customize
reports, see Customizing a Standard Report (page 119).
Set Defaults (button). Click this button to restore the default settings for P-CAD Schematic.
Set All (button). Click this button to select all of the reports in the Reports to Generate list.
Clear All (button). Click this button to cancel the selection of all reports in the Reports to
Generate list.
Generate (button). Click this button to generate the selected reports.
Reports to Generate Frame

This list contains a collection of standard reports to help you track and manage the schematic
design process. To generate a report, select the appropriate check box. For details on each report,
see Reporting on Schematic Designs (page 118).
178
File Reports
Report Destination Frame
Screen (button). Choose this button to send the output to a file and open the file using
Notepad.
File (button). Choose this button to send the output to a file.
Printer (button). Choose this button to sends the output directly to the printer without creating
files.
Report Origin Frame

X and Y coordinates (boxes). By default, the report origin is 0,0, which represents the lower left
corner of the design. To offset the report origin, enter an X and Y coordinates in the appropriate
boxes. Coordinates printed in the report output indicate their position relative to the designated
coordinates. Report origins are printed in the first line of the output report in the standard P-CAD
Report format.
Style Format Frame

The Style Format you select determines which customization options are available.
Separated List (button). Choose this button to place all data in character-separated format. This
format can be imported into other spreadsheet and database programs.
List Separator (list). If you choose Separated List, select the character you want to use as the
separator. The separator that appears in the box is used for imported and exported files. P-CAD
Schematic uses the character defined in your Windows Regional Settings by default.
P-CAD Report (button). Choose this button to produce a report format with columns and
spaces, etc. When you choose this button, you can gain access to most of the options in the
Format tab of the Customize Report dialog.
Customize Report Dialog

To open the Customize Reports dialog, select a report from the Reports to Generate list and click
Customize. When the dialog appears, the Format tab is selected by default. In addition, the type of
report you selected appears in the title bar.
Format Tab
Use the options in this tab to set up the page format of your report. Depending on the style format
of your report (i.e., P-CAD Report or Separated List) different options are available in this tab. The
following figure shows you the Format tab.
179
File Reports
Header (box). Type a report header. This box is only available when you choose the P-CAD
Report style format.
Footer (box). Type a report footer. This box is only available when you choose the P-CAD
Report style format.
Page Format Frame

If you choose the P-CAD Report style format, you can select one of the following check boxes to
enable the corresponding page format option:
180
Use Header. Includes the information you specified in the Header box.
Use Footer. Includes the footer information entered in the Footer box.
Design Info. Includes the information you entered in the File Design Info command and
dialog.
Date/Page. Includes the current date and the page number.
Pagination. Gives you the ability to create your own pagination (lines per page).
Lines per Page: Type the number of lines you want printed on each page. This box is only
available when you choose the P-CAD Report style format
Column Width: Enter a value in this box to set the width of a single column. To do this, click
the Selection tab. Next, choose a field from the spreadsheet. Then, click the Format tab and
File Reports
type a width for that column in this box. Column width is set to 20 characters by default. This
box is only available when you choose the P-CAD Report style format
File Extension: This box displays the default file name extension for the selected report. You
can also type a new extension if desired. This box is available with the P-CAD Report and
Separated List style formats.
Separated List Frame
Include Report Preface (check box). Select this check box to include a report preface. This box
is only available when you choose the Separated List style format.
Include Column Headers (check box). Select this check box to include column headers at the
top of your report. This box is only available when you choose the Separated List style format.
Selection Tab
The following figure shows you the Selection tab.
Report Section (list). Select a report section from this list. This option is only available with the
Attributes report.
Field (column). Lists the fields specific to the selected report.
Show (column) Displays the selected fields in the report. Unchecked fields do not appear in
the report output.
181
File Reports
Criteria (And) (column). Contains the selection criteria used to filter the report data. To learn
how to enter information, see Selecting Report Criteria (page 122).
Or (column). Type additional selection criteria here if necessary. To learn how to enter
information, see Selecting Report Criteria (page 122).
Add Column (button). Click this button to add an Or column to the report spreadsheet.
Add Row (button). Click this button to add a row of data to the report spreadsheet. This button
is only available when you can add attribute fields to the report. When you click this button,
the Select Attribute dialog appears.
Move Up (button). Click this button to move the selected row of data up one position.
Move Down (button). Click this button to move the selected row of data down one position.
Add Row (button). Click this button to add a row of data to the spreadsheet.
Remove Row (button). Click this button to remove a row of data from the spreadsheet. You
cannot remove a row of predefined data from the report spreadsheet.
Sort Tab
The following figure shows you the Sort tab.
182
Available Fields (list). The list of fields in the selected report.
Selected Fields (list). The fields used to sort the data, the order in which the sort is applied and
the fields sorting order, (A) for Ascending or (D) for Descending, are displayed in the Selected
Fields list.
File Design Info
Insert (button). Click this button to move a field from the Available Fields list and insert it
above the selected field in the Selected Fields list.
Append (button). Click this button to move a field from the Available Fields list to the bottom
of the Selected Fields list.
Remove (button). Click this button to move a field from the Selected Fields list to the Available
Fields list.
Sorting Order Frame
Ascending (button). Choose this button to sort report data in ascending order.
Descending (button). Choose this button to sort report data in descending order.
File Design Info

Choose File Design Info to enter design information, review design statistics, and query/modify
design attributes and fields. When you choose this command, the Design Info dialog appears.
General Tab
Click the General tab to view basic file information about the active design. The options in this tab
are read-only.
Filename. Displays the name and file name extension of the schematic design. To place this
field in a design, choose Place Field and select Filename.
183
File Design Info
Location. Shows where the design is located on your computer or network.
Size. Displays the size of the design file.
Created. Shows the date the file was created.
Modified. Shows the date and time the file was last modified. To place this field in a design,
choose Place Field and select Modified Date.
Accessed. Shows the date and time the file was last viewed
Attributes Frame
To modify the attributes shown in this frame, you must change the design file properties in
Microsoft Windows. For more information, see your Windows documentation.
Read-Only (check box). A check mark in this box indicates that the design has been saved as a
read- only file.
Hidden (check box). A check mark in this box indicates that the design is hidden, which means
that you cannot see or use it unless you know the filename.
Archive (check box). A check mark in this box indicates that the file should be backed up.
System (check box). A check mark in this box shows that the design has been marked as a
system file.
Fields Tab
Click the Fields tab view a list of all the fields that can be placed in a design. To learn how to add
fields to this list or to place a field in a design, see Fields and Field Sets (page 103).
184
File Design Info
Field Set (list box). Select a field set from this list. For information on field sets, see Fields and
Field Sets (page 103).
Field Sets (button). Click this button to add or modify a field set. For information, see Adding a
Name/Value (spreadsheet). The Name column lists all fields that can be placed in the design.
The Value column lists any values assigned to the field.
Add (button). Click this button to open the Field Properties dialog. You use this dialog to add a
name and value to the fields list.
Properties (button). Click this button to open the Field Properties dialog. You use this dialog to
view or modify properties associated with a field.
Delete (button). Select a user-defined field from the list and click this button to delete if from
the list.
Field Properties Dialog

To open the Field Properties dialog, click the Add or Properties button in the Design Info dialog.
This dialog contains the following options:
Name (text box). Enter a name for the selected field. This field is only available for user-defined
fields.
Value (text box). Enter a value for the selected field.
For details about using Fields and Field Sets, see Fields and Field Sets, (page 103).
Attributes Tab
Click the Attributes tab to view and modify design-level attributes:
185
File Design Info
Name/Value (spreadsheet). Displays a list of attributes that have been added to the design, as
opposed to a component or net.
Add (button). Click this button to open the Place Attribute dialog. For details about this
function and a complete listing of attributes, see Place Attribute (page 279).
Delete (button). Select an attribute from the Name/Value spreadsheet and click this button to
remove the attribute from the design.
Properties (button). Select an attribute from the Name/Value spreadsheet and click this button
to open the Attribute Properties dialog.
Launch (button). Select a Reference link from the attributes list and click this button to open
the program associated with the link, or to launch Internet Explorer and go to the website
associated with the link.
Notes Tab
Click the Notes tab to add design or drawing notes that can later be inserted in a design as a Notes
field or Notes table:
The Notes tab contains the following options:
186
Field Set (list box). Select a field set from this list. For information on field sets, see Fields and
Field Sets (page 103).
Field Sets (button). Click this button to add or modify a field set. For information, see Adding a
File Design Info
Number of Notes (data field). Shows the total number of notes that have been added
Note Text (text box). Click Add and then type new notes or modify the notes that appear in this
box. Or, modify the notes that appear here.
Annotation: Select one of the following annotation markers from this list: box, circle, triangle,
or none. The following figure shows you what each annotation looks like:
Add (button). Click this button to enter notes or to add a note to the end of the list.
Delete (button). Place the text insertion point in one of the Note boxes. Then, click this button
to remove that note.
Import (button). Click this button to import a note from an ASCII text file. To learn more about
importing notes, see Importing Text Files as Notes (page 112).
Export (button). Click this button to export a note to an ASCII Text file. To learn more about
exporting notes, see Exporting Notes to a Text File (page 112).
Revisions Tab
Click the Revisions tab to add, import, and export revision notes. Revision notes are used
specifically to document changes between drafts of a design.
For details about the dialog box and its options, see Notes Tab (page 186).
187
File Design Technology Parameters
Statistics Tab
Click the Statistics tab to design statistics for the current design. The information in this tab is readonly.

Choose the File Design Technology Parameters command to view design data such as net class
definitions and design rules. When you choose this command, the File Design Technology
Parameters dialog appears. The information in this dialog is stored in a design technology
parameters file (*.dtp), which contains data that can be updated or copied to any P-CAD design.
Design Technology Parameters Dialog

When you choose the File Design Technology Parameters command, the following File Design
Technology Parameters dialog appears.
188
Technology Filename (button). Click this button to display the Open dialog, from which you
can choose the folder and filename of the file you want to open or create.
System Path (field). The field displays the system path to the active DTP file.
Read-only file (check box). If a .dtp file is read-only, this check box is selected and the term
read-only appears next to the filename. To make a .dtp file read-only, select this check box.
If a .dtp file is read- only, you cannot update it with data from a design, modify an items
properties, rename an item, or delete an item.
DTP tree (directory list box). The contents of the open parameters file appear as a tree
structure, or hierarchy, in the Design Technology Parameters dialog. You can browse the tree
to view its contents. Also, you can highlight groups, sections, or items in the tree to select them
for copying to a design, editing properties, and completing other functions described in this
section. The tree structure allows you to view your entire file at various levels of detail by
expanding or collapsing the branches of the tree. Groupings containing collapsed levels are
shown with a + sign. To expand the grouping, simply click the +. Expanded groupings are
shown with a sign. To collapse the grouping, simply click the sign.
Update From Design (button). The Update From Design button allows you to add information
from your current design to the design technology parameters file.
Copy to Design (button). The Copy to Design function allows you to modify your current
design using data contained within your design technology parameters file.
189
File DXF In
Properties (button). This button allows you to view and modify an items properties. When you
highlight an item in the design technology parameters file tree and click Properties, an itemspecific dialog appears
New Group (button). Select the DTP filename in the tree and click this button to add a new
group to your DTP file.
New Section (button). Select a group from the DTP tree and click this button to create a new
section in your DTP file.
New Item (button). When you highlight the filename in the tree, click this button to create a
new item in your DTP file.
Rename (button). Select a group or item from the DTP tree and click this button to rename the
selected object. You cannot rename sections with this button.
Delete (button). Click the Delete button to delete objects from the tree.
Statistics (button). Click the Statistics button to view statistics about the DTP file. When you
click this button, the Statistics dialog appears. This dialog contains information about
modifications made to the item.
Attribute Handling on Copy Frame
Replace Design Attributes (button). Replaces a designs rules with the rules from the design
technology parameter file item.
Merge Attributes (button). Merges the rules of the design technology parameter file item with
the designs rules, favoring the rules of the design technology parameter file item over the
design.
File DXF In
DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) files generated using AutoCAD Version 9.0 through 14 or other
conforming CAD programs can be opened in P-CAD Schematic. Using this command, you can
create dimensions, board outlines, manufacturing instructions, artwork, logos, etc., and then
import the resulting DXF file into P-CAD Schematic.
Opening a DXF File

To open a DXF file in P-CAD Schematic, choose the File DXF In command. The File DXF In dialog
appears as shown in the following figure:
190
File DXF In
DXF Filename
Click the DXF Filename button to open the Open dialog where you can navigate to the desired file.
Sheet Name/Number
The name and number of the sheet where the DXF items are placed when imported. If the sheet
name contains any AutoCAD reserved keywords, a syntax error occurs which causes the file load
to abort. Rename the layer in AutoCAD to work around this limitation.
View Log File Upon Completion

Select the View Log File Upon Completion check box to display the log file when the import is
complete.
DXF Units
The DXF Units section of the File DXF In dialog provides the ability to choose which units will be
used to apply proper scaling when loading the DXF file. Select the appropriate option to set the
unit for inches (inch), centimeters (cm) or millimeters (mm).
Locate DXF Origin

The P-CAD Schematic workspace uses positive X and Y coordinates. Since DXF items can be placed
at negative X and Y coordinates, you may have to direct P-CAD Schematic to adjust the position of
your imported DXF geometry. In the File DXF In dialog, select a method of translation to positive
coordinates in the Locate DXF Origin radio box.
Absolute Workspace Origin: If your DXF geometry is positioned only at positive coordinates,
select Absolute Workspace Origin. No coordinate translation is made.
Relative Grid Origin: Loads the DXF geometry so its origin is placed at the Relative Grid Origin
of your workspace. The Relative Grid Origin is specified in the Options Grids command.
Auto Adjust to Workspace: Automatically adjusts the placement of your DXF geometry into
positive coordinates.
191
File DXF In
When you import data into P-CAD Schematic from a DXF file, and you enable the Auto Adjust to
Workspace option, P-CAD Schematic automatically translates the position of the lower left extent
of the DXF file data into the positive P-CAD Schematic workspace. The DXF datas lower left extent
is the coordinate defined by the EXTMIN variable in the header section of the DXF file. If the
EXTMIN variable is absent from the DXF file, then P-CAD Schematic automatically calculates a
suitable solution based on the extents of the geometry in the DXF file.
It is suggested that you set the current grid to a uniform value consistent with the grid of your DXF
design. This grid spacing optimizes the on-grid placement of items. Set your current grid in the
Options Grids dialog before importing your DXF file.
If DXF geometry items still fall outside the P-CAD workspace, a warning is written to the log file and
the items are not imported. Your DXF geometry can fall outside the workspace if the translated
items are still positioned at negative coordinates or if the geometry is larger than the workspace
size. If the geometry is larger than the workspace size, use the Options Configure command to
increase your workspace size and import the DXF file again.
Importing a DXF File

To import a DXF file with the correctly positioned geometry:
1.
Click the DXF Filename button to open the Open dialog.
2.
Type a file name in the File name box, or navigate to the directory where the file is located.
3.
Select the appropriate Locate DXF Origin option button on the File DXF In dialog.
4.
From the File DXF In dialog, type a sheet name or use the one selected for you. The sheet name
is used to create a sheet in P-CAD Schematic onto which all the DXF items are placed. After the
DXF items have been translated and placed onto the new sheet, these items are equivalent to
other P- CAD primitives. The new lines, arcs, text, and polygons can be modified as usual.
5.
Click OK.
A progress indicator shows the status of the DXF translation. Some items supported in the DXF
language cannot be translated for use by P-CAD Schematic (see list below). Errors and warning
messages are placed in a report file, which you may view at the end of the translation.
Items Supported for Translation

The following items and features are supported for translation:
Header Variables
The AutoCAD state variables are grouped together at the top of the file in the HEADER section.
Supported variables are listed and described below, with default values in parentheses:
192
$ACADVER
The AutoCAD drawing database version number (must be 9.0 or

higher.)
$ANGBASE
The angle zero direction. The DXF coordinate system is rotated by

this angle. (0)
File DXF In
$ANGDIR
The angular orientation: 1 = clockwise;
0=
counter clockwise. (0)
$MIRRTEXT
Mirror text if non zero. (0)
$TEXTSIZE
Default text height.
Tables
DXF In supports LTYPE and STYLE tables.
Blocks
The only entries in the BLOCKS section that are supported are the dimension blocks. All
dimensions that are translated come from this section.
Entities
The majority of a DXF file is made up of entities. These include lines, arcs, text, block insertions and
others. Only two-dimensional entities are supported; z-axis values are ignored. All block insertion
entities, except dimensions, are ignored. Information embedded in the entities for color are also
ignored.
LINE
DXF LINE entities have infinitesimal width. They are translated into
P-CAD lines of 10 mil.
ARC
DXF ARCs are translated into P-CAD arcs of 10 mil.
CIRCLE
DXF CIRCLEs are translated into P-CAD arcs with a sweep angle of
360 degrees and a 10 mil width.
POLYLINE
DXF POLYLINEs are a sequence of possibly tapered, straight and

curved lines that are connected end-to-end. These may be open or
closed. P-CAD does not support tapering and only supports normal
2-D (unflagged) DXF vertices. POLYLINEs are translated into P-CAD
arcs and lines with a thickness equal to the initial POLYLINE
thickness.
LWPOLYLINE
DXF LWPOLYLINEs are translated into P-CAD arcs and lines with a
thickness equal to the initial LWPOLYLINE segment thickness.
MTEXT
Same as TEXT except it handles multiple lines and supports Bold

and Italic styles.
VERTEX
Vertices define DXF POLYLINEs. When translated, they become the

defining vertices of the translated P-CAD item. Only normal 2-D
DXF vertices are supported (no spline-fit, curve-fit, 3-D mesh, or
other special flags).
193
File DXF In
SOLID
DXF solids are filled three or four sided polygons. They are
translated into P- CAD polygons. Four sided solids that form a
Complex polygon will be ignored.
TRACE
DXF traces are lines with thickness that can be filled or unfilled.
They are treated the same as DXF solids and are translated into
polygons.
TEXT
DXF text is translated into P-CAD text. Oblique angle text is not
supported. The font used for translation when a direct match
cannot be made is the P- CAD default font. Due to the difference in
fonts, translated text strings may be of different total width than the
DXF version. The bar over barred text may not align exactly with the
text.
The following is a specific (but not comprehensive) list of items that are not supported:
All BLOCKS, except the dimension blocks.
SHAPE, ATTDEF, and ATTRIB entities.
3DLINE and 3DFACE entities.
Curve- or spline-fit vertices or meshes for POLYLINE and VERTEX entities. Tapering POLYLINEs
are also not supported.
Oblique angle text and font are not supported for TEXT entities. Font is supported for True
Type text.
Three-dimensional entities and coordinates; thickness for all entities will be ignored, and only
the first two values of a coordinate-triplet will be used.
Dashed and dotted lines are converted to the P-CAD thin width.
Color values for individual entities. Color values for entities will depend on the P-CAD
primitive and layer to which the entity is translated.
DXF In Notes
The following is a list of notes that are important or useful when using the DXF In command:
194
The EXPLODE command in AutoCAD can be used to transform blocks into individual entities.
An important item to be translated from a DXF file is the dimension. AutoCAD creates a new
dimension block every time a dimension is moved, edited, or altered in any way. The user
should use the PURGE command to eliminate any unreferenced copies of the dimension
blocks created by AutoCAD. The user should then output the design to DXF format
immediately after the PURGE command, before editing or modifying dimensions.
Text fonts and styles are more accurately translated from AutoCAD to P-CAD when the style
has been defined prior to entering text.
File DXF Out
File DXF Out

Choose File DXF Out to create DXF (Drawing Interchange Format) files of your Schematic designs.
These files can then be transferred to AutoCAD and other mechanical CAD packages. The output
is compatible with AutoCAD Version 9.0 or later.
Creating a DXF File

To create a DXF file, follow these steps:
1.
Open a schematic design.
2.
Choose File DXF Out. The following File DXF Out dialog appears.
3.
Click DXF Filename. The following File DXF Out dialog appears.
195
File DXF Out
4.
Type a name in the File name box and select the folder in which you want to save the file. Make
sure DXF Files (*.dxf) is selected in the Save As Type list.
5.
Click Save. You return to the File DXF Out dialog.
6.
In the Sheets list, select the sheets you want to output. Each sheet is output to a separate DXF
layer.
You can click Select All to select all of the sheets in the design, or click Clear All to cancel the
selection of all sheets in the design.
7.
In the Output Mode frame, select the Draft check box to output in draft mode.
If you selected specific objects in the design before choosing the File DXF Out command, you
can output only those objects by selecting the Selected Objects check box.
DXF polylines are normally used for all lines, wires, arcs, pins, and buses. Solids are normally
used for polygons. Polylines are filled lines with thickness. When you select the Draft check
box DXF outputs arcs, lines, and circles instead of polylines, and polygon outlines instead of
DXF solids. Draft mode produces smaller files that process faster, but the drawings are not
technically accurate since the lines have no width and areas are not filled.
8.
To include title sheets in the DXF file, select the Include Title Sheet check box. The title sheets
must be displayed in the design before they can be output to DXF.
To display title sheets in a design, select the Display Title Sheets check box in the Options
Configure dialog.
9.
Select the Include True Type Fonts check box to output true type text. Clearing this check box
gives you the ability to export a DXF file that is compatible with Revision 9 DXF. True Type
Fonts are compatible only with Revision 14 DXF.
10. In the DXF Units frame, choose Inch, Cm or Mm.

11. Click OK to generate the DXF output file. All selections are saved in the design file. While the
file is generating, the Status line indicates progress by displaying the current layer being
output. While the file is being generated, you right-click or press ESC to cancel the operation.
DXF Out normally tries to produce as faithful a picture as possible: lines and arcs have
thickness. Draft mode does everything with DXF LINEs, ARCs, and CIRCLEs, which have no
thickness: lines and arcs become thin and polygons become outlines.
DXF Output Considerations
196
Line Styles: The solid, dashed, and dotted line types are supported for output. The line styles
are mapped as follows: P-CAD Dashed to AutoCAD Dashed, P-CAD Dotted to AutoCAD Dot
and P-CAD Solid, Thick or User to AutoCAD Continuous. These specifications may not match
those of your CAD package for lines of the same style.
File PDIF In
Sheets: P-CAD sheets become DXF layers with the same name. DXF substitutes the underscore
for unsupported characters such as spaces to maintain compatibility with AutoCAD naming
conventions.
Blocks: DXF blocks are used to combine individual entities into a common unit, to be treated
as a whole by the CAD package, analogous to a part or component. Blocks are used, where
possible, to make CAD processing easier, and to reduce the size of the DXF file. For example, a
part block has the name of the reference designator; exploding a part block produces text (for
attributes) and pin blocks. These in turn can be exploded.
Polygons: P-CAD polygons are also represented as blocks containing a collection of three- or
four-sided solids. In this way they can be processed as a unit.
Lines: When not in Draft mode, lines consist of a straight polyline and two round endcaps.
Note that due to limitations in how blocks are scaled in DXF, lines are not blocks; the endcaps
and polylines are separate from one another. In Draft mode, lines become DXF LINEs with no
endcaps.
Arcs: When not in Draft mode, arcs consist of a curved polyline and two round endcaps. Note
that due to limitations in how blocks are scaled in DXF, arcs are not blocks; the endcaps and
polylines are separate from one another. In Draft mode, arcs become DXF ARCs with no
endcaps.
Text/Mtext: True Type font text styles are created and included in the DXF file. P-CAD stroke
fonts text strings are converted into DXF text strings of the same height, rotation, mirroring,
and justification; the AutoCAD STANDARD font is used. Note that due to the difference in
fonts, translated text strings may be of different total width than in P-CAD. The bar over barred
text may not align exactly with the text. Mtext is output if True Type is selected.
Pins: A Schematic pin is composed of DXF POLY LINE, LINE, and ARC entities; POLY LINES are
not used in Draft mode.
Wires: These become DXF 2D POLYLINEs.
Buses: When not in Draft mode, these become POLYLINEs; in Draft mode, they are DXF LINEs.
IEEE Symbols: These become individual LINE entities, much as they are now for plotting.
Title Sheets: Title sheets are output to DXF in the block format. These blocks consist of the
lines, text and other objects that form the title sheet and title block. Title blocks are named
TITLE_SHEET_xx, where xx is the sheet number on which the title sheet resides.
File PDIF In
Choose File PDIF In to import Pcad.pdf files. When you choose this command, the PDIF File
Name dialog appears:
197
File PDIF Out
File PDIF Out

Choose File PDIF Out to export schematic files to the PDIF file format. When you choose File
PDIF Out, the File PDIF Out dialog appears:
The File PDIF Out dialog contains the following options:
PDIF Directory (button). Click this button to select the directory in which you want to save the
file.
Sheets (list box) Lists the sheets by name.
PDF Versions Frame
198
6.0/7.0 (button). Choose this button to select the file format for version 6 and 7.
8.0 (button). Choose this button to select the file format for version 8.
File Exit
File Exit
Choose the File Exit command to quit P-CAD Schematic.
If any open design has been modified since the last save, you are prompted whether you want to
save the changes to the file.
The program writes information to the Sch.ini file when you choose File Exit. This information,
which applies to subsequent P-CAD Schematic sessions, consists of parameters and settings such
as workspace size, units and values set in Options Configure and report file settings from File
Reports and Utils ERC.
199
CHAPTER
13
Edit Commands
Using the Edit Commands
Use the Edit menu commands to modify objects in your design. The following list summarizes
some of the actions you can perform with various Edit menu commands.
You can choose Edit Undo to undo recent actions and, if you decide you didnt want to undo
an action, you can choose Edit Redo.
Some actions cannot be undone, but can be unwound by pressing the BACKSPACE key. For
details, see Edit Undo (page 201).
When you choose Edit Paste, you have a number of paste options. See Edit Paste (page 204)
for more information.
Before you can choose some Edit commands, you must select an object. See Edit Select (page
247) and Options Block Selection (page 287) for more information.
Edit Undo
Choose Edit Undo to undo your last action. For example, if you place a part in a design, you can
choose Edit Undo to remove the part you placed. As a shortcut for choosing this command, you
can click the Undo button on the Command toolbar, press CTRL+Z, or press the U key.
By default, you can undo up to 10 actions with the Edit Undo command. To change the undo limit,
open the Sch.ini file. Then, modify the UndoLimit value.
You can set the UndoLimit to any number. However, each stored, undoable action requires
memory. Setting a large UndoLimit may use up your computers available memory, causing slow
performance and often unpredictable results.
If an action cannot be undone, the Edit Undo command is shaded and not available. The list of
undoable actions is deleted when you save the design. Any of the commands in the following list
also cause the undo list to be cleared:
201
Chapter 13: Edit Commands
Place Commands
Edit Delete
Edit Copy
Edit Cut
Moving Objects
Rotating Objects
Flipping Objects
File Save
File Save As
Delete TextStyle
Utils Renumber
File DBX In
File Design Technology Parameters (Close or ESC)
File Design Info (Close or ESC)
Utils Force Update
Utils Record ECOs
Utils Import ECOs
Delete Sheet
Utils ERC
Utils Resolve Hierarchy
Utils Module Wizard
Edit Redo
Edit Redo
Choose Edit Redo to repeat an action that has been undone.
Each modification made to a design results in a copy of the design being placed in the undo list, as
explained in Edit Undo (page 201). If you have stepped backwards in the list using Edit Undo, and
find that you want to move forward to a later version of the modifications, choose Edit Redo.
The redo button on the toolbar, the CTRL+Y and SHIFT+U keys are equivalent to the Edit Redo
command. The UndoLimit setting in the Sch.ini file also applies to the Edit Redo command. To
change the undo limit, open the Sch.ini file. Then, modify the UndoLimit value.
202
Edit Cut
Edit Cut
Choose Edit Cut to remove selected objects from your design and save them to the Clipboard.
From there you can paste them into another design, into another location within the current
design, or into another program.
You need to enable the Select tool (Edit Select) and select at least one object to choose this
command; otherwise the menu command is shaded and the CTRL+X shortcut key is unavailable.
You can copy selected items to a disk file instead of the Clipboard. For details, see Edit Copy to File
(page 203). You can also cut multiple objects by using multiple select and block select operations.
For information, see Edit Select (page 247).
Edit Copy
Choose Edit Copy to copy selected objects to the Clipboard, from where you can paste them to
another design, to another location within the same design, or to another location.
You need to enable the Select tool (Edit Select) and select at least one object to choose this
command; otherwise the menu command is shaded and the CTRL+C shortcut key is unavailable.
Instead of Copy and Paste, you can use CTRL + left mouse button (a drag-and-drop operation) to
copy the selection within the same design quickly. The CTRL + left mouse action does not affect the
clipboard.
You can copy selected items to a disk file instead of the Windows clipboard. For details, see Edit
Copy to File (page 203).
You can copy multiple objects by using multiple select and block select operations. For
information, see Edit Select (page 247).
Edit Copy to File

Choose Edit Copy to File to copy selected objects to a block file or meta file. You can later paste
objects from these files into a schematic design. To copy objects to a file, you must select at least
one item and then choose Edit Copy to File. When you choose this command, the following
dialog appears:
203
Edit Paste
You use the options in the Edit Copy to File dialog to name the file and select one of the following
file formats:
Block Files (*.blk). A file format that stores the information that you want to transfer between
P-CAD Schematic designs.
Meta Files (*.wmf). An image file format that can be transported between computers.
To save storage space, select the Compress Binary Designs check box in the Options Configure
dialog before you save the file. This is beneficial when working with large design files.
For detailed instructions, see Copying Objects to a File (page 91).
Edit Paste
Choose Edit Paste to paste objects into your design file from either the clipboard or a block file.
You must be in Select mode to choose this command.
When you choose Edit Paste, a sub-menu appears, from which you can choose a paste method.
The paste choices range from the simple options Paste From Clipboard and Paste From File in
which objects are pasted without net information, to the more intelligent Paste Circuit and Paste
Circuit From File commands which allow you to control changes to component and net names and
retain net information.
Paste Behavior
After items have been copied and you press and hold down the left mouse button in the
workspace, the ghosted outline of the copied item(s) appears until you release the mouse button
to commit them to the desired location. Before releasing the left mouse button, you can drag the
items to a more precise location in the workspace.
There must be sufficient space to accommodate the objects being pasted. Error messages inform
you if the target space is not large enough or if you are attempting to paste too close to or outside
of the edge of the workspace.
If, while pasting a part, parts of the same name but from a different library already exist in the
destination design, the part may not be pasted/placed depending on possible conflicts in pin
assignments. This conflict could also occur when parts from a Tango Series II schematic are mixed
with parts of the same name in a P-CAD library. In effect, the first instance of the part name
establishes the standard.
When you paste text of a style that has the same name but a different definition than in the current
design, the incoming style name has a bracketed number appended to it to indicate the style
conflict.
204
Edit Paste
The new, bracketed style name is added to the list of available styles in the current design. For style
information, see Edit Properties (page 211) and Options Text Style (page 314).
If you are pasting components or nets that have the same names as objects that already exist in the
design, you have the option to specify how their names should be changed if you choose the Edit
Paste Circuit and Edit Paste Circuit From File commands. With these commands you can also
force a specified net to be pasted into the design while retaining the same name.
Paste From Clipboard

Choose Edit Paste From Clipboard to paste Clipboard objects into your design. This command is
available only when data has been copied to the Clipboard and when you are in Select mode.
When you choose Edit Paste From Clipboard, Schematic places the copied information in the new
location in the design, renames the design objects to the next sequentially available name and
retains the component attributes and their values.
Paste From File

Choose the Edit Paste From File command to paste items from a block file into the current file. To
create a block file, select one or more objects and choose the Edit Copy to File command.
To paste objects from a block file into the current file, choose Edit Paste From File. The following
dialog appears:
205
Edit Paste
The Look In list box displays the current folder; a list of files in that folder appearing directly
underneath. The File name box lets you select or enter a design file, with the extension specified in
the Files of type list.
Select the block file containing the item(s) you wish to paste. Once the file is selected, this
command works like the Edit Paste From Clipboard command. For details, see Paste From
Clipboard (page 205).
Paste Circuit
Choose Edit Paste Circuit to control the naming of components and nets being pasted into a
design and stipulate net attribute bias. When you choose Edit Paste Circuit, the following dialog
appears:
Using Paste Circuit

As long as you have not disabled the paste circuit function, you can paste the data from the
clipboard as many times as necessary. Each time you paste the same data with a left mouse click,
206
Edit Paste
the component and net names are incremented starting from the last net or component name
resident in the design. If you have added a qualifier for the component or net names, the qualifier
is incremented with each paste until the component or net name is unique. You can, however,
choose to retain the current net names.
When you have finished pasting and you have exited the paste function by right-clicking, you can
begin pasting the data again with another Paste Circuit command. This time, when you paste this
same data, the component and net names begin incrementing from their original names.
Reference Designators
In the Reference Designators frame you can choose how the components are named when pasted.
You can either allow Schematic to incrementally change the component names, or you can control
the way components are renamed by adding a qualifier in a specific position in the new name.
To rename the components using a qualifier:
1.
Select the Create new refdes using qualifier check box.
2.
Type the characters (no more than four) that you want to add to the name in the Qualifier box.
3.
Choose the desired position within the RefDes name for the qualifier. Each of following
choices places the qualifier in a different location:
Add before name.
Add before numeric suffix.
Add to end of name.
The Example frame shows a sample, so you can view the change before it is made.
If you do not want to designate the way the RefDes names are modified on paste, clear the Create
new refdes using qualifier check box.
Each time a component is pasted, the RefDes is sequentially incremented alphanumerically to the
next available RefDes for that component. If you have added a qualifier, the qualifier is
incremented first in the same manner. Then, if the component name still conflicts with an existing
component name, it will be incremented until it is unique.
Net Attributes
When pasting data containing net information, either from the same design or another design, you
can choose how the net attributes are handled choosing one of the following radio buttons in the
Net Attributes frame:
Merge Favor Circuit: With this option, incoming net attributes take precedence over existing
net attributes. When the net attributes in the incoming circuit information match those already
in the design, but the values are different, the design attributes are modified to match those of
the incoming circuit. All other incoming net attributes are merged with those in the design.
Merge Favor Design: Existing net attributes are retained when you merge attributes favoring
the design. When the design and incoming circuit have matching net attributes with different
207
Edit Paste
values, the design attribute values are retained. Other incoming net attributes are merged with
those in the design.
Replace Design: This option removes all existing net attributes and replaces them with those of
the incoming circuit.
Ignore Circuit: Net attributes attached to the incoming circuit are ignored and existing net
attributes left unchanged.
Nets
In the Nets frame you can choose which nets are renamed and how they are named when pasted.
This process is similar to the way the components are renamed in the Reference Designators frame.
To rename the nets, follow these steps:
1.
Select the Create new net name using qualifier check box.
2.
Type the characters (no more than four) that you want to add to the name in the Qualifier box.
3.
Choose the desired position for the qualifier within the net name. Each of the following
choices places the qualifier in a different location:
Add before name.
Add before numeric suffix.
Add to end of name.
The Example frame shows a sample, so you can view the change before its made.
If you do not want to designate the way the net names are modified on paste, disable the
Create new net name using qualifier box.
Each time a net is pasted, the net name is sequentially incremented alphanumerically to the
next available net name. If you have added a qualifier, the qualifier is incremented first in the
same manner. Then, if the net name still conflicts with an existing net name, it will be
incremented until it is unique.
4.
The last step is to choose which nets should be renamed using the qualifier and which should
retain their current names. You can designate individual nets to retain the current name by
clicking the specific nets in the Net Names list box. You can also choose to retain all global net
names by enabling the Global Nets option in the Maintain Original Net Names section.
Nets connected to ports are considered global if the port is also copied. If the port is not
copied, the nets are considered part of a signal net. This distinguishes the global nets so that
you can choose to keep the same net name for the global nets when they are pasted.
Paste Circuit From File

Choose the Edit Paste Circuit From File command to open the Edit Paste Circuit From File dialog
and select the file to be pasted. Once the file is selected, the paste operation functions in the same
manner as the Edit Paste Circuit command. For details, see Paste Circuit (page 206).
208
Edit Move By RefDes
Edit Move By RefDes

Choose the Edit Move By RefDes command to move parts by reference designator. This opens
the following dialog.
Use this dialog to select the reference designators of the parts youd like to move. The following
describes this dialog in more detail:
RefDes. This list shows all of the parts on your current sheet. You can select one or more parts
from this list. To select multiple parts, hold down the CTRL or SHIFT key and click the parts to
choose.
If you select parts in your design before you open this dialog, those parts are selected in the
RefDes list box when the dialog appears.
When you double-click a part in this list, the dialog closes. At this time, you can place the part
into a new position by clicking a location in your workspace.
Select RefDes By. Type search criteria in this box to search the RefDes list for a match. You can
enter wildcard characters in this field.
Select All. Click this button to select all of the items in the RefDes list.
Clear All. Click this button to deselect all of the items in the RefDes list box.
After selecting parts from the dialog, click OK to return to your workspace. The status line shows
the Next RefDes to move. To skip to the next RefDes, press N. To move to the previous RefDes,
press B.

To move parts by reference designator, follow these steps.
209
1.
Edit Move By RefDes
If you select parts in your design before you open this dialog, those parts are selected in the
RefDes list box when the dialog appears.
2.
Use one of these methods to select parts from the RefDes list:
To select one part: Double-click a RefDes in the list. Or, select a RefDes from the list and
then click OK or press ENTER.
To select all parts: Click Select All. Then, click OK.
To select a range of parts: Hold down the SHIFT key and click the first and last parts in the
range to select. Then, click OK or press ENTER.
To select various parts: Hold down the CTRL key and click each part to select. Then, click
OK or press ENTER.
To search for parts in the RefDes list: type search criteria in the Select RefDes By box and
then press ENTER.
When the Edit Move by RefDes dialog closes, the status line shows the name of the Next
RefDes to move. You are in placement mode.
To cancel your selection, press ESC or right-click. This reopens the Edit Move by RefDes dialog, so
you can choose another part to move.
3.
210
Choose one of these methods to place the parts:
For quick placement, click the location at which you want to place the part.
For precise placement, do the following: (1) press and hold down the left mouse button or
press the SPACEBAR. (2) Move the ghosted part to the location you want. If appropriate,
Edit Properties
press F to flip or R to rotate the part. (3) Place the part by releasing the mouse button or by
pressing the SPACEBAR.
If you selected multiple parts, the status line shows the Next RefDes to move. To skip to the
next RefDes, press N. To move to the previous RefDes, press B.
4.
Once youve moved all of the selected parts, the Edit Move By RefDes dialog appears. You have
these options:
To move another part, select it from the RefDes list.
To close the Edit Move by RefDes dialog, click Cancel or press ESC.
Searching the RefDes List

To search for parts in the RefDes list, follow these steps:
1.
2.
Enter search criteria in the Search by RefDes box. You can type wildcard characters as follows:
Type an asterisk (*) at the end of your search criteria. For example, type RN* to search for
any reference designators that begin with RN (e.g., RN1, RN2, RN3).
Type a question mark (?) to match a single character in that position. For example, type
C?2 to search for reference designators, such as C12, C22, C32.
Click OK or press ENTER to initiate a search of the RefDes list. Then, do the following:
If parts matching your wildcard search are selected in the Edit Move by RefDes list, verify
the accuracy of the match, and click OK. You can now move these parts.
If the Edit Move by RefDes dialog closes and you return to the workspace. You can now
move these parts on the current sheet.
If a message notifies you that no match was found, click OK to close the message box.
Then, try another search.
Edit Properties
Choose Edit Properties to open the Properties dialog for the objects you select. With this dialog,
you can query and modify the selected objects properties. Before you can choose Edit
Properties, you must enable the Select tool and then select the objects.
The Properties dialog that appears is specific to the object you select. If multiple objects are
selected, they must all be of the same type (e.g., arcs), otherwise the command is shaded and no
dialog will appear. If the objects are of the same type, the changes you make apply to all selected
objects.
Right-Click to Select Properties

As a shortcut for choosing the Edit Properties command, you can select an object, right-click to
open a shortcut menu, and choose Properties. The commands available from this shortcut menu
vary depending on the object you select.
211
Edit Properties
For more information, see Shortcut Menu Commands (page 13).
Double Click to Select Properties

As a shortcut for choosing the Edit Properties command, double-click an object to open the
Property dialog. This shortcut is available only if the Double Click Displays Properties check box is
selected in the Mouse tab of the Options Preferences dialog. For more information, see Options
Preferences (page 301).
Part Properties
When you select one or more parts and choose the Edit Properties command, the Part Properties
dialog appears, as shown in the following figure:
Use the Properties dialog to examine properties for the selected part and to modify certain symbol
properties. From this dialog, you can selectively replace the component type of one or more gates
at the same time. This feature is useful because it lets you replace several gates in your design
automatically, preserve reference designators and, where possible, preserve gate connectivity.
Additional tabs provide access to additional information:
212
Symbol Pins
Component
Component Pins
Attributes
Edit Properties
Symbol Tab
The following information appears on the symbol tab:
The Ref Des box shows the reference designator name. To change the reference designator,
type a new value in the Ref Des field. If you selected more than one part, this value cannot be
changed.
The Value box shows the parts value. To change the value, type a new value in the Value field.
The Type list box shows the component type. You can change this value by selecting a different
component Type from the drop-down list that appears when you click the down arrow button.
A component Type swap follows the rules used by the Utils Force Update command if you choose
the Merge Attributes (Favor Library) option. The rules are:
If an attribute exists in the library component and not in the design component, the library
attributes and their values are moved into the design component.
If the same attribute exists in both the design component and the library component with
different values, the value of the library component attribute will replace the value of the
design component attribute.
An existing design component attribute, which has no matching library component attribute, is
retained, unchanged, in the design component.
When the Value attribute is present in both the design component and the library component,
and has a different value in both places, you must choose which value to keep in the design
when prompted.
The Library list box shows the part libraries available, and displays the currently selected
library.
The Query button provides a direct link to the Library Executive Query function where a
selected part from the Query output dialog can replace the current part and its properties by
clicking the Replace button.
The Visibility frame contains check boxes indicating whether the selected part(s) have visible,
invisible, or undetermined RefDes, Value, and Type attributes.
If a box is checked, the attribute is visible. If the box isn't checked, the attribute is invisible. If
the box is shaded, then the attribute either does not exist (e.g., there is no Value attribute for
the selected part), or there is a conflict between multiple parts selected (e.g., the attribute on
one part is visible, but is invisible on another).
The Alternate frame lets you select the Normal, IEEE or DeMorgan representations of a part if
they exist. The symbols displayed for these representations are assigned in Library Executive.
The Location frame shows the X and Y coordinates of the parts reference point.
The Flip check box indicates whether or not the symbol has been flipped.
The Rotation field shows the rotation amount if the symbol has been rotated.
213
Edit Properties
The Pattern box displays the pattern name. To change the pattern, type a new pattern name in
the box. Changing the pattern in this dialog doesn't change the pattern attached to the
component in the library.
A netlist loaded into PCB after these pattern changes will load a component and its pattern for
the modified component, depending on the contents of the open libraries. P-CAD PCB will
load the first component in an open library having a type matching the modified component. If
a component with a matching type cannot be located, a component with a type name matching
the modified component pattern name is loaded.
The Gate Number box shows the section number of this part within the component. To
reassign this gate, type a new gate number in the box. You can use a numeric or alphabetic part
designation, within the range shown by the Number of Symbols field (Component tab).
The Text Style frame shows the symbols text font (PartStyle).
Text Styles Button

The parts text style (PartStyle) appears in the Text Style field. Click Text Styles to open the Options
Text Style dialog. From this dialog you can edit the parts text style.
Refer to Options Text Style (page 314) for more information.
Symbol Pins Tab

The Symbol Pins tab shows the following dialog:
This tab allows you to change several pin properties of one or more pins within the part.
214
Edit Properties
Pins
The Pins list box lists the pin designators in the selected part as well as power pins in the
component. The information fields to the right display the information about the pin that is
highlighted.
Pin Designator/Pin Name

The Pin Name and Pin Designator boxes each contain a display check box and a combo box. The
Display check box indicates whether the pin designator or pin name on the selected pin(s) are
visible, invisible, or indeterminate. In the Text list boxes, you can set the text style for the pin name
and pin designator.
Net Name/Pin Length

You can change the pin length of visible pins and the net name of hidden, global power pins by
typing new values in the appropriate Pin Length and Net Name boxes. If a pin is connected to a
wire or net, you cannot change the pin length, and the Pin Length box is shaded.
Set All/Clear All

The Set All and Clear All buttons can be used to highlight and unhighlight all pins in the list box.
Query Fields
The following fields allow you to see information about the selected pin:
Location: The X and Y coordinates of the selected pin.
Flip: The Flip box indicates whether or not the pin has been flipped.
Rotation: The Rotation field shows the rotation amount if the pin has been rotated.
Default Pin Des: When a default pin designator has been assigned to the pin, the value is
displayed here. If multiple pins are selected, and all have the same default pin designator, the
value is displayed. When multiple selected pins have different default pin designators, this area
remains blank.
Text Styles
Click Text Styles to open the Options Text Style dialog. From this dialog you can edit all text styles
properties. If you modify a text style in this dialog, all text in your design with that style changes.
For more information, see Options Text Style (page 314).
Component Tab
When you select the Component tab, the Port Properties dialog appears as follows:
215
Edit Properties
This tab shows information for the component(s) you selected on a gate-by-gate basis. This
information is display only; it cant be modified from this dialog. To show information for a
different gate, select the gate from the Gate Number drop-down list box.
The Reference button, when activated by the presence of the Reference attribute, quickly launches
the reference link entered as the Reference attributes value. If the link is a web address the
Internet Explorer is launched and the web site opened. If the link is a document, the associated
program is started and the document displayed.
See the Library Executive Users Guide for information about this dialogs fields.
Component Pins Tab

The Component Pins tab appears as follows:
216
Edit Properties
Use this dialog to look at pin information for the component pins within the symbol or component.
The following information appears:
Pad #: The number of the corresponding pad on the attached pattern. Pad numbers must be
unique, and they must exist in the attached pattern.
Pin Designator: The pin designator of each pin in the component.
Gate #: The part number defines the part that the pin is associated with. In multipart
components, the parts are uniquely numbered from 1 through n.
Pin #: The number of the corresponding pin on the attached symbol. Pin numbers must be
unique and must exist in the attached symbol.
Pin Name: The pin name associated with that pin designator.
Gate Eq: The gate equivalence column defines which gates are equivalent. All gates with the
same Gate Eq number are defined to be equivalent. This information is used by P-CAD
Schematic when automatically incrementing reference designators (e.g., Place Part and Utils
Renumber commands) and by P-CAD PCB to determine which gates can be swapped during
manual or automatic gate swapping. You cannot set the gate equivalency of pins in the same
gate to be different. When you change a part number or gate equivalence for a gate, the
spreadsheet updates the gate equivalence field of the other pins of that gate to match.
Pin Eq: Indicates which pins within a gate are logically equivalent. The pin equivalence values
must be non-zero and identical for a swap to occur between two pins. Non-swappable pins are
indicated with a zero value.
Elec Type: The type of pin.
217
Edit Properties
Attributes Tab
When you click the Attributes tab, the dialog appears as follows:
You can view, add, modify, or delete a collection of component attributes and access a web site.
The dialog contains a two-column table showing the collection of component attributes. Within the
collection, each attributes name and value appear in the column.
Wire Properties
When you select a wire and choose the Edit Properties command, the Wire Properties dialog
appears as shown in the following figure:
The following information appears on the Wire tab of the Wire Properties dialog:
218
Edit Properties
The Net Name field contains the name of the net to which the wire is associated.
Select the Display option to display or hide the wire name.
The Width frame contains the width of the selected wire.
The End Points frame shows the X, Y coordinates for the wires start and end points.
The Text Style field shows the text style used for the wire name.
Wire Width
In the Width grouping, you can modify the width of the selected wire. The wire width can be Thin
(10 mils), Thick (15 mils), or User defined. User defined wire widths can range from 0.1 to 100 mils.
For example, to set the wire width to 11 mils:
1.
Choose the User radio button in the Width frame. The box becomes active.
2.
In the box, type: 11mil and click OK.
To maintain the appearance of P-CAD Schematic designs before V13.0, all wires less than 11mils
wide are displayed as 1 pixel. To set the default wire width, see Options Current Wire (page 312).
Text Styles Button

Click Text Styles to open the Options Text Style dialog. From this dialog you can add, delete, rename,
or edit text styles including the wire style. For more information, see Options Text Style (page 314).
Net Tab
When you click the Net tab, the Wire Properties dialog appears as follows:
On the Net tab of the Wire Properties dialog, you can set the following fields:
219
Edit Properties
Net Name: The Net Names list box contains the name of the net associated with this wire. If
you attempt to rename the net with the name of an existing net, and one of the nets is not
global, an error message appears. You must confirm that you want to autoplace ports to make
both nets global by clicking the Yes button. The nets are merged and renamed.
Nodes: The Nodes list box contains the names of all nodes in the net.
Sheets: The Sheets list box contains the names of all sheets on which the net exists.
Global: The Global check box indicates whether or not the net is a global net.
Pin Count: The Pin Count field displays the pin count for the selected net.
Net Attrs: When you click the Net Attrs button, the Attributes dialog appears.
Bus Properties
When you select a bus and choose the Edit Properties command, the Bus Properties dialog
appears:
The following information appears on the Bus Properties dialog:
220
Bus Name: The Bus Name list box contains the name of the bus.
Display: Select this check box to display the bus name. Clear the check box to hide the bus
name.
Connected Nets: This list box contains the names of all nets connected to the bus.
Sheets: This list box contains the names of all sheets on which the bus is placed.
Text Style: This field shows the text style used for the wire name.
Text Styles: Click the Text Styles button to open the Options Text Style dialog. From this dialog
you can add, delete, rename, or edit the text style of the bus name. Refer to Options Text Style
(page 314) for more information.
Edit Properties
Port Properties
When you select a port and choose the Edit Properties command, the Port Properties dialog
appears with the Port tab selected:
Ports consist of the net name, an optional box surrounding it, and one or two pins to connect it to
wires.
The following information appears on the dialog:
Net Name: Shows the name of the net to which the selected port is attached.
Pin Count: Choose the One Pin or Two Pin radio button.
Pin Length: Choose the Short (100 mil) or Long (500 mil) radio button.
Pin Orientation: Choose either Horizontal or Vertical.
Port Shape: Select one of the Port Shape buttons. If you dont want a port outline, choose the
None button.
Net Tab
When you click the Net tab, the Port Properties dialog appears:
221
Edit Properties
Net Name: The Net Names list box contains the name of the net associated with the port. You
can change the net by typing a new net name in the Net Name box or by choosing a new net
from the drop-down list box. If you attempt to rename the net with the name of an existing net,
and one of the nets is not global, an error message appears. You must confirm that you want to
autoplace ports to make both nets global by clicking the Yes button. The nets are merged and
renamed.
Nodes: The Nodes list box contains the names of all nodes in the net.
Sheets: The Sheets list box contains the names of all sheets on which the net is placed.
Global: The Global field indicates whether or not the net is a global net.
Pin Count: The Pin Count field displays the pin count for the selected net.
Net Attrs: When you click the Net Attrs button, the Attributes dialog appears.
Pin Properties
If the pin is part of a symbol, you can access its properties using the subselect feature described in
Selecting Objects (page 78) or through the Parts Properties dialog discussed above.
When you select a pin and choose the Edit Properties command, the Pin Properties dialog
appears:
222
Edit Properties
Length: Select Short (100 mil), Normal (300 mil), Long (500 mil), or set your own length by
clicking the User option and entering a length in the box. You cannot change the length of a
subselected pin if it is connected to a wire.
Pin Number: You can renumber the pin, by typing over the value that appears in the Pin
Number box. You cannot renumber a symbol pin.
Display: Select the Pin Name and Pin Des check boxes to display the pin name and pin
designator. Clear the check box to hide the name or designator.
Text Style: In the Pin Name and Pin Des list boxes, you can set the text style for the pin name
and pin designator. Click Text Styles to open the Options Text Style dialog. From this dialog
you can edit all text styles properties. If you modify a text style in this dialog, all text in your
design with that style changes.
Pin Name: For a symbol pin, the pin name, like a pin number, cannot be edited. For a free pin,
the pin name, or default pin name, is a placeholder for the real pin name. The Pin Name box
may be left blank. Use this default label to change the orientation or position of the pin name.
Default Pin Des: Use the Default Pin Des box to assign or change a pin designator for the
selected pin. If you have selected multiple pins, which have different default pin designators,
the Default Pin Des box displays Hetero_Selection. Changing the value in this box changes
the default pin designator for all the selected pins.
223
Edit Properties
Display Characteristics: Display characteristics include all attribute symbols that may be
attached to a pin for design clarification. They are for graphical appearance only. Refer to Place
Pin (page 269) for examples.
After reviewing or updating the information, click OK to close the Pin Properties dialog.
Pin Name and Pin Designator Properties

When you subselect a pin name or pin designator and choose Edit Properties, the Text Properties
dialog appears:
You can view the text properties including style and rotation. Also, you can modify the location or
justification of the subselected pin name or pin designator.
A sub-selected pin name or pin designator can be rotated, flipped, and moved.
To modify the text or text style, see Pin Properties (page 222). For more information about text
properties, see Options Text Style (page 314).
Line Properties
When you select a line and choose the Edit Properties command, the Line Properties dialog
appears as follows:
224
Edit Properties
The Width frame lets you choose a radio button to set Thick, Thin, or User (defined) lines. If
you select User, enter a line width in the corresponding box.
The Style frame lets you choose a radio button to set a Solid, Dashed, or Dotted line style for
thin lines.
The End Points frame lets you change the lines start and end points by typing new X and Y
coordinates over the existing values.
The Length box shows the lines length.
If you select multiple lines to modify that are of differing styles and/or widths, the values in the
dialog appear blank. You can select a value and make all the selected lines the same style and/or
width.
Arc Properties
When you select an arc and choose the Edit Properties command, the Arc Properties dialog
appears:
The Properties dialog for arcs shows you the start and end points for the selected arc.
Query Fields
For the free arc Center, Start, and End points, see one of the following:
X and Y coordinates: The X and Y location of the Start and End point.
Tangent Slope Angle: The tangent slope angle of the arc.
Changing Arc Properties

To change the properties of an arc, follow these steps:
225
Edit Properties
Start Angle: Click the scroll buttons (up and down arrows) to scroll through arc start angles.
X and Y coordinates of the Center Point: Type over the existing X and Y values in the Center
Point box.
End Angle: Click the scroll buttons (up and down arrows) to scroll through arc end angles.
Radius: Type a new radius over the existing value.
Width: Type a new line width over the existing value.
Polygon Properties
When you select a polygon and choose Edit Properties, the Free Polygon Properties dialog
appears as follows:
The Free Polygon Properties dialog for free polygons shows you the following information:
Area: The area of the polygon.
Points: The X and Y location of each point in the free polygon.
Text Properties
When you select one or more text items and choose Edit Properties, the Text Properties dialog
appears:
226
Edit Properties
The Text Properties dialog remains displayed in your workspace until you close it or choose
another tool. Changes made to the text in the box are instantly displayed in the selected text in the
design. You can adjust the zoom factor in the design to more easily view the text while the dialog
remains on the screen.
From this dialog, you can change the text content, justification, style and location. The text can also
be rotated and flipped, and any non-default text styles can be modified.
Changing Text Properties

To change the properties of text, follow these instructions:
Text: Type over the text displayed in the Text box and click OK. For multi-line text, ENTER
creates a line break. You can enter a maximum of 2,000 characters. While the Text box has
focus, you can use CTRL+V to paste text from the Clipboard.
Location: The X and Y coordinates of the selected text appear in the Location box. You can
move the text by typing new coordinates.
Justification: Under Justification are nine buttons, which allow you to change text justification.
The reference point of the text string is, by default, at the location of the first character in the
string and set to the lower left corner. When you change the Justification button, the text
moves around the reference point. For instance, if the text STRING is displayed in its default
settings the reference point is as shown in the following illustrations:
If you change the Justification to the upper right corner button, the text STRING rotates
around the reference point and appears in the design as shown in the following illustration:
Flip: Enable the Flip option by clicking in the box. The text appears flipped.
Rotate: Click the Rotate 90.0 button to rotate the text 90 degrees. The degree of rotation is
displayed next to the Rotate 90.0 button.
Text Style: Click on the text style you want from the Text Style list box.
Text Styles: Click the Text Styles button to display the Options Text Style dialog. From this
dialog you can add, delete, rename, or edit non-default text styles.
Refer to the Options Text Style (page 314) for information.
227
Edit Properties
Attribute Properties
When you select an attribute and choose the Edit Properties command, the Attribute Properties
dialog appears:
The following information appears in the dialog:
Attribute Category: This list box displays a list of all attribute categories, All, Component, Net,
Clearance, Physical, Electrical, Placement, Manufacturing, Router, and SPECCTRA. Selecting a
category brings up a list of predefined attributes for that category.
Name: This list box displays all predefined attributes for the specified category. The first entry
in the list is User-defined. The currently-selected attribute also appears in the Name box,
unless User-defined is selected. In that case, the Name box is blank so that you can enter a
user-defined attribute name.
Name: For user-defined attributes, enter a name for the attribute in this box.
If the dialog is accessed for an attribute that already has a name, then the Category list box,
Name list box, and Name box are filled in, but shaded. If the attribute doesnt have a name,
these controls are enabled.
228
Value: Use this box to enter a value for the attribute.
Visible: This check box indicates whether or not the attribute is visible.
Location: This frame shows the X and Y coordinates of the attributes reference point.
Text Style: This frame lets you select the attribute text style. Text styles appear in the Text Style
drop-down list box. To change the selected text style, click on the text style you want from the
list box. To modify the text style, click the Text Style button.
Rotation: Shows the rotation amount if the pattern has been rotated.
Edit Properties
Flipped: This box indicates whether or not the pattern has been flipped.
Justification: In the Justification frame nine buttons allow you to change text justification by
setting the reference point of the text string. For example, if you enable the middle button, the
text reference point (the lower-left corner) moves to the center of the bounding rectangle.
Component References
A special attribute, which provides direct access to information located in a document or web site,
can be added to the part using the Attribute Properties dialog. The attribute is named Reference
and is associated with the Component Attribute Category. The Reference attributes Value should
be a document or web site address where the additional information about this part is located.
When you add the Reference attribute and Reference location, the Place Attribute dialog appears.
Once the Reference attribute has been added, the Reference button on the Component tab of the
Properties dialog is activated and displays the reference link (in this case a web address), as shown:
229
Edit Properties
Also, when the Reference attribute and reference link have been added and selected, the Launch
button on the Attributes tab becomes available, as shown in the following figure:
Click the Launch button on the Attributes tab or the Reference button on the Component tab to
start Internet Explorer and go directly to the designated web address. If the reference link is a
document, the associated program is started and the document appears.
Field Properties
When you select a field and choose the Edit Properties command, the Field Properties dialog
appears as shown on the following page.
230
Edit Properties
The Field Properties dialog lets you view and/or change information about the selected fields
properties. You can modify the following fields:
Text Style (list). Select a text style for the field from this list.
Text Styles (button). Click this button to open the Options Text Style dialog. You use this dialog
to add or modify a text style.
Rotation (data field). Displays the degree of rotation for the field.
Justification (frame). Choose a button in this frame to set the text justification for a field.
X and Y (boxes). Enter an X and Y coordinate to set the location of the field in the design.
Query Fields
The following information about the selected field can be viewed:
Value: The Value assigned to the field.
Name: The name of the existing field is displayed here.
Flip: The Flip box indicates whether or not the field has been flipped.
Rotation: The Rotation field shows the rotation amount if the field has been rotated.
Editable Fields
The following information about the selected field can be modified:
Text Style: Choose a Text Style from the list of styles that appear when you click the down
arrow button.
Text Styles: If the text style you need does not appear on the Text Style drop-down list, click
the Text Styles button to display the Options Text Style dialog where you can define a new text
style. Complete information on the Options Text Style dialog can be found in Options Text
Style (page 314).
231
Edit Properties
Location: The current X and Y coordinates of the fields location. You may enter new
coordinates and the field will be placed in the new location when you exit the dialog by
clicking the OK button.
Justification: Choose the reference point of the field by clicking the desired button. For
example, if you enable the middle button, the field reference point (the lower-left corner)
moves to the center of the bounding rectangle of the field.
ERC Errors Properties

When you select ERC error indicators and choose the Edit Properties command, the Find Errors
dialog appears.
Each indicator represents an error or violation detected in the electrical rules checking pass (Utils
ERC). You can select multiple error indicators with block select and cycle through them by error
number.
To generate ERC error indicators, use the Utils ERC command to enable the Annotate Errors option.
To block select ERC error indicators, use the Options Block Selection command to include the
indicators in a block selection, then perform the block select.
Viewing ERC Errors

To view ERC errors, follow these instructions:
1.
Select ERC error(s) either individually or through a block select.
2.
Right-click the error and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, or choose Edit
Properties. The Find Errors dialog appears as follows:
The Find Errors dialog options are:
232
Error Text (scroll box): Displays the error text.
Show Only Selected (check box): Click this box to view selected errors.
Show Only Overrides (check box): Click this box to view errors that have been marked as
overridden.
Edit Properties
Category (list box): Select one or all categories to ERC errors to view.
Error Number (spin box): Click the Error Number spin box to scroll forward and backward
through the errors associated with the selected ERC error indicators.
Overrides Dont Display Again (check box): Click this box to override an error.
Find (button): To find an error within the design.
Jump To (button): To jump to a particular error.
Replacing Component Types

P-CAD Schematic lets you selectively replace the component type of one or more gates at the same
time. To replace component types, you need to delete an existing gate, then add a new one. With
this feature, you can replace several gates in your design automatically, preserve reference
designators and, where possible, preserve gate connectivity.
If you're replacing a group of gates, each gate in the selection must be of the same type. Also, if you
select one gate in a multigate component, P-CAD Schematic automatically selects all the gates in
that component, even if some of them are not on the current sheet.
Although P-CAD Schematic does its best to preserve gate connectivity, there are some cases where
gates lose their connectivity. This occurs if:
The old and new component types have different pin designators or different numbers of
gates. In this case, the program replaces gates by gate ordering. That is, the first gate of the old
component type is replaced by the first gate of the new component type, and so on until all
gates are replaced. If the old component type has more gates than the new component type,
the program removes the extra gates from the design. However, if the new component type
has more gates than the old component type, the extra gates are left unused.
The new symbol is different from the old symbol.
If P-CAD Schematic cannot maintain gate connectivity, a warning message appears.

To replace component types, follow these steps:
1.
Select the component(s) you wish to replace.
2.
Choose Edit Properties. The Part Properties dialog appears, as shown in the following figure:
233
Edit Delete
Notice the dialog has two list boxes, Type and Library.
Type: Lists the component types available, and displays the component type of the
currently selected component.
Library: Lists the part libraries available, and displays the currently selected library.
3.
Click the Type list box. A drop-down list box shows the available component types in the
current library.
4.
Select the desired component type. If the desired component type is not in the current library,
select another library from the Library list box.
5.
Click OK. P-CAD Schematic replaces the selected components with the new component type.
When type swapping, the program does not apply other Parts Properties changes.
Edit Delete
Choose the Edit Delete command to delete all selected objects. As a shortcut for choosing this
command, press the DEL key or select an object, right-click and choose Delete from the shortcut
menu.
This command does not cut the data to the clipboard as does Edit Cut. To reverse the Delete
action choose the Edit Undo command.
234
Edit Delete
Deleting Objects
1.
Choose Edit Select or click the Select button on the toolbar. Click the object you want to
delete.
2.
Choose Edit Delete. If you inadvertently delete an object, choose Edit Undo to reverse the
delete action.
This operation can also be performed with multiple objects by using multiple select and block
select operations. Refer to Edit Select (page 247).
Deleting Objects from Nets

When you use the Edit Delete command to remove objects from nets, the results depend on
whether the net is a global or local net.
node that is no longer part of any net. For example, in the above figure, if you delete wire cd, the
node d becomes isolated from the net.
symbol retains the original net name, while the other net is renamed to a new system-assigned
net name.
If both subnets are connected to a port or power symbol, then both subnets retain the original
name.
If the wire was connected to a jumper pin and nothing else is connected to that jumper pin.
Then all the jumpered pins are removed from the net.
235
Edit Copy Matrix
Edit Copy Matrix

Choose Edit Copy Matrix to duplicate all the selected objects according to the parameters you
specify. The objects must be selected before Copy Matrix can function.
When you choose Edit Copy Matrix the following dialog appears:
In the Edit Copy Matrix dialog, the Number of Columns and Number of Rows boxes determine the
number of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) duplications, respectively, of a selected object.
The Column Spacing and Row Spacing boxes allow you to enter a value, in current units, to
determine the spacing between the duplicated objects. With Column Spacing, a positive value
duplicates to the right, a negative value to the left. With Row Spacing, a positive value duplicates
up, a negative value down. For example, if you specify 350 mil for Column Spacing and 350 mil for
Row Spacing, and specify 3 rows and 3 columns, the result is a matrix with 9 objects 350 mils apart,
as shown in the following illustration.
The values represented default to mm (millimeters), mil, or in (inches) depending on what you have
set in Options Configure (your current units). You can specify a measurement value (overriding
Options Configure) by typing in mil, mm, or in after the numeric value.
Duplicating an Object
To duplicate an object, follow these steps:
236
1.
Select the object(s) you want to duplicate by clicking the objects to highlight them.
2.
Choose Edit Copy Matrix to open the Edit Copy Matrix dialog.
Edit Explode Part
3.
In the Number of Columns box, specify how many duplications you want to perform
horizontally. In the Column Spacing box, enter a value to determine the spacing between
duplications and in which direction (positive=right, negative=left) to duplicate.
4.
In the Number of Rows box, specify how many duplications you want to perform vertically. In
the Row Spacing box, enter a value to determine the spacing between duplications and in
which direction (positive=up, negative=down) to duplicate.
You will receive an error message if what you specify for your duplication is too large to fit in
the Workspace.
5.
Click OK. If your duplication is unsatisfactory, select Undo to reverse the action.
Copying Nets
When you copy a contiguous net, P-CAD Schematic always creates a new system-assigned net
name. CTRL/Drag and Copy Matrix provide automatic net name incrementation based on
increment values you set using the Options Configure dialog.
Edit Explode Part

Choose the Edit Explode Part command to convert a part back to its basic primitives and creates a
collection of editable graphic objects. When you explode a symbol, the collection of objects is no
longer a part and the default pin designators are updated with the current pin designators.
This feature is useful for modifying an existing part or creating a new part from an existing one.
After you explode the symbol, you can then perform changes to the objects, such as adding more
pins, changing line size or thickness, renumbering pin designators, etc. To aid in creating a new
component, the pins default pin designators are updated with the values of the current pin
designators after exploding.
Make sure that the part you are editing has not been flipped because if some objects in the symbol
are flipped and others aren't, the behavior might be unexpected when you flip the symbol.
Edit Align Parts

Parts can be aligned around a selection reference point either horizontally or vertically, and as an
option, equally spacing the parts. Or, if a number of parts are off-grid, these parts can be aligned
back on-grid.
There are two important things to remember about the Edit Align Parts command:
The alignment of parts cannot be undone.
The alignment of parts has full macro support.
237
Edit Select All
Edit Select All

Choose Edit Select All to select all items on the current sheet. For more information on this
command, see Selecting All Objects (page 80).
Edit Deselect All

Choose Edit Deselect All to cancel the selection of all selected items.
Edit Highlight
Select one or more items in your design and choose Edit Highlight to apply the current highlight
color to those items. The objects retain the highlight color until you use the Edit Unhighlight
command to remove the highlight color from an item.
You can also access this command by selecting an item or items, right-clicking the items and
choosing Highlight from the shortcut menu.
This command interacts with the DDE Hotlinks feature.
Edit Unhighlight
Choose Edit Unhighlight to remove the highlight color from the items you select. As a shortcut
for choosing this command, you can also select an item, right-click and choose Unhighlight from
the shortcut menu.
Edit Unhighlight All

Choose Edit Unhighlight All to remove the highlight color from all items on all sheets in the
design. When you use this commands, the objects typical color is restored. This command applies
to all highlighted objects, regardless of whether they are selected or not.
Edit Select Highlight

Choose the Edit Select Highlight command to select all highlighted objects in your design. This is
useful when you want to edit a group of highlighted objects.
Your block selection criteria determines which highlighted items are selected when you use this
command. To set block selection criteria, see Options Block Selection (page 287).
238
Edit Parts
In addition, this command wont select highlighted sub-items within an object. For example, if you
highlight two pins within a component and choose Edit Select Highlight, neither the pin nor the
component will be selected.
If any items are selected, but not highlighted, when you choose Edit Select Highlight, those items
remain selected. For example, highlight three components on a sheet and then select another
component, but do not highlight it. Now, choose Edit Select Highlight. P-CAD Schematic selects
the three highlighted components, and the other component remains selected.
Edit Parts
Choose Edit Parts to edit parts within your design and to jump to a particular part. This command
also allows you to highlight parts and nets attached to a particular part.
Parts List Box

The Parts list box contains the names of all parts in the active design. You can select individual or
multiple parts in the list box. Once selected, you can highlight and unhighlight parts and attached
nets and jump to a part.
When you close the dialog, parts selected in the list box are automatically selected in the design.
Set All/Clear All

If you want to select all parts in the Parts list box, click the Set All button. If you don't want any parts
selected, click the Clear All button.
Properties
The Properties button accesses the Part Properties dialog for the selected part or parts. See Part
Properties (page 212) for details.
239
Edit Nets
Highlight/Unhighlight
The Highlight button highlights the part or parts selected from the Parts list box in the current
highlight color set in the Colors tab of the Options Display dialog. You can use this feature to
highlight objects using different colors. When you change the highlight color of one object, it does
not affect the highlight color of the other highlighted objects.
When you choose this command, the selected parts are drawn in the highlight color and remain
displayed in that color until the highlighting is removed. The selected color overrides the highlight
color, so you won't see the highlights until the parts are deselected.
If P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB are both running, and if the DDE Hotlinks check box in the
Options Configure dialog is selected in both programs, then part highlight information is
communicated between the two programs. Highlighting a part in P-CAD Schematic highlights the
corresponding component in the P-CAD PCB.
If you change the highlight color of an object in P-CAD PCB, the corresponding object in P-CAD
Schematic is automatically updated with the same highlight color.
The Unhighlight button removes the highlighting from the selected part or parts.
Highlight/Unhighlight an Attached Net

You can highlight nets, which are attached to the part or parts selected in the Parts list box:
1.
To highlight attached nets, select a part from the Parts list box. (You can use the Set All button
if you want to select all parts in the list for highlighting.)
2.
Click the Highlight Attached Nets button. The attached nets, including bus connections,
junctions, ports, wires and pins, are highlighted with the highlight color set in the Colors tab of
the Options Display dialog.
3.
To remove a highlight, select the part from the Parts list box.
4.
Click the Unhighlight Attached Nets button.
Jump
This button allows you to jump to the selected part:
1.
Select one part from the list.
2.
Click Jump to jump to the specified part. The specified part appears in the center of your
workspace.
Edit Nets
Choose Edit Nets to select nets, edit net attributes and to rename and delete nets and buses. A
net is an electrical connection (e.g., two pins connected by a wire). Buses are a graphical
representation of a bundle of one or more wires used to show multiple parallel wires on the
schematic.
240
Edit Nets
When you choose Edit Nets, the following dialog appears:
Rename (button). Click this button to open the Net Name dialog, which gives you the ability to
rename the selected net.
Edit Attributes (button). Select a net in the Net Name list and click this button to open the
Attributes dialog, which gives you the ability to modify net attributes.
View Attributes (button). Select a net in the Net Name list and click this button to open the
Attributes dialog, which gives you the ability to view net attributes.
Highlight (button). Select a net and click this button to highlight the net.
Unhighlight (button). Select a net a click this button to remove the highlight color from the
selected net.
Select (button). Select a net and click this button to select the net in the schematic design.
Delete (button). Select a net a click this button to delete the selected net from the schematic
design.
Type Frame
Net (button). Choose this button to edit nets.
Buses (button). Choose this button to edit buses.
241
Edit Nets
Net Filter Frame
All Nets (button). Choose this button to view all nets.
Global Nets Only (button). Choose this button to view only global nets.
Net Names/Bus Names
Net Names (list box). This list contains the names of all nets in the active design. Nets from
global power pins also appear in the list box. You can select individual or multiple nets in the
list box. Once selected, you can edit net attributes, rename a single net, delete nets, and select
nets.
Bus Names (list box). This list contains the names of all buses from the active design. You can
select individual or multiple buses in the list box. Once selected, you can delete or rename
buses.
Set All Nets (button). Click this button to select all nets listed in the Net Names or Bus Names
list box.
Clear All Nets (button). Click this button to cancel the selection of all next listed in the Net
Names or Bus Names list box.
Set Nets by Attribute (button).
Set Nets by Node Count (button). Nets with a specific number or range of nodes can be
selected by entering the Min and Max values and clicking the Set Nets By Node Count button.
Nodes
Nodes (list box) contains the list of nodes in the selected Net or Bus.
Jump to Node (button). After selecting a Net Name and then one of the Nodes in the net, click
the Jump to Node button to be placed in that nodes location.
Remove Node (button). You can select a node from the list of nodes on a net and remove that
node from the net by clicking the Remove Node button.
Sheets
242
Sheets (list box). When a net from the Net Names box is selected, the Sheets box contains a list
of the sheets on which the select net appears.
Print Sheets (button). Click this button to open the File Print dialog, with the sheets selected in
the Sheets box of the Edit Nets dialog selected in the Sheet box of the File Print dialog. For
details on the File Print dialog, see File Print (page 172).
Edit Nets
Attributes Dialog
The dialog contains a two-column spreadsheet showing the collection of net attributes.
The Place Attribute dialog appears as follows:
The following information appears in the dialog:
Attribute Category (list box): Displays a list of all attribute categories: All, Component, Net,
Clearance, Physical, Electrical, Placement, Manufacturing, Router, and SPECCTRA. Selecting a
category brings up a list of predefined attributes for that category.
243
Edit Nets
Name (list box): Displays all predefined attributes for the specified category. The first entry in
the list is User-defined. The currently-selected attribute also appears in the Name box, unless
User-defined is selected. In that case, the Name box is blank so that you can enter a userdefined attribute name.
Name (text box): For user-defined attributes, enter a name for the attribute.
If the dialog is accessed for an attribute that already has a name, then the Category list box,
Name list box, and Name box are filled in, but shaded. If the attribute doesnt have a name,
these controls are enabled.
Value: Use this box to enter a value for the attribute.
Visible: This check box indicates whether or not the attribute is visible.
Location: This frame shows the X and Y coordinates of the components reference point.
Text Style: This frame lets you select the attribute text style. Text styles appear in the Text Style
drop-down list box. To change the selected Text Style, click on the text style you want from the
list box. To modify the text style, click the Text Style button.
Rotation: Shows the rotation amount if the pattern has been rotated.
Flipped: This box indicates whether or not the pattern has been flipped.
Justification: Under Justification are nine buttons, which allow you to change text justification
by setting the reference point of the text string. For example, if you enable the middle button,
the text reference point (the lower-left corner) moves to the center of the bounding rectangle.
Rename
The Rename button is enabled only when you have highlighted a single net or bus.
For Nets
When you highlight a single net name in the Net Names list box, the Rename button becomes
active. Click Rename and the Net Name dialog appears:
Type a new name and click OK to rename the net and return to the Edit Nets dialog. If the name is
already assigned to another net, and one of the nets is not global the following error message
appears:
244
Edit Nets
You must confirm that you want the autoplace Ports to make both nets global by clicking the Yes
button. Ports are placed on both nets and the net is renamed.
For Buses
When you highlight a single bus name in the Bus Names list box, the Rename button becomes
active. Click Rename and the Bus Name dialog appears:
Type a new name and click OK to rename the bus and return to the Edit Nets dialog. If the name is
already assigned to another bus, you are asked if you want to merge the buses.
View Attributes
When you click the View Attributes button, a report showing the attributes and their values is
generated and displayed in the Notepad.
An example of the report is shown in the following figure:
Highlight/Unhighlight Nets
When the Net radio button is selected, the Highlight button highlights the net or nets selected
from the Net Names list box in the current highlight color set in the Colors tab of the Options
Display dialog. Highlighted items include bus connections, junctions, ports, wires and pins. If
hotlinks are enabled, the corresponding nets are highlighted in PCB.
This options works in the same way as the Edit Highlight command discussed above.
245
Edit Measure
The Unhighlight button removes the highlighting from the selected net(s) and included items. If
hotlinks are enabled, the corresponding nets are no longer highlighted in P-CAD PCB.
Highlight/Unhighlight Buses
When the Bus radio button is selected, the Highlight button highlights the bus or buses selected
from the Bus Names list box in the current highlight color set in the Colors tab of the Options
Display dialog.
The Unhighlight button removes the highlighting from the selected bus or buses.
Delete
The Delete button deletes nets or buses highlighted in the list box.
Select
The Select button selects all items in the nets highlighted in the list box. Select is sensitive to the
settings in Options Block Selection.
You can select a net or multiple nets in the design by highlighting the net names in the list box in
the Edit Nets dialog, then clicking the Select button (the button is available only if a net is chosen).
The nets in the design are displayed in the selection color. You can also select nets through the
Select shortcut menu.
Edit Measure
Choose the Edit Measure command to measure the X distance, Y distance, and total distance
between two points. As a shortcut for choosing this command, click the Edit Measure toolbar
button. You can measure vertical, horizontal, and diagonal distances and the results will be
displayed on the status line. The measurements appear either in mils, millimeters or inches
depending on the current settings in Options Configure.
The Measure tool remains enabled until you enable another tool.
Using Edit Measure

To measure between two points on your workspace:
1.
Choose Edit Measure or click the toolbar button.
2.
Move the cursor to the first point of your measurement in the workspace. Click and drag to the
end point of the measurement.
3.
The results will be displayed on the status line for X distance, Y distance, and T (for total)
distance (in mm or mils). You can't see the measurements if the status line is disabled (View
Status Line).
Measuring with the mouse does not snap to grid if you have View Snap to Grid disabled.
246
Edit Select
Edit Select
Choose the Edit Select command to enable the Select tool. When you are in Select mode, you can
select objects in a design and perform various actions on those objects. As a shortcut for choosing
this command, you can click the toolbar button or press the S key.
Status Line Information

The status line information area identifies selected items, either specifically (part reference
designator, net name, or bus name) or generally (number of items selected).
Select Commands
When you are in Select mode, the following commands are available:
Edit Cut
Edit Copy
Edit Copy to File
Edit Paste
Edit Paste From File
Edit Delete
Edit Copy Matrix
Modify
Edit Explode Part
Edit Highlight
Edit Unhighlight
In addition, Select Net is available from the Select shortcut menu or through Edit Nets.
Select actions are possible only if an object is selected. For example, you cannot move a part unless
it is selected; you cannot modify a line unless it is selected.
Information included in this section only covers the mouse/cursor actions for Select:
For keyboard equivalents to standard mouse functions in P-CAD Schematic, see Keyboard
Reference (page 377).
For the Edit menu command descriptions, refer to the respective command in this chapter.
247
Edit Select
Selecting Objects
To single select, click an object. All other selected objects are deselected. Selected objects are
drawn in the selection color, and are contained within a boundary box. Primitive objects (arcs,
lines, etc.) have handles (small squares used for sizing an object).
To multiple select, first select a single object, then hold down the CTRL key and click on
additional objects/items. The selected objects are surrounded by a selection box, and the
selection box increases as you add items to the multiple selection. Click again on selected
items (still using the CTRL key) to deselect them individually. If you release the CTRL key and
click anywhere other than one of the selected objects, all are deselected.
These are the default keys, but you can use the Options Preferences dialog to change these
select keys.
To subselect, hold down the SHIFT key and left mouse click the object. This command lets you
select a single item on an object (a pin on a part). Once selected, you can view and, in some
cases, modify properties for the item selected.
To select all objects, choose the Edit Select All command. All objects on the current sheet in
the current design are selected.
To deselect all objects, click on an empty area of the Workspace to deselect all items or choose
the Edit Deselect All command.
To block select, click, hold and drag the cursor to create a selection box surrounding a block of
objects, then release the button. You can add or delete objects to or from the block selection
individually by doing a multiple select. To cancel while dragging the selection box, right-click.
If you have the Outside Block radio button selected in the Options Block Selection dialog,
then the selection occurs outside of the selection block. If you have the Inside Block radio
button selected, then the selection occurs inside of the selection block. If you have the
Touching Block option enabled, a block selection includes everything inside and touching the
selection box.
A block selection mask can be used. Objects can be filtered or masked in a variety of ways,
depending on how you set up the selection options. Use the Options Block Selection
command to set the selection options; refer to the command documentation for complete
information.
When Objects Overlap

When objects overlap, it may seem difficult to select an underlying object. Continue clicking
without moving the cursor and Select cycles through all objects underneath the cursor. The
SPACEBAR is easier to use than the mouse in this situation (pressing the SPACEBAR twice equals
click and release for the left mouse button).
Moving and Copying Objects (Drag-and- Drop)

To move an object, first select it, then click on the object and drag the cursor (with the object
attached) to the new location. Release to place the object.
248
Edit Select
If you are moving multiple objects, click anywhere in the selection box and drag; all the selected
objects in the box follow. Release the button to place the objects.
You can copy objects in the same manner; after you select the objects, hold the CTRL key down
and drag a copy of the objects to where you want to place them. When copying a part, the RefDes
(reference designator) changes in the copy. When copying non-global nets, the copys net name is
incremented or decremented depending on the value you set for the Options Configure Net
Increment option. To cancel a move or copy in progress, right-click while holding down the left
mouse button.
Resizing Objects
You can resize a selected object by clicking on one of its handles, and dragging to stretch the
object. The resize function varies for the different objects. For example, to resize an arc you click
on one of the endpoint resize handles and drag the endpoint to increase the sweep angle.
To resize a polygon, you can grab one of its vertex handles and move it to change the polygon.
When you move a handle that is on an edge between two vertices, a new vertex is created. You can
delete a vertex by moving it to an adjacent vertex and releasing.
Wires, buses, lines, arcs, and polygons can be resized with the Select mode resize function.
Rotating and Flipping

Select an object. This function works on multiple- or block-selected objects as well.
Press R to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise. To flip the object in the X direction (about the Y
axis), press F while the object is selected. For items with associated connections, press the left
mouse button while rotating or flipping to prevent reconnection attempts each time you rotate or
flip. Connections are committed when the left mouse button is released.
Edit Properties
With the Select tool enabled, choose Edit Properties or use the shortcut menu after an object is
selected. This displays a Properties dialog for the selected object. For details, see Edit Properties
(page 211).
Select Contiguous
The Select Contiguous command allows the selection of all contiguous net objects of a selected
net.
For example, to use the Select Contiguous command:
1.
Select a wire or port.
249
Edit Select
2.
Right-click the wire or port to open a shortcut menu.
3.
From the shortcut menu, choose the Select Contiguous command.
All contiguous net objects of the net are selected unless you set the Block Selection mask to filter
out wires or ports.
This feature will only work for one net at a time.
250
CHAPTER
14
View Commands
Using the View Commands
The View commands allow you to temporarily alter the display characteristics of your workspace to
better pinpoint locations and objects in your design. You can also alternately enable or disable the
information displays and the toolbar.
For more permanent adjustments to your display characteristics, such as color display and style
changes to objects, refer to the Options menu.
View Redraw
Choose View Redraw to clear and then repaint the active window without changing the current
view.
Use View Redraw when you have leftover wires and shapes from moving or deleting objects, to
erase leftover graphics.
To interrupt a redraw in progress, right-click or press ESC.
View Extent
Choose View Extent to display the extent of all objects on the current sheet in the active window.
P-CAD Schematic computes and draws the workspace so that all objects on the current sheet are
visible. Any items on the title sheet are not considered in the extent.
View Last
Choose View Last to redraw the previous view for the active window, if you have altered the view
in any way in this window.
There is no previous view until you run at least one View command that changes the view area. If
you run View Last multiple times, you toggle between the last two views.
251
Chapter 14: View Commands
View All
Scrolling does not affect the previous view.
View All
Choose View All to redraw the entire workspace in the active window.
The workspace size displayed is determined by the Workspace Size option set in Options
Configure. If you want to make the workspace smaller to fit the design you are working on, then
size it accordingly using Options Configure. The scroll bars dont appear at this zoom level.
View All is the default view when you start up P-CAD Schematic with an empty workspace.
View Center
Choose the View Center command to redraw the screen using the cursor as the relative center
point.
When you choose View Center, the cursor takes the shape of a magnifying glass. Move the cursor
to a point on your design and click the workspace. The point where you click is centered on the
screen. To cancel the zoom after the magnifying glass cursor appears, you can right-click or press
ESC.
As a shortcut for choosing this menu command, move the cursor to a point in your design and
press the C key. This is quick way to pan across your workspace. You don't need to click the mouse
button, just move the cursor to the point you want centered and press C.
View Zoom Out

Choose the View Zoom Out command to zoom out by the magnification factor set in Options
Configure. This is a temporary mode that does not affect the mode you may be operating in.
When you select View Zoom Out, the cursor takes on the shape of a magnifying glass (the zoom
cursor), prompting you to click for the center point of the zoomed area. The cursor position
becomes the center of the zoomed-out area. You must reinvoke the command for every zoom
action. To cancel the zoom after the zoom cursor appears, right-click or press ESC.
Minus Key (-)

An easier way to zoom out is to press the minus key (-) as a shortcut (the keypad minus key is also
functional). Your current cursor location becomes the center of the zoom action when you press
the minus key; you don't have to click the workspace.
View Zoom Window

Choose the View Zoom Window command or click the toolbar button to zoom in on an area of
the workspace. When you choose this command, the zoom window tool becomes active. As a
shortcut for choosing this command, press the Z key.
252
View Jump Location
You use the zoom window tool to draw a bounding outline around a selected region of your
workspace. A bounding outline is dotted rectangle that appears when you drag the mouse cursor
across your workspace, to select a range of items or a design region. The bounding outline is also
called a selection block or zoom window.
The zoom window mode is a temporary mode that does not affect whatever other mode you may
be operating in.
Zooming In with a Zoom Window

To zoom in on a region of the design with a zoom window, follow these steps:
1.
Press the Z key, click the Zoom button on the toolbar, or choose the View Zoom Window
command. The cursor takes the shape of a white magnifying glass shape.
2.
Press and hold down the left mouse button. Then, drag the mouse cursor across your
workspace to draw a bounding outline around the region you want to view.
3.
Release the mouse button when you have completed the bounding outline. Whatever you
surround with the outline will be enlarged on the active window.
The mode you were in is still active and will resume after you do the zoom window action (the
zoom window action is a temporary mode).
You must drag the cursor to create a zoom window. If you click and release in the active window
workspace without dragging the cursor, the program responds with a beep, and does not zoom in.
To cancel the zoom action once the zoom cursor appears, right-click or press ESC.
View Jump Location

Choose the View Jump Location command to move the cursor to a specified location (X, Y
coordinates).
This command pans the active window to the specified location, attempting to center the location.
Your current zoom setting is not changed by the jump location panning (except View Last is
updated). If the specified location is already visible on the active window, no panning is necessary.
The units used for the location value (mil, mm, or in) are determined by the setting in Options
Configure. Choose Options Configure to override the default settings.
The location is also based on the Options Grids setting, either Absolute or Relative; e.g., if your grid
setting is in Relative mode, then the location is a Relative coordinate. Also, you can use negative
coordinate values when in Relative mode. Refer to Options Grids (page 295) for more information.
Jump to a Location
1.
Choose the View Jump Location command. The following dialog appears:
253
View Jump Text
2.
In the dialog, specify the X and Y coordinates (in the boxes) of where you want your cursor to
be in the workspace.
3.
Click OK.
View Jump Text

Choose the View Jump Text command to search through all text strings to locate a specific
combination of letters. The character string that you specify can be part of a word or a complete
word.
Case Sensitive Search. Select this check box to search for text matches based on case. If you disable
this option, text case will be ignored in the search.
Search Entire Design. Click this check box to search all sheets for the specified text string. It will
search only the current sheet when you clear the check box.
Jump to Text
1.
Choose View Jump Text. The View Jump Text dialog appears.
2.
Type the text you want to search for in the Text box. Notice that the OK button is grayed out.
Click Search.
3.
If the matching text is not already on the active window, the program pans the active window
at the current zoom level to locate the text and center its reference point. You can set the text
reference point by setting the justification with the Options Text Style command.
4.
After P-CAD finds the first instance of the specified text string (highlighting it in the highlight
color), the Search button changes to Next, allowing you to find subsequent instances of the
same text string. You can continue to cycle through all occurrences of the search pattern until
you click Cancel or OK.
Once a string has been found, the OK button is no longer grayed; if you click it, the program moves
the cursor to the highlighted text and the highlighting disappears.
254
View Descend
Highlighted text may be obscured by the dialog; move the dialog to view the text if necessary.
View Descend
In a hierarchical schematic design, you can easily move down the hierarchy by choosing the View
Descend command. When you select a module, the View Descend command becomes available.
Choose View Descend and the Hierarchy Navigator dialog appears:
Select a link pin number from the Select Pin list and click OK. The selected link becomes the
worksheets focus.
A shortcut command is available for View Descend.
View Ascend
In a hierarchical schematic design, you can easily move up the hierarchy by choosing the View
Ascend command. When you select a link pin, the View Ascend command is enabled. Choose View
Ascend and the Hierarchy Navigator dialog appears:
Highlight a module reference designator and click OK. The selected module becomes the
worksheets focus.
255
View Command Toolbar
A shortcut command is available for View Ascend.
View Command Toolbar

Choose the View Command Toolbar command to show or hide the Command toolbar. A check
mark next to the toolbar menu item indicates that the toolbar is visible. The toolbar gives you quick
access to the most frequently used editing commands (such as the Select tool).
Disabling the command increases the space within the active window.
The setting of the toolbar visibility is saved to your Sch.ini file when you quit the program, and
restored when you restart it.
View Placement Toolbar

Choose the View Placement Toolbar command to show or hide the Placement toolbar. The
toolbar gives you quick access to the most frequently used Place commands.
Disabling the command increases the space within the applicable window.
The setting of the Placement toolbar visibility is saved to your Sch.ini file when you exit the
program, and restored when you restart it.
View Custom Toolbar

Choose View Custom Toolbar to either show or hide the custom toolbar. A check mark next to
this menu command indicates that the Custom toolbar is visible.
If no tools have been added to the custom toolbar, the display of the toolbar is turned off. As soon
as the first custom tool has been added using the Utils Customize command, the Custom toolbar
display is turned on. When custom tools exist in the Custom toolbar, you can turn off the display of
the toolbar by choosing View Custom Toolbar.
View Prompt Line

Choose View Prompt Line to either show or hide the prompt line. The prompt line gives
instructions on what to do in certain modes.
256
View Status Line
A check mark alongside the command indicates that the prompt line is visible. Disabling the
command increases the space within the applicable window.
The setting of the prompt line visibility is saved to your Sch.ini file when you exit the program,
and restored when you restart it.
View Status Line

Choose View Status Line to either show or hide the P-CAD Schematic status line. The status line
provides status information and allows you to change sheets and execute temporary macros.
A check mark alongside the command indicates that the status line is visible. Disabling the
command increases the space within the applicable window.
The setting of the status line visibility is saved to your Sch.ini file when you exit the program, and
restored when you restart it.
View Snap to Grid

Choose the View Snap to Grid command to turn on and off a snappy cursor. When a check mark
precedes the command, a snappy cursor moves from grid point to grid point. When the command
is not checked, a free floating cursor moves freely between grid points.
A snappy cursor can create a predictable point of reference when you move and rotate objects or
measure distances. A free floating cursor can enhance your ability to select items in the workspace,
such as when you want to select a line that does not run true along grid points.
The View Snap to Grid command does not support the DataTips feature. When View Snap to Grid
is a checked command, the DataTips feature is temporarily disabled.
Your current View Snap to Grid setting (on or off) is saved in the Sch.ini file when you quit the
program.
257
CHAPTER
15
Place Commands
Using the Place Commands
Use the commands in the Place menu to place various items and objects in a design. After you
choose a command, click the workspace to place the selected item. With some commands, a dialog
box appears so you can select specific properties for the item you are about to place.
Before an item is placed in a design, it appears in a highlighted color to distinguish it from placed
items. Once placed, they appear in their normal color. To modify an object after it has been placed
in a design, select the object and choose Edit Properties.
Place Part
Choose Place Part to place a part in your active design. With this command, you can select the
type of part to place, as long as the part and its corresponding symbol has been created and
assigned to an open library.
Parts of the same type in different libraries can be placed only if they have the same pin mapping
(i.e., pin designator to pin name to pad number). In other words, if you place the same part from
different libraries, the first instance of the part type establishes the standard pin mapping for that
type of part. Any parts of that type placed subsequently have to conform to the pin order of the first
or they cannot be placed.
When you place parts that include text with styles that have the same names but different
definitions than those in the current design, the new style names are bracketed to indicate the style
conflict. The bracketed style names are added to the list of available styles in the current design. For
additional information, see Edit Properties (page 211) and Options Text Style (page 314) and the
P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide.
Placing a Part
To place a part, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Place Part or click the Place Part button in the Placement toolbar.
259
Chapter 15: Place Commands
Place Part
2.
Click the workspace. The following Place Part dialog appears.
3.
Select a part from the Component Name list. The list shows all of the components in the library
currently selected in the Library list. To view the contents of another library, select a library
from this list.
To add a library to this list, click Library Setup. For more information, see Library Setup (page
325).
4.
260
Click Browse to expand the dialog and view a graphical representation of the part, as shown in
the following figure:
Place Part
5.
In the Part Num box, select which gate in the highlighted component will be placed first. To do
this, type the part number in the box. Notice that the Num Parts field shows the number of
parts associated with the selected component.
6.
In the Alternate frame, choose one of the following radio buttons to select a graphical
representation: Normal, IEEE, or DeMorgan.
In addition to the typical commercial representation of components, P-CAD Schematic
includes IEEE and DeMorgan representations of many parts. The IEEE alternate representations
are based on the component specifications from IEEE/ANSI Standard 91-1984.
7.
Specify a reference designator in the RefDes box.

If you leave this field blank, the program uses the default RefDes prefix assigned to the part at
part creation. If you do not assign a number, the program automatically assigns the next
available number.
8.
If the component being placed has a value, it is displayed in the Value box. You may change
the value in the Value box, when necessary (e.g., electrical values for resistors and capacitors;
typically blank for logic parts). The new value overrides the value taken from the library
component.
When a Value attribute exists in the component, its value is displayed in the Value box based
on the following rules:
9.
If the symbol has a Value attribute and there is no component Value attribute, the
symbols Value attribute value is used.
If the component has a Value attribute, the components Value attribute value will take
precedence and be used even if the symbol has a Value attribute value.
Click OK when the desired information is displayed in the Value box. The Place Part dialog
closes. You are now in part placement mode.
10. Choose one of the following methods to place the part:
Move the cursor to the location in the design where you want to place the part. Click to
place it.
Press and hold the left mouse button down to display a ghosted outline of the part. Drag
the ghosted outline to the desired location and release the left mouse button to place the
part.
Hold down the ALT key and click the left mouse button. Release the ALT key and move the
part with the mouse. You do not have to hold down the left mouse button. Then, click to
place the part. To cancel placement of the part, right-click.
To rotate or flip a part, press R or F while holding down the left mouse button. For details, see
Rotating Objects During Placement (page 86).
261
Place Part
11. Continue to place the same part by clicking the desired locations in the workspace. Notice that
each part is given a unique reference designator.
To change the displayed part number to the next available value, press P; to change to the
previous available value, press SHIFT+P. To select the next available reference designator,
press D. To select the previous available reference designator, press SHIFT+D.
12. If you want to place a different part, right-click or press ESC to stop placing the selected part.
As you are still in part placement mode, you can click the workspace to open the Place Part
dialog and select another part to place (as in step 2).
To gain access to the embedded Query utility, click the Query button. For details on this feature,
see the Library Executive Users Guide.
Power Components
Power Components are used to rename nets. For example, connecting a GND power component to
a net will force that net to have a net name of GND. Although they have reference designators,
power components do not appear in any netlist you generate. Create a power component by
selecting the Power radio button in the Save Component As dialog; the pin name is the name of the
net that will be created. See Library Symbol Save As (page 326) for more information.
If you place a power component that has a pin name such as GND or VCC when the design
contains a non-global net with the same name, a warning message appears. The message informs
you that a port has been added to the net and shows the sheet number where the port was placed.
Splitting a Net
This section explains how the Place Part command handles the resulting net splitting when a twopin part is placed, copied, or moved on top of a single wire segment. The portion of the wire
between the two pins is deleted so that the wires connect to the pin endpoints.
Net Naming for Delete and Insert Part

Splitting a net, by inserting a part over a wire segment (or deleting a wire segment) results in
retaining the original net name on one side, and renaming the other to a new system-assigned net
name.
If a port or power symbol is attached to a net created by the splitting process, that portion of the
net retains the original name. If both portions are attached to a port or power symbol, then both
keep the original net name.
Jumper Pins
Components with jumper pins are handled in a special way. Any time this command adds a pin to a
net, P-CAD Schematic checks to see if the pin is a jumper pin. If it is, the component behaves as if
all of the pins marked as being jumpered together are connected. Jumper pins are ported to force
them to belong to the appropriate net.
262
Place Wire
Place Wire
Choose Place Wire to place a wire or series of wire segments on the current sheet.
When you place a wire, the wire is the width specified in the Options Current Wire dialog. To
change the current wire width, choose Options Current Wire.
Wires can start or end on a pin, on a bus, in an open space or on another wire. If you place a wire
so that it ends on a wire or pin, the wire is automatically connected. Unconnected wires display
open ends if the Display Open Ends check box is selected in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options
Display dialog. To indicate that the wire is unconnected, open ends take the shape of small boxes at
the end of a wire. Starting or ending a wire on an existing wire automatically creates a junction.
Starting or ending a wire on a bus creates a bus entry.
The illustration on the left shows three wire segments. Where they intersect is a junction. The
illustration on the right shows a bus connection where the wire is connected to the bus, and an
open end where the wire is unconnected.
1.
Choose Place Wire or click the Place Wire toolbar button.

While you draw a wire or wire segments, the cursor is displayed as a crosshair shape to
indicate that wire placement is in progress.
2.
With the cursor in the active window, click and hold the button at the starting point, then drag
the wire to its second point and release to place the wire. You can continue with connected
segments in the same manner.
You can press ALT+left click instead so you don't have to hold the button down while dragging
wire segments.
You can unwind any wire segments by pressing the BACKSPACE key or backtracking the
mouse over the wire segments. If you have finished the wire segments, press ESC or the right
mouse button, choose Edit Undo, or click the toolbar button to undo the whole series of
finished segments.
3.
To finish the wire or wire segments, right-click or press ESC. Then you can begin another wire
beginning at a new location.
4.
If you are creating a new net, the Net Name is automatically assigned. Each successive net is
incremented by the increment value you set up in the Options Configure dialog.
You remain in wire placement mode until you choose another command.
263
Place Wire
Adding Wires to Nets

When you connect a new wire to an existing net, it automatically places a junction. If the existing
wire belongs to a different net, the following dialog appears:
With the Merge Contiguous Nets dialog, you choose the net name after the nets are merged. The
Name the Contiguous Net combo box shows the net names of the existing nets. Select a net name
from the list or type a new name and click OK.
Jumper Pins
Any time a wire adds a pin to a net, P-CAD Schematic checks to see if the pin is a jumper pin. If it is,
the component behaves as if all of the pins that have been as being jumpered together are
connected. Jumper pins are ported to force them to belong to the appropriate net.
Orthogonal Modes
There are orthogonal modes that you can use while placing wires. While you are in wire placement
mode and dragging a wire segment, you can press the O key while holding down the left mouse
button to switch between the enabled orthogonal modes.
Orthogonal modes use lines that are horizontal, vertical, and at 45-degree angles. Press the O key
to switch between the enabled modes. You can enable or disable the orthogonal modes in the
Options Configure dialog. The non-orthogonal mode, with straight line placement at any angle, is
always enabled.
The 90/90 and 45/90 orthogonal modes are provided as mode pairs. Press the F key to switch
between the current mode pair.
90/90 Line-Line
Wires are placed horizontally and vertically in 90/90 Line-Line mode. In the first mode, the first wire
segment is always longer than the second. In the second mode, the first segment is shorter. You
can switch between the two by pressing the F key.
264
Place Bus
45/90 Line-Line
With 45/90 Line-Line mode, you can press the F key to switch between the two modes. The first
mode makes the first segment displayed at a 45-degree angle and the second segment is either
horizontal or vertical. The second mode makes the first segment either horizontal or vertical and
the second segment is displayed at a 45-degree angle.
Place Bus
Choose the Place Bus command to place a bus (or series of bus segments) on the current sheet.
Buses are used to show multiple parallel wires on the schematic, such as address and data lines.
Buses graphically represent a bundle of one or more wires.
To place a bus, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Place Bus or click the Place Bus toolbar button.

While you draw a bus or segments, the cursor is displayed as a crosshair shape to indicate that
bus placement is in progress. When you finish the bus segments, the cursor returns to its
normal shape.
2.
With the cursor in the active window, click and hold the left mouse button at the starting point,
then drag the bus to its second point and release to place the bus. You can continue with
connected segments in the same manner.
You can press ALT+click instead so you don't have to hold the button down while dragging bus
segments.
You can unwind any previous bus segments by pressing the BACKSPACE key or backtracking
the mouse over the segments. If you have finished the bus by pressing ESC or right-clicking,
choose Edit Undo or click the toolbar button to undo the whole series of finished segments.
265
3.
Place Bus
To finish the bus or bus segments, right-click or press ESC. Then you can begin another bus
You remain in bus placement mode until you choose another command.
Status Line Measurements
The status line information display area (on the right side of the status line) displays bus
measurements for delta X and delta Y while you are dragging a bus segment. When the bus
segment is finished, the total length measurement of the segment(s) is displayed.
When the bus is finally placed, all measurements on the status line disappear.
Orthogonal Modes
The orthogonal modes that you can use while placing buses work in the same way as they do for
wires. While you are in bus placement mode and dragging a bus segment, you can hold down the
left mouse button and press the O key to switch between the enabled orthogonal modes.
always enabled.
between the current mode pair. For illustrations, see Place Wire (page 263).
Bus Connections
Bus connections are formed automatically when you connect a wire to a bus. They let you know
that the connection has been made.
The bus connection you place defaults to the type of connection you using the Bus Connection
Mode field in the Colors tab of the Options Display dialog.
To change a connection, select it, then right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Press the B key to switch between bus connection styles while placing wires.
Select one of the three styles for the required connection.
266
Place Port
Place Port
Choose the Place Port command to place ports in your design. Ports indicate connectivity
between non-contiguous portions, or subnets, of the same net. In other words, ports provide a
visible means to connect contiguous portions of a net in different locations of the design without
having to wire them together directly. Ported nets may be on the same or different sheets.
Display Characteristics
Ports consist of the following items: the net name, an optional box surrounding it, and one or two
pins to connect it to wires. Sixteen different styles of ports are provided.
Placing Ports
To place ports, follow these steps:
1.
Choose the Place Port command or click the Place Port toolbar button.
2.
Click the workspace to open the Place Port dialog. If you click over a wire, the Net Name box is
preset with the net name. Otherwise, it is preset with the last name you used.
3.
To increment net names when placing multiple ports, select the Increment Port Name check
box. Net names are incremented only when the name ends in a number.
4.
Type the net name in the Net Name box.
5.
In the Pin Count frame, choose the One Pin or Two Pin radio button.
6.
In the Pin Length frame, choose the Short (5 mils) or Long (50 mils) radio button.
267
Place Port
7.
In the Pin Orientation frame, choose the Horizontal or Vertical radio button.
8.
Click OK to close the Place Port dialog. You are now in port placement mode.
9.
In your workspace, move the cursor to the location where you want to place the port. Click the
workspace to place it.
If you elected to increment ports, subsequent mouse clicks place ports with incremented net
names, otherwise each click places a port with the same name.
10. To rotate the port, press R while holding down the left mouse button. To change the port
display type, press P while holding down the mouse button.
If you are placing a port anywhere on a non-global net, an error message appears. The message
informs you that a net can only be renamed to an existing net name if both nets are global, and
asks if you want to autoplace ports to make both nets global. If you click the Yes button, the
ports are placed, and nets are merged and renamed.
11. Right-click to end the place port session.
Hotkeys
While placing a port, you can change the orientation of the port using a hot key. Press R to rotate
the port or F to flip it. You can also switch between the following port styles by pressing the P key:
End-wire
Inline
Off-wire-side
Off-wire-top
Off-wire-bottom
Placing an Inline Port

If you place an Inline port over a wire, the occluded wire is automatically deleted. This is especially
useful for labeling bus entries. If a port is not placed at a wire end or inline, a junction will
automatically be created.
Jumper Pins
Any time placing a port adds a node to a net, P-CAD Schematic checks to see if the node is a
jumper pin. If it is, the component behaves as if all of the pins marked as being jumpered together
are connected. In Schematic, pins are ported to force them to belong to the appropriate net.
Moving Ports
Ports may be moved like components. If a port is moved any attached wires will be rubber banded
to the new location.
268
Place Pin
Renaming Ports
The net to which a port is attached may be renamed as follows:
Selecting the port and clicking the right mouse button to modify.
Using the Edit Nets dialog.
Using the Net Rename tool.
Selecting and modifying the net name of a wire to which the port is attached.
Modifying a Port's Text Style

The font and text size of all the ports can be changed by entering the Options Text Style dialog, and
modifying the [Wirestyle].
Deleting Ports
Ports may be selected and deleted, like any other object, however, when an inline port is deleted, a
wire is automatically drawn to maintain connectivity. If you delete a port where opposing pins are
connected to wires of different widths, the resulting contiguous wire will be of uniform width.
Backward Compatibility
The following rules apply when loading designs and block files from P-CAD versions earlier than
2.60:
If a net is comprised of a single contiguous net, then the net is a local net.
If a net is comprised of two or more subnets, then the net is a global net and will have a port
attached to each non-contiguous subnet.
If a net has a wire attached to a power symbol or is part of a hidden power net, the net is
considered global.
If a wire has a power symbol attached to it, it does not require a port to be attached; bus
entries do.
If a block is pasted into the design, the rules for porting apply as well. Nets of existing net
names will retain their net names if they were ported; if they were not ported they are given
unique system-assigned net names.
Place Pin
Choose the Place Pin command to place a free pin in the workspace. To place a pin, follow these
steps:
1.
Choose Place Pin or click the Place Pin toolbar button.
2.
Click the active window to open the Place Pin dialog shown in the following figure:
269
Place Pin
3.
Select the pin length from the options in the Length box. In the Display frame, select the Pin
Name or Pin Des check box to choose the visibility of the pin name and pin designator.
4.
In the Text Style frame, set the text style for the pin name and pin designator. Click the Text
Styles button to open the Options Text Style dialog. From there you can add or modify existing
text styles for your design.
5.
Type the default pin name, if desired, in the Default Pin Name box. The default pin name is a
placeholder for the real pin name. Use this default label to change the orientation or position
of the pin name. The default pin name, like a pin number, cannot be edited once attached to a
symbol.
6.
Enter the default pin designator, if desired, in the Default Pin Designator box. The default pin
designator can be edited once attached to a symbol.
7.
In the Display Characteristics frame, choose the desired characteristics by selecting or typing
information in the four combo boxes. Click OK.
8.
You are now in the place mode of Place Pin. Move the cursor to the location in the active
window where you want to place the pin. Click the left mouse button to place it. Or you can
hold the left mouse button down to make a ghost, then drag and drop (release) to place it
more accurately. (An alternate method for drag-and-drop is ALT+click, then release the ALT
key. You can then move the pin freely with the mouse without having to keep the button
depressed.) To cancel ghosting of a pin, right-click.
You can rotate a pin while placing it by pressing R while holding down the left mouse button. A
pin can also be flipped during placement using the F key while holding down the left mouse
button.
270
Place Pin
You can continue to place similar pins by clicking in additional locations. Pin attributes
previously specified (in the Place Pin dialog) are also displayed.
9.
To place a different pin, right-click or press ESC to exit the place mode for that particular pin.
As you are still in pin placement mode, you can click the active window to open the dialog and
select another pin to place.
Once placed, pins can be renumbered. For more information, see Utils Renumber (page 329).
A parts sub-selected pin can be connected to a specified net using the Add to Net command in the
shortcut menu.
Pin names and pin designators can be sub-selected for moving, flipping and rotating.
Display Characteristics
Display characteristics include all attribute symbols that may be attached to a pin for design
clarification. They are for graphical appearance only. You may specify display characteristics for
each item shown in the following illustrations:
Outside
Outside Edge
Inside
271
Place Line
Inside Edge
Place Line
Choose the Place Line command to place a series of line segments of the current line width on
the current sheet. In P-CAD Schematic, lines are graphical representations only; they carry no net
information.
To change the current line width, choose the Options Current Line command.
Placing a Line
To place a line on the workspace, follow these steps:
1.
Choose the Place Line command or click the Place Line toolbar button.
2.
With the cursor in the workspace, click and hold the left mouse button at the starting point,
then drag the line to its second point and release to place the line. You can continue with
connected segments in the same manner.
You can press ALT+click instead so you don't have to hold the mouse button down while
dragging line segments.
While drawing a line or segments, the cursor is displayed as a crosshair shape. When you finish
the line or segments, the cursor returns to its normal shape.
You can unwind any line segments by pressing the BACKSPACE key or backtracking the mouse
over the segments. If you have finished the line segments by pressing ESC or right-clicking,
choose Edit Undo or click the toolbar button to undo the whole series of finished segments.
3.
To finish the line or line segments, right-click or press ESC. Then you can begin another line
You remain in line placement mode until you select another tool or command.
Status Line Measurements
The status line information display area (on the right side of the status line) displays line
measurements for delta X and delta Y while you are dragging a line segment. When the line
segment is finished, the total length measurement of the segment(s) appears.
When the line is finally placed, all measurements on the status line disappear.
272
Place Arc
Orthogonal Modes
The orthogonal modes used while placing lines work in the same way as for wires. While you are in
place line mode and dragging a line segment, you can press the O key while holding down the left
mouse button to switch between the enabled orthogonal modes.
always enabled.
between the current mode pair. For illustrations, see Place Wire (page 263).
90/90 Line-Line
Both lines are either horizontal or vertical (displayed perpendicular to each other). For long, the
first segment is always longer than the second. For short, the first segment is shorter. You can
switch between the two by pressing the F key.
45/90 Line-Line
You can switch between the two modes by pressing the F key. The first mode makes the first
segment displayed at a 45-degree angle and the second segment is either horizontal or vertical. The
second mode makes the first segment either horizontal or vertical and the second segment is
displayed at a 45-degree angle.
Place Arc
Choose the Place Arc command to place an arc or circle of the current line width on the current
sheet. With this command, you can create arcs of varying length and radius and circles of varying
radius. In P-CAD Schematic, arcs are graphical representations only; they carry no net information.
To change the width of an existing arc, choose the Edit Properties command. To change the arc
width for new arcs, choose the Options Current Line command.
Arcs are partial circles. Arcs and circles are constructed counter-clockwise; the click (down) and
release (up) define the start and end point of the arc, therefore a stationary click/release defines a
circle. In this case, the second click and drag moves the center point away from the defined point
on the circumference.
Placing an Arc
To place an arc on the workspace, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Place Arc or click the Place Arc toolbar button.
2.
Move the cursor into the active window to where you want the starting point of the arc.
While you draw an arc, the cursor is displayed as a crosshair shape. When you finish the arc,
the cursor returns to its normal shape.
273
3.
Place Polygon
Click and drag to where you want the end point of the arc to be. Release and the start and end
points are established as a 180-degree arc.
The arc sweeps counterclockwise as you place it. (e.g., left-to-right the arc sweeps up; right-toleft the arc sweeps down, etc.) If the start and end points are the same (i.e., you click and
release without dragging), you create a circle.
4.
After the start and end points are established, click and drag the cursor to define/alter the
center point, thereby increasing or decreasing the sweep angle and radius of the arc.
5.
You can flip the arc (swapping the end points) by pressing F while the arc is still unfinished.
When you release the mouse button, the arc is permanently placed.
6.
To cancel ghosting of an arc, right-click.
Changing Arcs
You use select mode to move, resize, rotate, flip or perform other types of changes to the arc (after
it is placed):
To rotate or flip an arc, select it, and press R to rotate or F to flip while the button is depressed.
To move the arc, click within the selection box (not on the handles) and drag the arc.
To resize, click and move the center handle to change the radius or move the start or end point
to change the sweep angle.
Changing an Arc Center Point

While placing an arc, you can alter the center point before the final placement. After you click,
drag, and release, the arc start and stop points are defined. A second click defines the center point
and the radius. If you click and drag, you can alter the center point of the arc before you release.
To toggle between the arcs beginning and end points, press the F key. For more information,
see Place Arc (page 273).
Place Polygon
Choose the Place Polygon command to place a solid filled polygon on the current sheet. In P-CAD
Schematic, polygons are graphical representations only; they carry no net information.
1.
Choose Place Polygon or click the Place Polygon toolbar button.

While you draw a polygon, the cursor appears as a crosshair. When you finish the polygon, the
cursor returns to its normal shape.
274
2.
Put the cursor at the starting point of where you want your polygon. Click and drag to the
second point and release.
3.
Click and drag to a third point and you have a triangle. Any subsequent polygon points are
connected by a line to the first point you selected, e.g., the fourth point of a polygon is
connected to the first point automatically.
Place Ref Point
4.
When you have established all points for the polygon, right-click or press ESC to finish and fill
the polygon.
Complex polygons are not allowed. A complex polygon is a self-intersecting or self-crossing

polygon. Polygon sides can touch each other but not cross each other.
Draft/Outline Display Mode

Polygons can be drawn and printed as outlines. They are drawn in outline form when the Draft
Mode check box is selected in the Miscellaneous tab of the Options Display dialog. To switch
between draft mode on and off, press the Q key.
Rotate/Flip
To rotate a polygon, select it and press R to rotate the polygon by 90 degrees. To flip a polygon,
select it and press the F key.
Altering the Shape

You can alter the shape (move, add, or delete vertices) by selecting the polygon, then clicking and
dragging one of the handles. When you move one of the handles that lies between two vertices, a
new vertex is created. To delete a vertex, grab and move it to an adjacent vertex and release.
Place Ref Point

Choose the Place Ref Point command to place a reference point on the active sheet. When you
place a reference point, it appears in the 1x grid color set in the Colors tab of the Options Display
dialog. You can also set reference point size in the Miscellaneous tab of Options Display. For more
information, see Options Display (page 297).
When you place a reference point on a symbol, the symbol moves with the cursor at the reference
point. Symbols are flipped and rotated about the reference point. If you are creating a symbol, you
should place a reference point on the symbol object before saving it in a symbol library using the
Library Symbol Save As command explained in Library Symbol Save As (page 326).
Placing a Reference Point

1.
Select Place Ref Point or click the Place Ref Point toolbar button.
2.
Move the cursor to the location on an object or with a collection of objects. Click to place the
reference point; or click, drag and release to place the
3.
You can move a reference point by selecting it and dragging it to a new location.
To cancel placement of a reference point, right-click.
Place Text
Choose the Place Text command to place text on your design using the following basic steps:
275
Place Text
1.
Choose the Place Text command or click the Text Placement toolbar button.
2.
Click the workspace at the location where the text is to be placed.
3.
Type the text you want to place in the design in the Text area of the Place Text dialog.
4.
Click the Place button in the dialog or click the Place Text tool again to commit the text in the
design.
Place Text Dialog

Text entered in the Place Text dialog is instantly displayed at the location in the design where you
clicked the mouse button to begin the place text function. You can change the location of the text
by dragging it to a new location.
The Place Text dialog can be displayed in the expanded version, an intermediate size or minimized
to a one-line display. The display size and location at the time the dialog is closed become the
default settings that are used the next time you enter the Place Text mode.
To open the expanded version of the Place Text dialog, click the More>> button located directly
beneath the scroll bar, on the right side of the Text edit box. To reduce the dialog to the
intermediate size, click the <<Less button, located where the More>> button used to be. To
reinstate the minimized dialog to its previous size, click the Maximize button next to the Minimize
button at the top right corner of the dialog. To reduce the dialog to its minimized size, click the
Minimize button at the top right corner of the dialog.
The minimized version of the dialog appears as shown below:
The intermediate version of the dialog appears as follows:
The expanded version of the dialog appears as follows:
276
Place Text
The Place Text dialog contains the following options:
Text: The Text edit box is where you type the text you want to place in the design. You can also
paste text from the clipboard into the edit box, using CTRL+V. If you want to enter multiple
lines (e.g., a list), you can start new lines in the box by using a carriage return (the ENTER key).
A single text object can have up to 2,000 characters.
Location: If the text has not been placed yet, the Location section displays the X and Y
coordinates of the location of the cursor when the mouse button was released. While placing
the text the coordinates cannot be modified. When you select committed text and choose the
Edit Properties command, the location coordinates can be modified to move the text to a
different area in the design.
Justification: In the Justification box you can specify the text reference point. The reference
point defines the cursor location on text placement, and also the point on which text is rotated
or flipped. The default reference point for text is the lower-left corner of the text block. There
are nine different reference point options.
Flip: The Place Text dialog provides the option to flip the text by checking the Flip box.
Rotate: To rotate the text by 90 degrees, click the Rotate button. Each time you click the Rotate
button the text rotates another 90 degrees. The degree of rotation is displayed next to the
Rotate button.
Text Styles: You can view the default text styles and add, modify and delete a non-default text
style by clicking the Text Styles button to open the Options Text Style dialog. Changes to the
text style appear instantly in the design at the time they are made.
The text style for the selected text or the text being placed can be changed by choosing the
new style from the drop down list in the Text Style edit box. Fonts and font sizes cannot be
mixed within the same text item. Barred text can be inserted in the text item by placing a tilde
(~) on either side of the text you want to bar. Type two consecutive tildes to cause a single tilde
to be displayed. Changes that cause the text to be placed outside the workspace are not
allowed.
See Options Text Style (page 314) for detailed information on adding, modifying, viewing and
deleting text styles.
277
Place Text
Place/Cancel: Commit the text to the current location in the workspace by clicking the Place
button or the Place Text button on the Placement toolbar.
To cancel the text placement dialog and remove the temporary text from the design, click the
Cancel button or press the ESC key. The Text tool is still active, but the dialog disappears from view.
Whenever you are typing, flipping or rotating text, and zooming or panning the workspace, the
dialog remains on the screen. At the time the text is committed to the design by clicking the Place
button on the dialog, choosing the Place Text command or clicking the Place Text button on the
Placement toolbar, the dialog disappears from the screen. The Place Text tool remains active so that
you can click the workspace to indicate the location for the next text item, display the dialog again
and place more text.
Place Text Features

The Place Text tool provides additional features that enhance the basic placement functionality and
make placing the text easier and more accurate. This section describes how to rotate, flip, zoom
and pan text during or after placement.
Rotating Text
You can rotate text during placement. Click and hold the left mouse button on the text, then press
R or click the Rotate button. This rotates the text by 90 degrees. The text moves about its reference
point, but always reads from left to right.
To rotate text after it has been placed, select it and press R to rotate while the left mouse button is
depressed or choose the Edit Properties command to open the Text Properties dialog where you
can click the Rotate button.
Attributes, text, and fields share the same rotation memory. In other words, if you place and rotate
text at 90 degrees, then immediately place a field, the fields text will be placed at a 90-degree angle.
Click again in the box in the Place Text dialog to continue typing new text.
Flipping Text
You can flip text as you are placing. If you change focus from the dialog to the workspace, click and
hold the left mouse button on the box, and then press the F key. While in the dialog you can flip
the text by checking the Flip box.
The F key and Flip check box functions flip the text 180 degrees to the right or left of the original
location. The text moves about its reference point, but always reads from left to right.
To flip text after it has been placed, select it and then press F to flip, or choose the Edit Properties
command to open the Text Properties dialog and select the Flip check box.
Zooming and Panning While Placing Text

The Place Text dialog remains on the screen while you zoom or pan the workspace.
Click the workspace to assure that the focus is in the workspace before choosing any of the zoom
commands. To zoom in or out of the workspace while placing text press the Plus (+) and Minus (-)
278
Place Attribute
keys, the View Zoom In and View Zoom Out commands or click the Zoom Window button on
the Command toolbar.
The workspace can be panned by moving the scroll bars up, down, right and left, or by pressing
one of the arrow keys.
Place Attribute
Choose the Place Attribute command to place an attribute according to the Name and Value
options you select in the dialog. This command allows you to place an attribute within a collection
of objects comprising a symbol or part.
The predefined Names are: Filename, Name, Part Number, RefDes, Type and Value.
The Value box specifies the attribute definition, e.g., the actual filename rather than just the
placeholder {Filename}.
Placing an Attribute
To place an attribute, follow these steps
1.
Choose Place Attribute or click the Place Attribute toolbar button.
2.
Click the workspace to open the dialog:
3.
Choose an attribute category from the Attribute Category list.
4.
All pre-defined attributes for the category appear in the Name list. To place a predefined
attribute, select an attribute from the Name list.
5.
To place a user-defined attribute, select user-defined from the Name list. Type an attribute
name in the Name edit box.
279
Place Field
6.
Type a value for the attribute in the Value edit box.
7.
Set attribute properties. See Attribute Properties (page 228) for more information.
8.
Click OK.
9.
Move the cursor into the workspace and click, drag and place the attribute. Before you release
the mouse button to place it, you can move, rotate, or flip the placement box (see the
following section).
Rotate/Flip
To rotate or flip an attribute after it has been placed, select it and press R to rotate or F to flip while
it is selected.
The R key rotation is 90 degrees.
You can rotate or flip an attribute as you are placing it. For rotation, the angle that is the result of
the rotation applies to the next attribute you place. For example, you are placing an attribute, and
you rotate it 90 degrees before you finish it. Then you place another attribute; it is placed at the
same 90-degree angle without any rotation action. You can place multiple attributes at the same
angle by rotating the first attribute as you place it.
text at 90 degrees, then immediately place an attribute, that attribute will be placed at a 90-degree
angle. This rotation memory derives only from rotation action during placement, not from select
and rotate actions that take place after object placement.
If you don't specify a value for an attribute, the attribute key name will be displayed in brackets,
e.g., {Type}. See File Design Info (page 183) for information on design-level attributes.
Place Field
Choose the Place Field command to place a field containing design information such as date,
time, author, etc.
The information that appears when you place certain fields is determined by what you specify in
the Field tab of the File Design Info dialog. You can place a field from a selection of predefined
field types including: Approved By, Author, Checked By, Company Name, Current Date, Current
Time, Date, Drawing Number, Drawn By, Engineer, Filename, Modified Date, Note, Number of
Sheets, Revision, Revision Note, Sheet Name, Sheet Number, Time, and Title.
You can also define and place additional fields using File Design Info. For instructions on adding a
user-defined field, see File Commands (page 169).
Current date and current time are taken from the computer's clock. If you just select date then you
must specify the date in the File Design Info dialog. The same is true for time (as opposed to
current time).
The value of a field placed in the design, with the exception of Current Date/Time, Filename and
Modified Date, must be specified in the Field Properties dialog, otherwise you place a generic field,
e.g., {Author} rather than W. Shakespeare. To open the Field Properties dialog, choose the File
280
Place Field
Design Info command and click the Properties button in the Fields tab. Or, select a field in your
design, right-click, then choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Fields are handy for use within title blocks.
Placing a Field
1.
Choose Place Field and click the workspace. A dialog appears with a list box containing field
types.
2.
From the Name list box, select what kind of field you want to place. Click OK.
3.
Move the cursor to where you want to place the field; click to place it. If you click again, the
Place Field dialog will be displayed so that you can choose another type of field for placement.
4.
You can rotate or flip a field as you are placing it. See the following section for more details.
To cancel before a field is placed, right-click.
Rotate/Flip
To rotate a field, select it and press R to rotate the field by 90 degrees. To flip a field, select it and
press F.
You can rotate or flip a field as you are placing it. For rotation, the angle that is the result of the
rotation will apply to the next field you place. For example, you are placing a field and you rotate it
90 degrees before you finish it. When you place another field; it is placed at the same 90-degree
angle without any rotation action. If you decide to rotate the second field, it is incremented 90
degrees more, resulting in a 180-degree angle. Therefore, you can place multiple fields at the same
angle but only have to perform the rotation action on the first field.
text at 90 degrees, then immediately place a field, that attribute is placed at a 90-degree angle. This
rotation memory derives only from rotation action during placement, not from select and rotate
actions that take place after object placement.
281
Place IEEE Symbol
Place IEEE Symbol

Choose the Place IEEE Symbol command to place an IEEE symbol in the design. Once placed, an
IEEE symbol cannot be modified. It must be deleted and replaced with a new symbol. You can place
the following symbols:
Adder
Amplifier
Astable
Complex
Generator
Hysteresis
Multiplier
Placing a IEEE Symbol
282
1.
Choose Place IEEE Symbol or click the corresponding toolbar button.
2.
Click the active window. A dialog appears listing the IEEE symbol types.
Place IEEE Symbol
3.
From the Symbol Type group, select the kind of IEEE symbol you want to place. You may also
change the height of the symbol.
4.
Click OK to close the Place IEEE Symbol dialog.
5.
Move the cursor in the active window to where you want to place the IEEE symbol; click to
place it. If you click again, the Place IEEE Symbol dialog appears so that you can choose another
type of IEEE symbol for placement.
To cancel before an IEEE symbol is placed, right-click.
283
CHAPTER
16
Rewire Commands
Using the Rewire Command
There is a single Rewire command in P-CAD Schematic, Rewire Manual.
Rewire Manual
Choose the Rewire Manual command to reroute wire segments quickly and easily. This lets you
make room for other objects, or to make aesthetic enhancements to a design. The Rewire
Manual command maintains the width of the wire.
Using the Rewire Manual Command

To enter rewire mode:
1.
Choose the Rewire Manual command or click the Rewire Manual toolbar button.
2.
Point to the wire segment you want to change.
3.
Click the segment at the location where you would like to begin rerouting, then move the
cursor to a new location and click to complete the new segment. Each click in a new location
adds a new wire segment.
Press the BACKSPACE key to undo the last rewired segment. After the current rewire session is
ended, the entire session is undoable.
285
CHAPTER
17
Options Commands
Using the Options Commands
Use the commands in the Options menu to change various settings that affect a number of P-CAD
Schematic actions such as block selection criteria (selection mask), default units (mm, mils, or in),
grid settings, object display colors, and object styles.
Options Block Selection

Choose Options Block Selection to open the Options Block Selection dialog. You use the options
in this dialog, to set block selection criteria that affects the selection of specific objects when you
are in Select mode, as shown in the following figure:
287
Chapter 17: Options Commands
Select Mode Frame

The Select Mode frame contains the following radio buttons:
Inside Block. This option is selected by default. Choose this button to select items within the
selection block, according to the selection criteria you establish in this dialog.
Outside Block. Choose this button to select items outside the selection block. All of the
selection criteria that you specify in the Options Block Selection dialog functions outside the
block rather than inside.
Touching Block. Choose this button to select all items inside or touching the selection block.
This is a more inclusive selection option than Inside Block.
Items Frame
In the Items frame, you specify all of the objects listed in the dialog individually determining
whether or not they are included in a block select. If you want to include only one or two items in
your selection, click Clear All to clear all check boxes, then select individual check boxes to enable
specific items. If you want to exclude only one or two items in your selection, click Set All to select
all check boxes (if they are not already enabled), then individually clear the check boxes you want
to exclude.
Selection Mask Dialogs

Some check boxes in the Items frame have corresponding command buttons (e.g., Line, Part, Pin).
These check boxes have three states:
288
included (selected).
excluded (cleared).
masked (shaded).
This feature allows you to narrow your selection further by setting specific properties as selection
criteria for any item with a corresponding button. To access these property masks, click the
check box until a shaded check mark appears. For example, the Line button becomes available
when a shaded check mark appears in the Line check box, as shown in the following figure.
Then, click a button to open the corresponding dialog. For example, click the Line button to open
the following Line Selection Mask dialog:
With the Selection Mask dialog, you can specify parameters for the particular object that you want
as part of the selection mask or screening process. In the above example, if you specify a thin, solid
line, your block selections will only select thin, solid lines.
289
Selection Mask Parameters

This is a basic summary of the parameters you can work with in the Selection Mask dialogs. Refer to
Edit Properties (page 211) for detailed information about a specific objects properties.
Line
For Line, you can specify line width and style. For details, see the illustration on the previous page.
Part
For Part, you can specify reference designator, value, type, and attributes, as shown in the following
dialog:
Pin
For Pin, you can specify Length, Display Characteristics, Display, and Pin Number for a block select,
as shown in the following dialog:
290
Port
When the No Port Change check box is selected, you can select the Nets tab to specify Net Name.
When the No Port Change check box is cleared, you can specify Pin Count, Pin Length, Pin
Orientation, Port Shape, and Net Name, as shown in the following dialog:
291
Options Configure
Text
For Text, you can specify a specific text string, Text Styles, and Justification, as shown in the
following dialog:
Wire
For Wire, you can specify a Width, as shown in the following dialog:
Related Topics
For more information on using the Selection Mask dialogs, see Edit Properties (page 211).
For information about block selection, refer to Edit Select (page 247).
Options Configure
Choose the Options Configure command to open the Options Configure dialog. Use this dialog
to set many of the Schematic parameters. Some of these parameters affect all open designs, and
some affect only the active design.
292
Options Configure
Workspace Size
Use the controls in this frame to set the size of the current design to one of five, standard imperial
sizes (A-E) or five standard metric sizes (A4-A0). Choose the User radio button to create a custom
workspace size by providing values for Width and Height. The minimum size for both Width and
Height is 1 inch; the maximum is 60 inches.
Title Sheets
The Edit Title Sheets button allows you to specify global and individual title sheet attributes. See
Title Sheets, (page 98) for information on how to define and modify your title sheets.
Units
Allows you to alter your display units between mils, millimeters, and inches. Dimensions are not
altered, only the display of measurements are updated. A mil equals 0.001 inch or .0254 mm. A mm
equals 0.001 meter. When the selected unit is mm, you can control the number of digits displayed
to the right of the decimal point by modifying the MillimeterPrecision setting in the .ini file. The
default displayed precision is three decimal digits, but can be changed to an integer value of 2
through 5.
293
Options Configure
This setting will affect all dialogs, reports, status line displays, etc. containing measurements. For
example, setting Units to mm causes all dialogs to display measurements in millimeters. These units
can be overridden in many command settings.
Orthogonal Modes
Orthogonal modes are for use while placing wires, buses and lines, using segments that are
horizontal, vertical, and at 45-degree angles.
Press the O key to switch between the enabled modes. You can enable or disable the orthogonal
modes in the Options Configure dialog. The non-orthogonal mode, with straight-line placement at
any angle, is always enabled.
between the mode pair of the current mode.
90/90 Line-Line creates true 90-degree angles, long and short.
45/90 Line-Line creates 45/90 and 90/45 angles.
Refer to the Place Wire (page 263), Place Bus (page 265), and Place Line (page 272) for more details
about the orthogonal modes.
Net Increment
The Net Increment frame contains an Increment Value edit box. The Increment Value edit box lets
you specify the step value for incrementing net names: a negative value causes the name to
decrement instead of increment, and a zero value disables the copy increment feature. CTRL/Drag
Copy and Edit Copy Matrix are the commands that use this increment value.
ECOs
Engineering Change Orders (ECOs) are recorded when you choose the Utils Record ECOs
command. From the Options Configure dialog, you can select a format for the ECO files. This
setting applies to the active design.
The ECO file is generated in an ECO format or a Was/Is format, which is compatible with Tango
Series II. Click either the ECO Format or the Was/Is Format radio button to select a format:
ECO format records full ECOs.
The Was/Is format records only Was/Is ECOs. It keeps track of RefDes changes only and
generates a file that is compatible with Tango Series II.
AutoSave
Use the controls in the AutoSave frame to enable the AutoSave feature, which regularly saves your
files at a user-defined interval in a compressed or non-compressed format. AutoSave wont be
performed during autorouting or if a tool is busy.
The following options are available:
294
Enable AutoSave: Select this check box to turn on the AutoSave feature.
Options Grids
AutoSave Time Interval: Enter the time between saves. AutoSave uses a rolling backup to save
files, incrementing each subsequent autosave file.
Purge Previous Backups: When enabled, the option causes all backups saved from the
previous design session to be deleted when you begin a new design session.
Number of Backup Files: Allow you to specify the number of design files to be archived before
file names are reused. This must be a number between 1 and 99.
Compress AutoSave Files: Compresses the file so that is uses less space when saved.
File Viewer
Enter a value in this text box to define the viewer to be used for viewing reports, log files, error
reports, etc. Enter the application name (e.g., Notepad). If the application is in a directory that is not
included in your Autoexec.bat path statement, include the complete pathname here.
Zoom Factor
Enter a value in this text box to adjust the amount of zoom that occurs when you choose the View
Zoom In or View Zoom Out command. A factor of 2.00 doubles (or halves) the size of objects in
the Workspace, etc. Zoom factors must be greater than 1.00.
Autopan
Allows you to adjust the amount of autopanning that occurs when you move the cursor to the edge
of the screen with the arrow keys. An autopan of 25 moves anything at the edge of the screen 25%
nearer to the center of the screen; 50 moves fringe objects to the center.
Compress Binary Designs

Select the Compress Binary Designs check box to enable the automatic compression of binary files
whenever those files are saved.
DDE Hotlinks
If selected, this check box enables exchange of hotlink data with P-CAD PCB. Hotlink data consists
of highlighting and unhighlighting commands for parts and nets. The state of the DDE Hotlinks
option is saved in the Sch.ini file.
Options Grids
Choose the Options Grids command to define various properties for your grids. Grid values are
stored with each, individual design file. When you choose the Options Grids command, the
following dialog appears:
295
Options Grids
The grid units used are determined by the Units setting in Options Configure.
Grid Spacing
Use the controls in the Relative Grid Origin frame to select appropriate values for grid spacing for
specific modes in the Grids list box. You are not limited to using the grids in the list box; you can
specify your own custom grid spacing in the Grid Spacing box, then click Add to add it to available
choices in the Grids list box. To delete a grid-spacing value, highlight it in the Grids list box and
click Delete.
Grid Toggle Buttons

The Status Line Grid Toggle button and the Grid combo box, allow you to easily switch between
grid settings and add new grid settings. The toggle switches between absolute grid (Abs, with white
background) and relative grid (Rel, with colored background). Your absolute and relative grid
values can be changed from the combo box. The A key toggles between absolute and relative grids.
If you use the Grid Toggle button to switch to Relative, you are prompted for the origin point if you
have the Prompt for Origin option enabled in Options Grids. The cursor takes the shape of a
crosshair cursor while the system is awaiting input; when you click in the active window, that
becomes the relative origin point (X=0, Y=0) and the cursor returns to normal.
Visible Grid Style

The Visible Grid Style check box allows you to either show or hide grids. When you select the
check box, two grid style options are available. Dotted pinpoints grid points, while Hatched draws
lines along the grids to show grid intersections (like graph paper).
Relative Grid Origin

Use the controls in the Relative Grid Origin frame to specify your X and Y relative grid origins by
entering the coordinates. You must have the Prompt for Origin option disabled for it to work.
If you switch to Relative grid in the dialog and the Prompt for Origin check box is selected, you are
prompted for the new origin point after you click OK. You are prompted every time you switch
between Absolute to Relative grids by clicking the Grid Toggle button or by pressing the G key.
296
Options Display
Mode
In the Mode frame, choose the Absolute radio button when you want the grid origin point to be
the lower- left corner of the Workspace. You can choose the Relative radio button to allow any
point as an origin point.
Options Display
Choose the Options Display command to open the Options Display dialog. There are two tabs in
this dialog: Color and Miscellaneous. Use these tabs to define your workspace preferences.
Colors
This tab contains four frames and a Defaults button. Click the Defaults button to return your
display setup to the default scheme.
Any color settings established here are saved in your Sch.ini file when you close the dialog.
These settings affect your designs in subsequent sessions, until you change them.
The following sections describe how to use the controls in these frames:
If you have a color printer, clicking the Defaults button also restores default color settings for
printing.
Item Colors
Display Colors
297
Junction Size
Bus Connection Mode
Options Display
Item Colors
To select a color for an item, click the corresponding button in this frame. When you do, a color
palette appears. Choose a color from the palette by clicking the appropriate button. The palette
closes automatically.
You can also set a custom color. To close the color palette without choosing a color, press ESC or
click the Close button.
Setting A Custom Color

To set a custom color, click the Custom button in the palette to open the Color dialog. Then,
choose a color from this dialog using one of these methods:
Method 1: Select a Defined Custom Color
1.
Click one the colors in the Basic Colors frame.
2.
Click OK to return to the color palette.
Method 2: Define a Custom Color
1.
Click the color matrix to define the Red/Green/Blue settings, or type the desired settings in the
Red/ Green/Blue boxes.
2.
Click the Add to Custom Colors button.
3.
When the selected color appears in the Custom Colors section, click OK to return to the color
palette.
Some custom colors are displayed only when supported by your video display settings. If your
video display supports 256 Colors, custom colors are approximated to the nearest solid color, while
retaining the Red/Green/Blue settings. If your video display supports more than 256 colors, custom
colors display accurately.
Once custom colors are selected, they appear as the chosen item or display color on the Options
Display dialog or the Printer Colors dialog. These colors are saved in the .ini file for use in later
design sessions. In the Custom Colors section of the color palette, however, colors not selected for
an item/display color are forgotten once the P-CAD application is exited.
Display Colors
In the Display Colors frame, there are several command buttons. Click one of these buttons to
determine various Schematic display colors. The settings configured with these buttons appear in
your workspace, regardless of layer or item colors.
When setting your display colors, make sure that the colors you pick do not conflict with any layer
or item colors. For example, if the background color is set to be the same as the line color, lines will
not be visible in your design.
298
Options Display
Junction Size
To set a size for junctions, choose one of the following radio buttons in the Junction Size frame:
Small. When you choose this option, the junction size appears in the Size box.
Large. When you choose this option, the junction size appears in the Size box.
User. When you choose this option, you can type a value in the Size box. Your entry can be in
inches, centimeters, etc., as long as the value is between 0 - 10 mm.
Bus Connection Mode

Click one of these buttons to determine the bus connection mode:
In a design session, bus connections form automatically when you connect a wire to a bus. For
more information, see Place Bus (page 265).
Miscellaneous
To set up other display options for your workspace, click the Miscellaneous tab in the Options
Display dialog. As shown in the following figure, this tab contains a number of options:
299
Options Display
ERC Errors
In the ERC Errors frame, you have these options:
Show: Choose this button to show ERC errors in the workspace.
Hide: Choose this button to hide the display of ERC errors in the workspace.
No Change: Choose this button to keep the current display setting.

See Annotating Sheet Connectors, (page 108) for details on how to define sheet connector crossreferencing.
Cursor Style
To change the style of your cursor, choose from an arrow, small cross or large cross.
The large cross style stretches horizontally and vertically to the edges of the Schematic window.
The Large Cross cursor style does not support the DataTips feature. Enabling the Large Cross cursor
clears the Show DataTips check box and makes the feature unavailable.
Miscellaneous
The Miscellaneous frame contains a number of check boxes. To enable an option, select its check
box. Clear a check box to disable an option.
Draft Mode: Select this check box to show these two items in your design: (1) a thin, singlepixel outline for pads, vias, and text. (2) a segmented and outlined representation of arcs, lines,
and any line segment objects such as, polygons, cutouts, etc. Draft mode improves redraw
speed and helps you view segment overlaps.
Thin Stroked Text: Select this check box to show text in thin line mode. Clear this check box to
display text in regular mode.
You can use the draft mode shortcut key to switch between draft and non-draft display modes.
Based on the combination of options enabled (e.g., Draft Mode and Thin Stroked Text), the
current selection is retained and used to produce a comparable, opposite display when the
draft mode shortcut key is pressed. For instance, if you begin with both Draft Mode and Thin
Stroked Text enabled, and you switch to non-draft mode, the display produced is normal
figures and regular text.
300
Display Open Ends: Select this check box to show open ends on unconnected pins and wires.
Open ends appear as open squares, and no longer appear when a positive connection is made.
Display Part Gate Number: Select this check box to show a parts reference designator gate
number. You can also use the Print Options dialog to show or hide the gate number in your
hardcopy. The options are independent of each other, so you can show the gate number on
screen for editing, but hide it from your hardcopy at the same time.
Options Preferences
Drag by Outline: Clear this check box to show a ghosted image of the part and a bounding
outline when you move or copy objects in your design. Select this check box to show only the
bounding outline. This setting affects only the move and copy operations associated with the
Edit Select command.
Display Overridden Errors: Select this check box to show overridden ERC error indicators.
Clear the check box to hide overridden errors.
Display Default PinDes: Select this check box to show the default pin designator for free pins.
Clear this check box to display only pin numbers.
Scroll Bar: Select this check box to show scroll bars in the active window. Clear this box to hide
the scroll bars.
Show DataTips: Select this check box to show DataTips in the active window. Clear the check
box to hide the display of DataTips in the active window.
The Large Cross cursor style and the View Snap to Grid command do not support the DataTips
feature. For details, see Cursor Style (page 300) and View Snap to Grid (page 257).
Options Preferences
Choose the Options Preferences command to define keyboard, mouse, and toolbar preferences
used to set up the application. When you choose this command, the following dialog appears with
the Keyboard tab selected:
301
Options Preferences
Keyboard Tab
The Keyboard tab lets you customize key assignments for menu commands, shortcut key
commands, and macros.
Command Type (check box): Choose the type of command for which you want to change
shortcut key assignments.
Menu Commands/Shortcut Commands/Macros (list box): Select the command or macro you
want to add a shortcut key assignment to or from which you want to remove a shortcut key
assignment.
Current Keys (text box): Displays the existing key assignments for the command or macro you
select in the Menu Commands/Shortcut Commands/Macros box.
Press a Shortcut Key (text box): Press the keys you want to assign to the selected command or
macro. You can press the CTRL or SHIFT key plus any other combination of numeric or
alphabetic keys and function keys.
If the shortcut is currently assigned, the current assignment appears in the Current Binding
field just below this box.
Assign (button): Assigns the key appearing in the Press a Shortcut Key box to the selected
command or macro. If the shortcut is currently assigned, the current assignment disappears.
Remove (button): Removes the key you select in the Current Keys box.
Key File (button): Allows you to select a key binding file to use with this application. When the
Select Key File dialog appears, select the file you want to use. The current key file appears at
the top of the dialo0
Defaults (button): Restores original default key assignments to all commands or macros.
Mouse Tab
When you select the Mouse tab the Options Preference dialog appears as follows:
302
Options Design Rules
The Mouse tab lets you customize certain mouse behaviors.
CTRL/SHIFT Behavior: Allows you to choose which keys to use (CTRL or SHIFT) for multiple
(extended) selections and which to use for Sub Selections.
Cycle-Picking Threshold: The number of pixels you can move the mouse during cycle-picking.
Double-Click Displays Properties: When enabled, this option allows you to double-click an
object to bring up the Properties dialog for that object.

When you choose the Options Design Rules command, the Options Design Rules dialog appears.
Design Tab
The Design tab shows global clearance rules that are applied to the entire design.
303
Clearance Rules
When a clearance rule for a specific object is requested (e.g., DRC), the design rules category is
searched in the following order of priority:
Class to class rules (highest priority).
Net rules.
Net class rules.
Global rules (lowest priority).
Within each category, the clearance rules are searched in the following order of priority:
Object pair clearance rules (e.g., Pad to Line clearance).
Clearance rules.
The order of evaluation matches the order of evaluation used by the CCT SPECTRA Router. P-CAD
PRO Route uses only global clearance rules.
Net Class Tab

Use the Net Class tab to specify clearance rules for pads, vias, lines, and object pairs (such as pad to
pad or line to via). The dialog lists all net classes, indicates the presence of rules in the Rules list,
and shows the rules and their values in the Net Class Rules list box, as shown in the following
figure:
304
When an attribute exists for multiple Net Classes, and the value of the attribute is different for each
Net Class, the Net Class Rules list shows the attribute and indicates the value as mixed when you
select more than one Net Class.
Click the Select Net Class by Rule button to display the Set By Attribute dialog, shown in the
following figure, where you can choose the attribute(s) you want to use to select the Net Classes.
Selecting an attribute from the list box allows you to find all net classes containing that attribute,
regardless of the attribute value.
If you select an attribute from the Name=Value list box and click OK, you are returned to the
Options Design Rules dialog where all net classes that have the selected attribute defined are
highlighted in the Net Class list box.
305
To find net classes with attributes having a specific value, select an attribute from the Name=Value
list box and click the Change Value button to display the Change Value Attribute dialog, shown in
the following figure.
The Change Attribute Value dialog lists all values assigned to the selected attribute and also
includes the option to select {Any Value}. Select the desired Value and click OK to return to the Set
By Attribute dialog.
To set all of the attributes, click the Set All button. To clear the selected attributes, click the Clear
All button. Choose the Clear Current Items check box if you want to remove previously selected
items each time you modify your selection criteria.
If you select multiple attribute names and values in the Name=Value list box, only those nets with
all of the selected attribute names and values are highlighted when you return to the Options
Design Rules dialog.
To make changes to the Net Classes, click the Edit Net Classes button to display the Net Classes
dialog:
306
In the Net Classes dialog you can define a group of nets that share common rules. Collections of
nets sharing the same rules are known as a Net Class. For more information on using the Net
Classes dialog, see Options Net Classes (page 309).
Click the View Rules button to see the rules in the Notepad as shown in the following figure:
To modify the rules click the Edit Rules button to display the Attributes dialog.
Net Tab
When you click the Net tab, the Options Design Rules dialog appears as shown in the following
figure:
The Net tab allows you to specify clearance rules for a specific net in the design. The dialog lists all
nets, indicates the presence of rules and shows the rules associated with the net you select from
the Nets list box.
Click the Select Net by Rule button to display the Set By Attribute dialog where you can choose the
attribute(s) you want to use to select the Net. The Set By Attribute dialog is explained in Net Class
Tab (page 304).
307
To modify the nets in the design, click the Edit Nets button to display the Edit Nets dialog.
Complete information on the Edit Nets dialog is found in Edit Nets (page 240).
Click the View Rules button to see the rules in the Notepad format.
To add, delete or edit rules, click the Edit Rules button to access the Attributes dialog.
Class to Class Tab

When you click the Class to Class tab, the dialog appears as follows:
The Class to Class tab allows you to specify clearance rules between nets grouped into a Net Class.
The dialog lists all class to class definitions and the rules associated with each.
Click the Select Class to Class By Rule button to display the Set By Attribute dialog, where you can
choose the attribute(s) you want to use to select the Class to Classes. The Set By Attribute dialog is
explained in Net Class Tab (page 304).
Click the View Rules button to see the rules in the Notepad format.
To create a new Class to Class definition or modify an existing Class to Class, click the Edit Class to
Class button to display the Edit Class to Class Definition dialog shown in the following figure:
308
Options Net Classes
To create a Class to Class definition, select Net Classes from the two Net Class name list boxes, and
click Add Definition. Once created, the Class to Class definition can be modified or deleted by
clicking the Modify Definition or Delete Definition buttons. Rules associated with the Class to Class
definition appear in the Class to Class Rules list box.
To add, delete or modify rules, click the Edit Rules button to access the Attributes dialog.
Options Net Classes

Choose the Options Net Classes command to define a group of nets that share common rules.
Collections of nets sharing the same rules are referred to as a net class. When you choose this
command, the Net Classes dialog appears:
309
Options Net Classes
This class editor allows you to create named net classes using pre-defined clearance rules or predefined SPECCTRA autorouter clearance rules and then assign nets to that class. You can also add
user-defined attributes to the net classes for your own use.
Net classes are transferred from the Schematic design to PCB via the P-CAD format netlist or
through ECOs. PCB Design Rules Checking verifies clearances and the attributes listed below
when they have been defined in the net class:
MaxNetLength
MaxVias
MinNetLength
ViaStyle
Width
For net clearances the rules can be further refined by specifying clearance rules for pairs of objects,
like pad to pad clearances or line to via clearances.
The net class information is written to binary and ASCII design files. P-CAD Master Designer PCB
does not support Net Classes so this information is lost when exporting a P-CAD design to P-CAD
format.
To create named net classes, follow these steps:
1.
Enter a class name in the Classes box.
2.
Click Add.
3.
To include a net from the Unassigned Nets area to the new net class, you may use any of the
following methods:
4.
Select a single net and click the Add button.
Double click on a net to move it from Unassigned to Nets in this Class and vice versa.
Select multiple nets in a block by either 1) holding the SHIFT key while selecting the first
and last nets in the block or, 2) select the first net in the list, hold the left mouse button
and drag the cursor to the last net in the list and release. Then click Add.
Select individual nets by holding the CTRL key while clicking on each net, then click Add.
To remove a net from the Nets in this Class area, use the same methods detailed above, but
click the Remove button instead of the Add button.
In addition to the normal selection process you may use the Set Nets From Design Selection
buttons to quickly place all currently selected nets in the design into either the Unassigned
Nets or Nets in this Class areas. When no nets are selected in the design, the inactive Set Nets
From Design Selection buttons are gray. If nets in either area are selected and you click the Set
Nets From Design Selection button, the other selected nets become unselected.
310
Options Sheets
5.
Use the Edit Attributes button to assign one or more attributes to this new net class. Refer to
Edit Nets (page 240) for details.
Options Sheets
Choose the Options Sheets command to switch to a different sheet by defining the current sheet.
You may also add, delete, reorder and change the name of any sheet in a design.
With P-CAD Document Toolbox, the Options Sheets dialog is enhanced to include a Titles tab. On
this tab you can specify independent borders, zone divisions, and title blocks.
Sheets
In the Sheets box are listed all sheets, excluding the title sheet, defined for the design. The current
sheet has an asterisk next to it.
Buttons
The Add button adds a sheet to the list using the Sheet Name you have specified. The specified
sheet name must be unique.
311
Options Current Wire
The Modify button allows you to change a sheet name. Choose a sheet name from the list, make
the desired changes in the Sheet Name box and click Modify.
The Delete button deletes the selected sheet. You can delete any empty, non-current sheet.
The Current button makes the selected sheet the current sheet, indicated by the asterisk. This
sheet then appears in your display.
The Move Up button positions the selected sheet one step above its current location in the list. The
first sheet on the list can only be moved down in the list. When the first sheet is selected the Move
Up button is grayed and unavailable
The Move Down button positions the selected sheet one step below its current location in the list.
The last sheet on the list can only be moved up in the list. When the last sheet is selected the Move
Down button is grayed and unavailable.
Whenever a sheet is moved up or down, the sheet number changes to indicate its new position in
the list and is reflected across the application wherever the sheet number appears.
Adding a Sheet
When you add (create) a sheet, you must give it a unique name. Schematic assigns Sheet Numbers
sequentially, using the next available number.
To add a sheet, follow these steps:
1.
In the Options Sheets dialog, type the new sheet name in the Sheet Name box.
2.
Click Add. The new sheet name is listed in the list box with the sheet number automatically
specified.
Once a sheet has been created/added, the sheet number displayed represents the order in which it
appears in the list. If the sheet is moved up or down to a different position in the list the sheet
number is adjusted accordingly.
Options Current Wire

Choose the Options Current Wire command to set the current wire width for the Place Wire
command. When you choose this command, the Options Current Wire dialog appears. In this
dialog, select a wire width and click OK.
312
Options Current Line
Wire Width options are:
Thick wires are 15 mils.
Thin wires are 10 mils.
User defined wires can range from 0.1 to 100 mils. To maintain the appearance of P-CAD
Schematic designs before V13.0, all wires less than 11mils wide are displayed as 1 pixel. The
current wire settings are saved to the Sch.ini file.
To change the wire width of existing wires, choose the Edit Properties command.
Options Current Line

Choose the Options Current Line command to set the current line width and style for the Place
Line and Place Arc commands. Select a line style and width and click OK.
Thick and user-defined lines are always solid. Thin lines can be solid, dashed or dotted. Arcs are
always solid, but can be thick or thin. The current line settings are saved to the Sch.ini file.
You can also change the current line width using the line width combo box on the status line.
To change the line width (thickness) of existing lines and arcs, choose the Edit Properties
command.
313
Options Text Style
Options Text Style

Choose the Options Text Style command to set the current text style for the Place Text
command. This command also allows you to add, delete, rename, or edit text styles by using the
series of available dialogs. The text styles you create or edit here are available when you enable the
Place Text command, or when you want to modify already placed text with the Edit Properties
command.
The Default and DefaultTTF styles cannot be deleted, renamed, or modified. The other default
styles (PinStyle, PartStyle, WireStyle and PortStyle) can be modified, but not deleted or renamed.
You can base a new text style on any of the default styles.
Choose Options Text Style to open the following dialog:
Add a Text Style
314
1.
To add a text style, follow these steps:
2.
In the Options Text Style dialog, click Add. The Add Text Style dialog appears:
3.
Select the style of text from the Based On list box.
Options Text Style
4.
Enter the text style name you are adding (e.g., Bus style).
5.
Click OK and the Text Style Properties dialog appears. For a picture of this dialog, see Text Style
Properties (page 315).
Delete a Text Style

To delete a text style:
1.
Highlight the non-default text style you want to delete.
2.
Click Delete. A message appears asking you to confirm your deletion.
3.
Click Yes, and the selected text style disappears from the list.
You cannot delete default text styles or a text style that is currently in use.
Rename a Text Style

To rename a text style:
1.
Select the non-default text style you want to rename.
2.
Click Rename. In the Rename Style box, the existing style name appears.
3.
Type over the existing style name to specify the name of the new text style.
4.
Click OK to return to the Options Text Style dialog.
Text Style Properties

The Text Style Properties dialog lets you add and modify font properties of the selected (nondefault) text styles. You cannot change the properties of Default text style; you can only query it.
To query and edit text style properties:
1.
Select a text style from the Current Text Style list.
2.
Click Properties and the Text Style Properties dialog appears (shown below).
3.
From this dialog, you can modify the Height, Thickness, and Font fields for non-default fonts.
As shown below, the Text Style Properties dialog appears when you click the OK button in the
Options Add Text Style dialog or the Properties button in the Options Text Style dialog:
315
Options Text Style
The stroke font text style is automatically assigned to text in a Schematic design. You may change
the Height, Thickness and Font properties of the stroke font in the Stroke Font Properties area. In
addition, when the Allow TrueType box is enabled, you may choose the Font, Font Style and Size
for the selected styles corresponding TrueType representation using the standard Font dialog.
Stroke Font Properties

You can set the following Stroke Font Properties.
Height: The fonts height.
Thickness: The text thickness.
Font: Choose between QUALITY, BASIC, or LCOM fonts. QUALITY and BASIC fonts are
interchangeable. BASIC is simpler and therefore draws faster. LCOM is a serif font (a little
fancier).
TrueType Font Properties

When the Allow True Type check box is selected, you can change the font type, size and style of the
texts TrueType representation.
316
Options Text Style
The TrueType Font Properties frame, shown in the previous figure, displays this information:
Font: The TrueType font name.
Font Style: The font style (E.g., Regular, Bold, etc.)
Italic: An X indicates an italic font style.
Size: The font size in mils or mms depending on what you have set in the Options Configure
dialog.
To change TrueType font properties, click the Font button.

Click the OK button to apply your selection and return to the Text Style Properties dialog.
Display Area
If you have enabled the Allow TrueType option in the Text Style Properties dialog, you may choose
to display the text in either Stroke Font or TrueType Font by clicking the appropriate button.
Click OK to return to the Options Text Style dialog.
Display Stroke and Display TrueType Buttons

Whenever a text style has had its Allow TrueType option enabled, you can quickly change its
display mode by clicking the Display Stroke or Display TrueType button in the Options Text Style
dialog. This changes the selection in the Display area of the Text Style Properties dialog without
having to go into the dialog and make a new selection.
317
CHAPTER
18
Library Commands
Using the Library Commands
With the Library commands, you can create new libraries, create item aliases, copy items from one
library to another, delete library items, rename library items, open libraries for access, save symbols
that you use to create a component libraries, and create an archive library.
P-CAD libraries are a combination of components, Schematic symbols and PCB patterns (not used
by Schematic). The component section of a library contains component information, such as what
symbol is attached to a particular part, what its type is, etc. The symbol section contains the
graphical information for the symbol that is attached to a part. Without a symbol, a part has no
graphical representation, and is not placeable. A symbol by itself is only a graphical structure. A
component and its symbol reside in the same library; the component references a particular
symbol, its structure, when that symbol is attached to it. For example, a 7400N component with its
component attributes and pin assignments occupies the same library with a SYMBOL100_N symbol,
which it references.
It is typical for multiple components within a library to reference the same symbol. A library could
conceivably contain 100 components while only containing five symbols (multiple components
referencing the same symbol). If you changed one of the symbols, then all of the components
referencing that symbol would be affected.
If you have purchased P-CAD Library Executive, the Library menu has two additional commands:
Query and Verify Design. These commands access the embedded component search utility and the
design verification utility, respectively. See your P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide for details.
Library New
Choose Library New to create a new library. The new library is empty; it has no components and
no symbols.
When you choose Library New, the Library New dialog is displayed, which is a Windows
common dialog. In the dialog, you can specify the filename of your new library.
319
Chapter 18: Library Commands
Library Alias
Library Alias
Choose the Library Alias command to create an alias for a component or symbol. An alias is an
alternate name for an item (component or symbol). You can create multiple equivalent names for
the same item with this command.
When you create aliases for an item, it is not the same as creating copies or renaming. For copying
or renaming, see the respective Library commands.
Aliases allow flexibility in using a variety of naming conventions for components or symbols,
without renaming them. For example, what P-CAD calls an SN7400N, you may want to use a generic
alias of 7400. Or, if you have components from a vendor using a particular naming convention, and
you want to continue using that system, you can use alias names and display them on your design
as such.
Creating an Alias
320
1.
Choose Library Alias to open the following Library Alias dialog:
2.
If the appropriate library is not current, click the Library button to open the Library Select
dialog.
3.
The Library Select dialog is similar to the File Open dialog.
4.
Select the library you want, click Open, and the Alias dialog reappears.
5.
In the Alias Item frame, choose the Component or Symbol radio button. The Pattern radio
button is grayed in Schematic.
6.
Click the Component or Symbol button to open the Library Browse dialog. Select the item you
want from the list and click OK.
Library Copy
7.
You have now returned to the Library Alias dialog. Enter the alias for the symbol in the New
Alias box, and click Add to append it to the Aliases list. Click Close when finished.
Library Copy
Choose the Library Copy command to copy one or more items from one file to another (either in
the same or in a different library). The items you copy can be a component or symbol.
It's important to note that a library part consists of a component section (type, reference
designator, etc.), a symbol section (for Schematic graphics), and a pattern section (for PCB
graphics). To place the copied component on a schematic design, you need to copy the component
and its symbol when copying between different libraries (notice that the Copy Item frame of the
dialog has a choice between Symbol and Component). When you copy a component, you are
prompted whether you want to include its associated symbols; you would typically respond Yes.
When you copy a symbol, no components are included in the copy.
Also, when copying items from one library to another, you can choose to preserve items in the
destination library or overwrite them. And when copying components, you can choose to copy the
corresponding symbols.
The dialog allows you to select source library and symbol name as well as destination library and
destination name.
The source library and destination library that are used with Copy will remain current if you reinvoke the command during the same P-CAD session.
If you are copying a component or symbol but are not changing its name, you can leave the
Destination Name box blank.
321
Library Copy
Copying Symbols/Components
To copy one or more symbols or components, follow these steps:
1.
Choose Library Copy. The Library Copy dialog appears as shown in the following figure:
2.
Click Source Library. The Library Select dialog appears. The Library Select dialog is similar to the
File Open dialog.
3.
Select the source library. Click Open. Notice that the source library you selected appears in the
Library Copy dialog.
4.
Click Destination Library. The Library Select dialog appears again.
5.
Select the destination library. Click Open. The Library Copy dialog displays the paths and
filenames of the source and destination libraries you selected.
6.
In the Copy Item frame, select the type of item you want to copy. The available items are
Component and Symbol. For the item type you select, the names of the available items appear
in the Multiple Source Names list box.
7.
Select the item(s) to copy by using the standard Windows selection key combinations. You
can select either a single item, a group of items, or all the items in the list. The table below
explains how to select items for copying:
Do this:
Left mouse button
322
To select this:
A single item. If you select a single item, you can enter its
destination name in the Single Destination Name box.
Library Delete
SHIFT+Left mouse button
All items between the last selected (highlighted) item and the
item you click on.
CTRL+Left mouse button
Add items to or subtract items from the selection.
8.
You can also click the Browse to Add button to add single items to the your selection. To do
this, click Browse to Add. Then select the desired item, then click OK. The program highlights
the selected item in the Multiple Source Names list box.
9.
In the Destination Preferences section of the dialog, indicate whether to overwrite existing
items in the destination file, preserve existing items, and copy patterns and symbols with a
component. The last two check boxes are only available if you're copying components.
10. Click Copy. P-CAD Library Executive copies the selected objects from the source library to the
destination library.
11. Click Close to exit the Library Copy dialog.
Library Delete
Choose the Library Delete command to delete a library item or its alias.
This command deletes the item in name only, if it has aliases. The alternate names (aliases) still exist
unless you delete them. If the item has only one name and no aliases and you delete it, then the
item itself is deleted from the library. Use the Library Alias command to check whether an item
has aliases.
IMPORTANT: If you delete a symbol, then all of the components in the library that reference that
symbol have no graphics, and therefore cannot be placed. Typically you would want to delete a
symbol alias only, which is not dangerous unless a component used a symbol alias.
Deleting from a Library

1.
Choose the Library Delete command to open the following dialog:
2.
In the Delete Item frame, select the Component or Symbol radio button. The Pattern radio
button is shaded in Schematic.
3.
Click the Library button. The Library Select dialog is displayed, from which you can select the
library in which you want to delete an item.
323
Library Rename
4.
The library you selected in Library Select appears in the Library Delete dialog.
5.
Click the item button (Symbol or Component) and the items within the displayed library are
listed in the Library Browse dialog. Select one and it is listed in the Library Delete dialog.
6.
Click the Delete button and the item box becomes blank. You can continue to delete items
from the same library.
7.
Click Close to exit the Library Delete dialog.
Library Rename
Choose the Library Rename command to rename a symbol or a component.
If you rename a symbol, then all of the components in the library that reference that symbol by the
original name have no symbol graphics, and cannot be placed. If you want to use a different
naming convention for a symbol, then create an alias for the symbol (Library Alias command) and
use that alias name. Likewise for components: if you want to use a different naming convention,
using aliases is much safer than renaming.
Renaming a Symbol/Component
1.
Choose the Library Rename command to open the following dialog:
2.
Select the Rename Item type (Component or Symbol radio button) to specify the item you
want to rename. Pattern is shaded in Schematic.
3.
Click the Library button to display the Library Select dialog, where you can choose the library
to access.
The Library Select dialog is the standard Windows File Open dialog. The library you select in
Library Select is displayed in the Library Rename dialog.
324
4.
Click the Symbol or Component button and the items within the displayed library are listed in
the Library Browse dialog. Select one and it is listed in the Library Rename dialog.
5.
In the New Name text box, type the new name of your item, then click Rename. Both the old
and new name disappear if the rename action is successful. Then you can continue renaming
items in the same library.
6.
Click Close to exit the Library Rename dialog.
Library Setup
Library Setup
Choose the Library Setup command to open libraries from which you can access parts.
The Place Part command uses the open library list to place parts. The Library Symbol Save As
command also uses the open library list.
When you want to place a part, the library file where the part resides must be open. You can open
up to 100 libraries at one time.
Drag and Drop File Load

You can use the drag and drop method for opening library files (.lib) from the File Manager or
other Windows file maintenance utilities. Drag the .lib icon(s) onto your Schematic icon or
workspace.
Setting Up a Library
To setup a library, follow these steps:
1.
Choose the Library Setup command to open the following dialog:
2.
The dialog lists libraries that are already open in the Open Libraries list box.
3.
To add another library to the list, click Add to open the Library File Listing dialog. From there
you can gain access to the library directory to select a library file.
When you select a file from the Library File Listing dialog (and click OK), that filename appears
in the Open Libraries list box in the Library Setup dialog.
4.
To rearrange the list order, select a library name and click the Move Up or Move Down
buttons.
5.
To remove a library from the list, select the library name from the Open Libraries list box and
click Delete.
325
6.
Library Symbol Save As
Click OK and the libraries that you have specified are now open and accessible for part
placement or saving symbols.
In order to save a symbol or a component, you need to setup the library in advance. The list of
open libraries is saved to the Sch.ini file and therefore saved for subsequent P-CAD sessions.
Many commands start looking for components in the first open library. To ensure your component
is found in the correct library, open custom libraries first or move them to the top of the list.
Library Symbol Save As

Choose the Library Symbol Save As command to save a symbol to a library. Optionally creates a
component based on the symbol (you can later attach the symbol to a component using P-CAD
Library Executive), or match the default pin designators to the pin numbers You must have a library
already open to save a symbol to it.
Saving a Symbol
To save a symbol to a library, follow these steps:
326
1.
Use the block select function (Edit Select mode, draw a selecting rectangle) to include all
objects you want to be included in your symbol. At a minimum, a symbol must include a
RefDes attribute, a Type attribute, and a reference point. All pins must be consecutively
numbered, starting with 1. No duplicate default pin designators are allowed except for blank.
2.
Any pins numbered 0 will be automatically renumbered for you.
3.
While the objects are selected in your workspace, choose Library Symbol Save As to open the
following dialog:
4.
From the Library list, choose the library that you want to save the symbol to, then specify a
symbol name.
Library Archive Library
5.
In the Display frame, select the appropriate check boxes to set the default display
characteristics for the display of reference designators, type, and value.
To automatically create a component that corresponds to the symbol, select the Create
Component check box.
6.
To set the default pin designators to match the pin numbers, select the Match Default Pin
Designators to Pin Numbers check box. You must confirm that you want to overwrite existing
data if default pin designators had previously been assigned.
7.
Click OK. The symbol is saved to the library.
8.
If the Create Component check box is selected, the Save Component As dialog appears:
9.
Type a component name in the Component Name box and select a component type. Make
additional modifications using the Library Executive. See the P-CAD Library Executive Users
Guide for more information.
10. Click OK.

Choose the Library Archive Library command to copy the component and symbol information
from the open libraries for components used in the active design file. Saving the component
information in one library file can be extremely helpful, especially for large designs, to keep the
design component information in a single, readily accessible location. This eliminates the need to
store the complete set of libraries used to create the design.
The definitions for each component in the current design must reside in at least one open library.
1.
When you choose Library Archive Library, the following file search dialog appears:
327
2.
The Save In list box shows the current folder and any files in that folder. In the File Name box,
enter or select a file with the file name extension specified in the Save As Type list box.
3.
If the folder you want is not displayed in the Save In list box, move through the directory tree
to select the proper folder.
4.
Type a new library file name in the File Name area or select one from the list displayed in the
Save In area.
5.
Click Save.
If the library already exists, and you want to replace the data in the file, you must confirm that you
want to overwrite the file.
The results of the Archive Library command are displayed in an output file named
ArchiveLibrary.err located in the same directory as the destination library. This file contains
errors, warnings and informational messages logged during the archive process.
328
CHAPTER
19
Utils Commands
Using the Utils Commands
Use the commands in the Utils menu to renumber pins and reference designators, run electrical
rule checking, record Engineering Change Orders, generate netlists, start other P-CAD or thirdparty program, and gain access to various web sites.
Utils Renumber
Choose Utils Renumber to manually assign sequential pin numbers and default pin designators
to pins, and to automatically renumber reference designators on parts. You must be in Select mode
to choose this command.
For reference designators, renumbering is automatic across all sheets.
Renumbering Reference Designators

1.
Choose Utils Renumber to open the Utils Renumber dialog:
2.
In the Type frame, choose RefDes. The controls in the Direction and RefDes frames become
available and the box labels change to Starting RefDes and Increment Value.
329
Chapter 19: Utils Commands
3.
4.
5.
Utils Renumber
In the RefDes frame, choose one of these buttons:
Choose Auto Group Parts to minimize the number of components by renumbering parts
so that they fill existing components.
Choose Keep Parts Together to renumber components, but leave every component you
placed, regardless of the number of parts of that component you placed.
In the Direction frame, choose one of the buttons:
Top to Bottom: Renumbers reference designators so that lower numbers appear at the top
of the design and higher numbers appear at the bottom.
Left to Right: Renumbers reference designators so that lower numbers appear to the left of
the design and higher numbers appear to the right.
Click OK.
Examples
The following examples show you how the renumbering options work. The illustration below
shows you the design before renumbering:
If you chose the Left to Right and Keep Parts Together buttons in the Direction and RefDes frames
of the Utils Renumber dialog, your design should now appear as shown in the following figure:
330
Utils Renumber
If you choose the Top to Bottom and Auto Group Parts options in the Direction and RefDes frames
of the Utils Renumber dialog, your design should now appear as follows:
Renumbering Pins
1.
2.
In the Type frame, choose Pin Num. The controls in the Direction and RefDes frame become
shaded and the box labels change to Starting Number and Increment Value, as shown in the
following figure:
331
3.
Utils Renumber
Click OK to begin pin renumbering manually. You are in a temporary mode of assigning
numbers, so every left-button click on a pin renumbers it.
For example, the first pin you click on would be number 1 (if Start Value was specified as 1), the
second pin number 2 (if the Increment Value was specified as 1). As you click on a pin while in
the Renumber mode, it highlights to show that a new number has been assigned.
The status line shows the next pin number every time you number a pin.
You can use the unwind feature (BACKSPACE) to reverse the renumbering process.
4.
Right-click or press ESC to end the renumber process.
Renumbering Default Pin Des
332
1.
2.
Choose the Default Pin Des button. The controls in the Direction and RefDes frame become
shaded and the box labels change to Starting PinDes and Increment Value, as shown here.
3.
Click OK. Then click on the pins in the order in which you want the default pin designators to
be numbered. The status line shows the next pin number every time you number a pin. You
can use the unwind feature (BACKSPACE) to reverse the renumbering process.
4.
Right-click or press ESC to end the renumber process.
Utils Force Update
Utils Force Update

Choose Utils Force Update to replace all components of a given type in your design with the first
component of that type in an open library. This is especially useful when you have modified a
component in the Library Executive and want to place the modified component in a Schematic
design that has the original one.
For example, you change the number of pins in a component in the library. When you try to place
the modified component into the design you will receive an error. Choose the Utils Force Update
command to update all occurrences of that component in the design to reflect the changes. When
all existing components of that type have been changed in the design, you can place more of the
newly modified component into the design without incurring an error.
When you choose the Utils Force Update command, the Force Update dialog appears.
Select a component type, or click the Set All button to select all component types. Then, click the
Update button. To cancel your selections, click the Clear All button. The command looks in all
open libraries in the order they are listed in the Library Setup list for the replacement components.
Select the Maintain Rotation check box to maintain the rotation of any rotated components. It does
not maintain rotations for components in designs loaded from Tango Series II.
In the Attribute and Pin Label Handling frame, choose the method used to update component
attributes in your design with the same type of components from the library. Remember that there
are rules used to determine an attribute value.
Merge Attributes (Favor Library): This merge option combines library and design component
attributes in the component being used in the design. It favors component attributes from the
library over the component attributes of the same name in the design.
333
Utils ERC
The following rules determine which attributes and values are kept in the design component:
If an attribute exists in the library component and not in the design component, the library
attribute and its value is copied into the design component.
If the same attribute exists in both the design component and the library component with
different values, the value of the library component attribute will replace the value of the
design component attribute.
An existing design component attribute, which has no matching library component attribute, is
retained, unchanged, in the design component.
Merge Attributes (Favor Design): Again, this merge option combines library and design
component attributes in the component being used in the design. This merge option favors
component attributes in the design over the component attributes of the same name in the
library.
These rules decide which attributes and values are kept in the design component:
If an attribute exists in the design component and not in the library component, the design
attribute and its value is kept, unchanged, in the design component.
If the same attribute with different values exists in both the design component and the library
component, the value of the design component attribute takes precedence and is retained in
the design.
Replace Attributes in The Design: Choose this option to replace all of the attributes and their
values in the design component with those defined in the library component. Current design
attributes are removed from the component.
Ignore Attributes From Library: Keeps attributes in the design and ignores those in the library.
This feature gives you more control over what to update in the design if you want to preserve
any specific attribute modifications.
Utils ERC
Choose the Utils ERC command to perform electrical rules checking on your design. Schematic
then produces a report listing design errors. This process looks for design errors such as single
node nets and output pins connected to output pins.
When you choose Utils ERC, the following dialog appears:
334
Utils ERC
Filename button: Click this button to open the Electrical Rule Check Report dialog (a
Windows common File Save As dialog). From this dialog choose an ERC report file to which
you can save the report information.
Design Rule Checks frame: Select a check box to include that item on the ERC report:
Single Node Nets: Reports all nets with only one node.
No Node Nets: Reports all nets with no nodes.
Electrical Rules: Reports pins of incompatible types connected together, for example, two
output pins connected together or an output pin connected to a power pin.
Unconnected Pins: Reports all pins that are unconnected to other pins. This includes pins that
are not connected to anything at all.
Unconnected Wires: Reports all wires that are unconnected (floating).
Bus/Net Rules: Reports on nets only referenced once in a bus (i.e., a wire goes into a bus, but
doesn't come out).
Component Rules: Reports on all components that are on top of other components.
Net Connectivity: Lists conditions that are ambiguous regarding power and ground nets. This
may occur when the nets have been renamed or merged.
There are three possible warnings that can occur on the report:
A power symbol is connected to a net causing the net name to be ambiguous.
335
Utils ERC
A components global hidden pin is attached to a net, which is different from its default
net name. (For example, the net merge of a hidden pin with a net can cause a hidden pin
to no longer be connected to its default net name.
Warning nets (X) and (Y) have been merged as (X), but net (Y) still exists. This warning is
designed to let you know you must use the Edit Nets function to rename the nets and any
connections that may have been added after the merge occurred.
Hierarchy Rules: Reports on module and link errors. Each module must have a link attribute
with pins of matching electrical type and quantity. These module and link pins must be
connected. All link pins must be placed within the design and have an attribute referencing a
valid link component.
Report Options frame: Select a check box to enable one of these features:
View Report: Select this check box to display the ERC report file when the ERC is complete.
When this check box is cleared, the ERC report file is generated, but not displayed.
Summarize Ignored Errors: When the severity level of an error has been set to Ignored, the
error annotation is not displayed in the design. You can show the summary of these errors by
selecting this check box.
Summarize Overridden Errors: When a design has a number of errors that you do not wish to
see again, such as unconnected pins, and you have overridden their display using the Edit
Override command, you can include a count of these errors by selecting this check box.
Annotate Errors: Select this check box to display ERC error indicators in your design. These
indicators can then be selected for viewing of error information. The error information is
determined by the other options that you enable in rule checking.
To view the error associated with an error indicator, select it and choose Edit Properties. The
selection criteria for ERC error indicators (for block selecting) is determined by the Options
Block Selection command.
You can also define the size of ERC error indicators in a design in the Miscellaneous tab of the
Options Display dialog. For information, see Options Display (page 297).
336
Clear All Overrides: When errors in the design have been overridden, and you want to clear or
delete them from the design, enable the Clear All Overrides option.
Severity Level: Click the Severity Level button to open the Rules Severity Level dialog shown in
the following figure:
Utils Find Errors
In this dialog you can apply a severity level of Error, Warning or Ignored to individual rules. Rules
marked Ignored are not listed in the ERC report, but you can summarize the number of Ignored
rules that have violations if you enable the Summarize Ignored Checks option in the Utils Electrical
Rules Check dialog.
To change the severity level, select one or more rules and click the radio button next to the desired
severity level. You can remove the changes youve made and return to the original settings by
clicking the Set to default box. Click OK to return to the Utils ERC dialog.
When you are finished setting up the ERC options, click OK to begin the rule checking process.
Existing error indicators are cleared when you choose Utils ERC.
Utils Find Errors

Choose the Utils Find Errors command to open the Find Errors dialog.
If you have not run the Utils Electrical Rules Check, then the Find Errors dialog displays a message
informing you that there are no ERC error points. When you have run an ERC command, you have
access to all the errors through the Find Errors dialog.
337
Utils Record ECOs
Information contained in the Find Errors dialog is as follows:
Categories: The drop-down list displays the rule categories. You can view the errors for one
category by selecting it from the list. To select all the categories choose All Categories.
Description: Displays the error number along with a brief explanation for the error.
Error Number: In the Error Number box you can type the number of the error you want to see,
and click the Find Specific button to go directly to it. If you want to scroll through the errors
sequentially, use the up and down arrows next to the box.
Show Only Selected: If you have block selected an area in the design, and you only want to
view the errors in that area, check the Show Only Selected option.
Jump To: When you find an error in the report that you want to locate in the design, click the
Jump To button. The error finder positions the cursor in the center of the error indicator. If you
have block selected an area in the design the Jump To button positions the cursor inside that
area and retains the selections.
Override Dont display this error again: As you display each error in the design, individual
errors can be removed from the error display by checking the Override Dont display this
error again option. The overridden errors can be summarized in the reports by enabling the
Summarize Overridden Errors option in the Utils Electrical Rules Check dialog.
Show Only Overrides: Provides access to scroll through only those errors to which an override
has been applied.
The Find Errors dialog remains on the screen until you click the Close button. As long as there are
error indicators in the design, you can retrieve the error information in the Find ERC Errors dialog
with the Utils Find Errors command.
Utils Record ECOs

Choose the Utils Record ECOs command to record Engineering Change Orders (ECOs). When
you choose this command, the following dialog appears:
In the ECO Recorder frame, choose the appropriate radio button to turn the ECO recorder on or
off. As a shortcut for choosing this command, click the ECO button on the toolbar.
If there are pending ECOs, you are prompted when a design is saved on whether to append the
pending ECO to the current ECO file.
338
Utils Import ECOs
Types of ECOs
The following types of ECOs can be recorded:
RefDes change (Was-Is).
Net and net class name changes.
Additions, deletions, and modifications of components and parts.
Component swaps (Replace).
Additions and deletions of nets, net classes and class to classes.
Net additions to and deletions from net classes.
Additions and deletions of net nodes.
Additions, deletions, and modifications of attributes (i.e., in nets, net classes, class to classes,
etc.).
Pin and gate swap changes.
The format of the ECO file is determined by the setting in the Options Configure dialog. Full ECO
format files have an .eco extension, and Was/Is ECO files have a .was extension.
When using the ECO feature to import NetNodeAdds into Schematic, the wire stubs that are autocreated may be off-grid. If this happens, you can place another wire on-grid so that it overlaps the
existing wire stub; the two wires will be merged.
Was-Is ECO events record only reference designator changes, not part number changes. If the ECO
recorder is on and is recording only Was-Is events, the Utils Renumber command should be used
with the Keep Parts Together option to ensure that the generated ECOs are correct.
Utils Import ECOs

Choose the Utils Import ECOs command to import an ECO file and to apply the ECO changes to
the current design file. The ECO file is created in P-CAD PCB to capture post-schematic changes
made to your design.
If a component attribute is modified through ECOs, it is updated in all parts of the component.
When you choose this command the following dialog appears:
339
Utils Export ECOs
ECO Filename
1.
In the Utils Import ECOs dialog, click the ECO Filename button. The following ECO Filename
dialog appears:
2.
Navigate to the file you want to open or type the name of the file to open in the File Name text
box.
3.
Click Open to return to the Utils Import ECOs dialog.
.ECO files are assumed to be full ECO format; .WAS files are assumed to be Was/Is format.
Preview ECOs
When you select an ECO filename and then click the Preview ECOs button, you can view a list of
ECOs before you import them. When you click Preview ECOs, any ECOs appear in Windows
Notepad:
Utils Export ECOs

Choose the Utils Export ECOs command to save ECOs to the ECO file at any time, without saving
the design file. If there are pending ECOs, the following dialog appears when you choose this
command:
340
Utils Export ECOs
The Utils Export ECOs command is grayed and unavailable when no ECOs exist.
View Pending ECOs

When you click the View Pending ECOs button, you can view pending (outgoing) ECOs, which are
still stored in memory. The pending ECO data are written to a temporary ASCII file and displayed in
Windows Notepad. The format displayed is either full or Was/Is, depending on the setting in the
Options Configure dialog.
Save ECOs Now

To save pending ECOs, follow these steps:
1.
Click the Save ECOs Now button in the Utils Export ECOs dialog. The following warning
message appears:
It is important to remember that if you save ECOs without saving the design, your file and the
ECOs may not match. That is, the ECOs might not reflect the current state of the design.
2.
To continue, click Yes. The Save ECOs dialog appears:
341
Utils Generate Netlist
3.
The ECO filename appears at the top of the dialog. It is the last used ECO file. To change it,
click the ECO Filename button and the following dialog appears:
4.
The ECO Filename dialog is a standard File Open dialog. Type, or select from the list, the name
of the file you want to open in the File name box. Click OK to return to the Save ECOs dialog.
5.
Full ECO files must have an .eco extension, and Was/Is files must have a .was extension.
6.
In the Comments box, type any comments that can help document the ECOs.
7.
To append ECOs to the ECO file, click the Append ECOs to File button.
8.
To discard ECOs, click the Discard ECOs button. Once discarded they cannot be recovered.
Utils Generate Netlist

Choose the Utils Generate Netlist command to create a netlist from the combination of
connections you have established (or loaded) in a design file.
342
1.
With your design file opened, choose the Utils Generate Netlist command. The following
dialog appears:
2.
To choose a netlist file, click the Netlist Filename button. This will display the Netlist File dialog,
which is a standard Windows File Open dialog.
Utils Rename Net
3.
Select the destination format in Netlist Format combo box to specify the destination format.
Available formats are:
P-CAD ASCII
Tango
FutureNet Netlist
FutureNet Pinlist
PCAD
EDIF v2.0.0
Pspice
Xspice.
4.
Select the Include Library Information check box to write an optional library section to the
netlist.
5.
Library information is read by P-CAD PCB but not processed; it is merely informational. The
Library section may be used to create a P-CAD library, however, by removing the non-library
information from the file and using the Library Executive to translate the ASCII form of the
Library into a P-CAD binary library.
6.
Click OK in the Netlist Generate dialog to create the netlist with the filename and netlist format
you have specified.
Utils Rename Net

Choose the Utils Rename Net command to input a seed net name and an increment value, and
rename one or more nets by selecting one net at a time.
Renaming a Net
To rename a net:
1.
Choose the Utils Rename Net command or click the Rename Net button in the toolbar.
2.
In your design workspace, click a wire or port. The Utils Rename Wire/Port dialog appears:
343
3.
Use this dialog to set your initial selection for net renaming. Depending upon the selected
object and which options you set, you can rename a net, split a net, or merge a net.
4.
Set the seed name for renaming the nets and indicate whether or not to increment the
subsequent names.
5.
To split a net, choose the Contiguous Wire button.
6.
A net can be split if the selected wire or port is part of a subnet and there are other subnets in
that net. The net is split with the selected subnet getting the new name and the other subnets
keeping the original name.
7.
A subnet can be split from one net and merged with another, if the net name already exists and
is global. If the net is split, the selected subnet is merged with the existing net, while the other
subnets retain their original name.
8.
To rename an entire net, you must either select the Entire Net option or select a net that is
comprised of a single contiguous subnet.
If the new name does not already exist within the design, the entire net is renamed. If you
attempt to rename a net with the name of an existing net, and one of the nets is not global, an
error message appears. You must confirm that you want to autoplace ports to make both nets
global by clicking the Yes button. The nets are merged and renamed.
9.
Click OK to return to your design. Each time you make a selection, the net is renamed using
the values set in the dialog.
Jumper Pins
Jumpers behave as if all of the jumper pins are connected. In Schematic, pins are ported to force
them to belong to the appropriate net.

Once you create a module and place it in your design, you must resolve the hierarchy before
performing ECOs or generating netlists.
To resolve a hierarchy, follow these steps:
344
1.
Choose the Utils Resolve Hierarchy command. A message box appears, asking you if you
want to save the design before proceeding. Resolving hierarchies alters your design, so you
should save it before proceeding.
2.
Click Yes to save your design, No to proceed without saving your design, or Cancel to abort
the command. Clicking Yes displays the Save As dialog, which prompts you for a filename for
saving the design.
3.
Select the desired design name, or enter it in the File Name field.
4.
Click OK. P-CAD Schematic resolves the hierarchy. In the case of a complex hierarchy, the
program copies the definition sheet for each module that references it. In this process, ports
are added to module and link pins.
Utils Module Wizard
If a problem occurs, P-CAD Schematic displays an error message indicating that the hierarchies
were not resolved and explains why the hierarchies were unresolved. In this case, you can click Yes
to view the errors in Notepad.
One important condition that causes an error message to appear is called a passthrough condition.
A passthrough condition occurs when two links are connected together by wires, ports, or a
combination of the two.
Utils Module Wizard

P-CAD Schematic supports hierarchical schematic designs. The Utils Module Wizard command
makes it easier for you to create and manage complex designs.
With a hierarchical design, you can reference several sub-circuits from the main, or top-level,
schematic design.
You create a hierarchical design by placing a module, or black box, on your design. P-CAD
Schematic represents this module as a component with a component type MODULE. A module is
an abstract representation of the sub-circuit to which you are referring. Each module has pins
representing the interface to the sub-circuit. These pins connect to the inputs and outputs of the
sub-circuit.
Each module also requires a link, which connects the module to its definition. A definition, or
defined sheet, is a sheet that contains the actual circuitry of a module. P-CAD Schematic represents
a link as a component with a component type LINK. Both the module definition and its link must be
on the same sheet, and a sheet can only contain one module definition.
Your design can have simple or complex hierarchies. A simple hierarchy has one module
referencing one link, while a complex hierarchy has multiple modules referencing a single link.
You can place modules and links the same way you place any other part.
P-CAD Schematic stores modules and links as components in a component library, complete with
type names, reference designators, and user-defined attributes.
After placing modules and links, you must resolve the hierarchy. This converts a complex hierarchy
to a simple hierarchy so that you can generate a netlist. Once you resolve a hierarchy, you can
import and export ECOs, generate netlists, and save your schematic to a PDIF file.
You can ascend and descend the unresolved designs using the Ascend and Descend commands
found on the right mouse button pop-up menu.
To create and use a hierarchy in your design, you must:
Create a module and its link. You can either create a new module and its link or reuse an
existing module.
Place the module in the schematic design.
Resolve the hierarchy.
345
Utils Module Wizard
Creating a New Module and its Link

This section explains how to create a module and its link, then place the module in a schematic
design:
1.
Choose Utils Module Wizard. The Module Wizard dialog appears:
2.
Choose the Create a new module and its link button. Then, click the Next button.
3.
Another Module Wizard dialog appears, as shown below.
The Module Wizard dialog allows you to specify module and link parameters. The preview
window displays the module symbol. As you define the module's parameters, the preview
window reflects these changes in the module's appearance. For instance, if you change the
number of input pins from two to three, this change appears in the preview window.
346
Module name: The name of the module.
Number of input pins: The number of input pins for the module symbol.
Number of output pins: The number of output pins for the module symbol.
Symbol width: The width (in mils) of the module symbol.
Pin length: The length (in mils) of the input and output pins.
Pin spacing: The spacing (in mils) between each input and output pin.
Utils Module Wizard
4.
Create Corresponding Link: Indicates whether or not to create a corresponding link for
the module. If you don't select this check box, the program asks you to select a link
already placed on the schematic.
Link name: The name of the link between the module and its definition.
Save in Library: Indicates whether or not to save the module in a library.
Library: The library to which you are saving the module and link.
Pin Designator: The default pin designator that the Module Wizard automatically assigns.
Pin Name: Lets you change the default pin names. While you are in this box, if you press
Enter, the program automatically updates the pin name and the box automatically cycles.
Enter the module and link parameters. Then, click the Next button. The following Module
Wizard dialog appears:
This dialog displays the following information:
Placement of new link: The name of the new link.
Currently defined sheets: The sheets currently defined in the design. Defined sheets have
three restrictions:
A defined sheet can contain circuitry for only one module.
The module's circuitry must be contained within one sheet.
If you create the defined sheet with the Module Wizard, its name is the same as the
module's name.
Link will be placed on sheet: The name of the sheet where the module links are to be
placed. By default, the sheet name is the same as the module name.
347
5.
Utils Module Wizard
The link refdes is also: The link reference designator is automatically set to the sheet name.
Enter the link definition information for the target sheet and the Link RefDes. Then, click the
Next button.
The module placement dialog appears, indicating that you are about to place the module you
just created.
You can click OK to place the module, click Back to go back to the previous dialog, or click
Cancel to abort. If you click OK, P-CAD Schematic returns you to the design in Place Part
mode, meaning that you can now place the module in your design.
6.
Select the desired location for your module, then click the left mouse button to place it.
Reusing an Existing Module

You can reuse an existing module if you don't want to create one from scratch. To reuse an existing
module, follow these steps:
1.
Choose the Utils Module Wizard command. A Module Wizard dialog appears, as shown
below:
2.
Choose the Reuse an existing module button. Then, click the Next button.
Another dialog appears, prompting you to select the library containing the module and the
module you wish to place on the schematic.
348
Utils Module Wizard
3.
Select the library containing the module, then select the desired module.
4.
Click Next. Another dialog appears, asking you if you want to place a new link, or reference an
existing link:
5.
Choose the Place a new link button. Then, click the Next button. Another dialog appears,
prompting you to select the library containing the link and the link itself.
Alternatively, select reference an existing link. P-CAD Schematic displays a dialog prompting
you for a reference designator for the link. Select the desired reference designator from the
list, or type the reference designator of an existing link, then click Next. Now skip to step 9.
349
350
Utils Module Wizard
6.
Select the library containing the link from the Library list box, then select the desired link from
the Link list box.
7.
Click Next. Another dialog appears. The list on this dialog displays the currently defined sheets.
However, P-CAD Schematic places the link on a new sheet unless you specify the name of an
existing sheet in the text box.
Utils Shortcut Directory
8.
Make any desired changes to the default sheet name displayed in the text box, then click Next.
The module placement dialog appears, indicating the reference designator of the module you
are about to place.
9.
Make any desired changes to the reference designator. Then click OK to place the module,
click Back to go back to the previous dialog, or click Cancel to abort.
If you click OK, P-CAD Schematic returns you to the design in place part mode, meaning that
you can now place the module in your design.
10. Select the desired location for your module, then click the left mouse button to place it.
You can create your own default link symbol by saving a single pin symbol with the name LINK_PIN
into your custom library. When the Module Wizard places a link, it uses that symbol.
Utils Shortcut Directory

When you installed P-CAD Schematic, a sub-directory called ShortcutDirectory was created in the
P-CAD directory. The ShortcutDirectory contains a list of web addresses for semiconductor
manufacturers.
Choose the Utils Shortcut Directory command to open the ShortcutDirectory in Windows
Explorer. Select the desired address and choose the Open command from the right mouse menu,
or double click on the address.
Shortcuts to any web site can be added in the ShortcutDirectory.
Utils P-CAD PCB

If P-CAD PCB is installed on your computer, choose the Utils P-CAD PCB command to start
P-CAD PCB. Refer to your P-CAD PCB Users Guide for additional information.
If P-CAD PCB is not running, choose this command to start P-CAD PCB.
If PCB is already running, choose this command to make P-CAD PCB the active program.
351
Utils P-CAD Library Executive
Utils P-CAD Library Executive

Choose this command to start P-CAD Library Executive, if P-CAD Library Executive is installed on
your computer. Refer to your P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide for additional information.
Utils P-CAD Pattern Editor

Choose this command to start P-CAD Pattern Editor, if P-CAD Pattern Editor is installed on your
computer. Refer to your P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide for additional information.
Utils P-CAD Symbol Editor

Choose this command to start P-CAD Symbol Editor, if P-CAD Symbol Editor is installed on your
computer. Refer to your P-CAD Library Executive Users Guide for additional information.
Utils InterPlace/PCS
Choose Utils InterPlace/PCS command in the Schematic Utils menu provides access to both
P-CAD Parametric Constraint Solver and P-CAD InterPlace. P-CAD searches your license files and,
depending on which license(s) are found, starts the appropriate program(s).
Utils Customize
Choose Utils Customize to add items to the Utils menu and custom toolbar, so you can gain to
access other programs from P-CAD Schematic. The Utils Customize dialog appears.
352
Utils Customize
The Utils Customize dialog is used to add new tools or delete and modify existing tools on the
Custom Tools toolbar and Utils menu. The fields on the dialog are as follows:
Custom: Provides a list of the custom tools that currently exist.
Menu Text: Enter the description of the tool being added. The Menu Text field allows up to 40
characters. The buttons on the toolbar display as many letters as can fit on the button. If the
name of a tool being added to the custom toolbar is too long to be displayed in its entirety, you
can change the display by using lower case letters or shortening the name of the new tool.
You may insert an ampersand (&) anywhere in the text string to designate a menu shortcut key.
For instance, if the Menu Text entry is &Notepad, the menu shortcut key for the tool is the
letter N.
The Utils menu displays the list of custom tools as shown to the left.
Command: Enter the path to the executable file of the new tool. Click the Browse button to
display an Open dialog where the desired file can be chosen. A warning is issued if a nonexistent path is entered, but the entry will still be added.
Arguments: Optional entry used to pass information into the targeted program, if desired.
Initial Directory: Sets the initial working directory for the program.
Display: Selects the way the program appears on the screen when initialized. Normal (the
default) to display the program as a window in the workspace, Minimized to start the program
and display it as an icon at the bottom of the screen, or Maximized to start the program and
display it across the full screen.
Prompt for arguments: Check this box to automatically display the Arguments dialog, which
provides a way to enter input that must be passed to the program at execution time. The entry
is saved and recalled the next time the program is run.
Add: Click the Add button to begin adding a new tool. You can add a maximum of 16 tools to
the Custom toolbar.
Remove: Select a tool from the custom area and click Remove to delete it from the customized
toolbar.
Move Up/Move Down: Select a tool from the Custom list and change its position in the list by
clicking the Move Up or Move Down buttons.
Once all selections and entries have been made, click OK to apply them.
Displaying the Custom Toolbar

The Custom toolbar is not displayed in the workspace until a custom tool has been added. Once a
tool has been added, the toolbar automatically appears with the other Schematic toolbars.
353
Utils Customize
You may control the appearance of the Custom toolbar in the workspace using the View Custom
Toolbar command. See View Custom Toolbar (page 256) for more information.
Executing a Custom Tool

To launch an program added as a Custom Tool, you may choose any of these methods:
Click the desired button on the Custom toolbar
Select the tool from the list at the bottom of the Utils menu (shown above).
While the Utils menu is active select a custom tool by pressing the menu shortcut key assigned to
it. For instance, select Notepad by pressing the N key.
354
CHAPTER
20
Simulate Commands
Simulate Run
Choose the Simulate Run command to run a simulation on your schematic. The command will
only become available if you have a schematic design open. If you have created your schematic
design using parts that have simulation models associated with them, clicking Simulation Run will
invoke the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator (from within the Design Explorer 99 SE application) and
run a simulation on the design.
If you want to specify analysis criteria prior to running a simulation on your design, you can choose
the Simulate Setup command. This command will invoke the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator
(from within the Design Explorer 99 SE application) and launch the Analyses Setup dialog, from
where you can specify your simulation criteria before executing the simulation.
If you choose to run a simulation on a schematic that includes parts not supported by simulation
models, the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator will not invoke. Instead a notepad window will launch,
displaying an error log containing all simulation-related errors that are preventing the schematic
from being simulated.
Simulate Setup
Choose the Simulate Setup command to allow you to specify analysis criteria prior to a simulation
of your design being executed. The command will only become available if you have a schematic
design open. If you have created your schematic design using parts that have simulation models
associated with them, clicking Simulation Setup will invoke the Mixed-Signal Circuit Simulator
(from within the Design Explorer 99 SE application) and bring up the Analyses Setup dialog. From
this dialog, you can determine which analses to run on your design. Analyses available include:
Operating Point, Transient/Fourier, AC Small Signal, DC Sweep, Noise, Transfer Function,
Temperature Sweep, Parameter Sweep and Monte Carlo.
If you want to run a simulation on your design straight away, choose the Simulate Run command.
For more information, refer to the online help documentation.
355
CHAPTER
21
DocTool Commands
Using the DocTool Commands
With the documentation tools in P-CAD Schematic, you can detail the fabrication, assembly, and
testing of the printed circuit board. Using the commands in the DocTool menu, you can perform
the following tasks:
Create versatile zoned borders and custom title blocks.
Include drawing and revision notes.
Insert tables that include design data such as: net locations, power and ground net data, as well
as last used, not used, and spare gate information.
Place annotated sheet connectors.
Track nets between schematic sheets.
This chapter contains a detailed explanation of each command in the DocTool menu.
DocTool Place Table

Choose DocTool Place Table to place a table in your schematic design. To learn how you can use
tables in a design, see one of the following topics.
When you choose this command and click the workspace, the following dialog appears:
357
Chapter 21: DocTool Commands
DocTool Place Table
The Place Table dialog contains the following options:
Table Type (list box). Select the type of table you want to place from this list.
Table Name (text box). Type a name for your table in this box. When you place a table in the
design, this name appears above the table.
Text Style (list). Select a text style for the table from this list.
Text Styles (button). Click this button to open the Options Text Style dialog. Use the controls in
this dialog to modify text styles.
Note Numbering Frame

The options in this frame are only available when you place a Note Table or Revision Note Table.
For more information, see, Note Tables (page 112) or Revision Note Tables (page 114).
Top to Bottom (option button). Choose this button to increment note numbers from the top to
the bottom of the table.
Bottom to Top (option button). Choose this button to increment note numbers from the
bottom to the top of the table.
Width of Note Column (text box) Type a value in this box to specify the column width in
number of characters. When a note exceeds the column width, the text wraps to the following
line.
Note number or symbols do not appear in a revision notes table. The Note Numbering option
specifies the order of the placed notes, with or without the numbers displayed.
Pins to Include Frame

The options in this frame are only available when you place a Power Table. For more information,
see Power and Ground Tables (page 113).
358
All Pins (option button). Choose this button to include all pins in the table.
DocTool Titles
Chapter 21: DocTool Commands
Hidden Pins Only (option button). Choose this button to include only hidden pins in the table.
Components to Include Frame

The options in this dialog are only available when you place a Power Table. For more information,
see Power and Ground Tables (page 113).
All Components (option button). Choose this button to display all components in the table
Only RefDes Prefix (option button). Choose this button to only display components of a
particular value.
DocTool Titles
Choose DocTool Titles to create a custom title sheet for your schematic design.
When you choose this command, the Options Sheets dialog appears with the Titles tab selected.
You use the options in this dialog build title sheets that can include any or all of the following
elements: design border, zones, and a title block.
In Schematic, zones are intelligent and can be used to mark the locations of sheet connectors, as
well as cross- reference these connected nets between schematic sheets. For details, see Sheet
Connector Cross Referencing (page 107).
For more information, see Title Sheets (page 98) and Options Sheets (page 311).
DocTool Notes
Choose DocTool Notes to add or import notes that you can place in your schematic design.
When you choose this command, the Design Info dialog appears with the Notes tab selected. You
use the options in this dialog to add or import notes into your design.
For more information, see Placing a Net Index Table (page 111) and File Design Info (page 183).
DocTool Update
Choose DocTool Update to recalculate the design data and update the selected tables or
diagrams embedded in the design.
DocTool Update All

Choose DocTool Update All in P-CAD Schematic to recalculate the design data and updates all
tables or diagrams embedded in the design.
359
CHAPTER
22
Macro Commands
Using the Macro Commands
The Macro menu lists the commands available to record and run macros. A series of actions that is
often repeated during a design session can be recorded, assigned to a key sequence and played
back at any time, automating the design process.
Macro Setup
Choose Macro Setup to specify the directory in which macros are stored and the playback delay
interval.
Before you start recording the set of actions that will make up a new macro, you should choose
Macro Setup if you want the macro to be stored in a directory other than the default directory, or
if you need to change the playback interval.
Setting Up a Macro
1.
Choose Macro Setup to open the following dialog.
2.
Click Browse to open the Open dialog.
3.
Select the directory you want to use as the default macro storage location. Then, click Open to
return to the Macro Setup dialog.
361
Chapter 22: Macro Commands
Macro Record
4.
Enter the Playback Delay interval in seconds. The number you enter here controls how fast
each recorded event appears in the workspace when the macro is run. You can set the interval
to the thousandths (.001 of a second).
5.
Click OK to commit your setup selections or click Cancel to exit without changing the settings.
Macro Record
Choose Macro Record to record a macro and to assign a name to that macro.
1.
Choose Macro Record to open the following dialog:
2.
Type a name for the macro you will record in the Macro Name text box.
3.
Click OK to close the dialog. The Macro Recording Tool appears and the background of the M
button in the status line is red, to indicate that you are in recording mode. Any actions you
perform are recorded.
4.
To stop recording, click M on the status line or press the M key.
After you record a macro, you can assign it to a shortcut key by choosing Options Preferences.
Alternatively, you can add it to the Utils menu by choosing Utils Customize. For additional
information, see Options Preferences (page 301) and Utils Customize (page 352).
Macro Recording Tool

While recording events in a macro, the following controls are available in the Macro Recording
Tool:
The buttons in the Macro Recording Tool perform the following functions:
Stop Recording: Terminates the recording process and stores the
events in the designated file. The recording process can also be
stopped by pressing M or clicking M on the status bar.
362
Macro Record
Pause Recording: Temporarily disables the recording process.

When you pause a recording this button changes to the Resume
Recording button.
Recording Suspend: Inserts a suspend that creates a pause during
playback. You can also insert a suspend by pressing the Pause/Break
key.
Resume Recording: This button appears in the Macro Recording
Tool instead of the Pause Recording button whenever you pause
recording. It also appears during playback whenever the playback
reaches a recorded suspend activity.
Recording Origin: Places an origin in the macro. When a recorded
origin is encountered, you can click the left mouse button in the
workspace to set a relative playback location during playback.
Cancel Recording: Terminates the recording process and does not
save the file.
Temporary Macro Record (M Toggle Button)

The Macro toggle button (M button located on the status line) allows you to create temporary
(filename is Sch_default.mac) macros on the fly. Typically, you would use this macro for a short
time within a design process (e.g., repeatedly placing a combination of lines, duplicating the same
lengths and angles, etc.).
Only one temporary macro is available at a time; each time you record a temporary macro, it
overwrites the previous one.
Recording a Temporary Macro

To record a temporary macro, follow these steps:
1.
To begin recording, click M on the status line or press M; the button background changes to
red.
2.
Perform the actions you wish to record.
3.
To stop recording, click M or press M again; the colored background disappears.
4.
Press E (execute) to playback the temporary macro. The actions you recorded repeat each time
you press E.
The entire group of macro functions is available to a temporary macro, including pause and
suspend.
The name of the temporary macro is Sch_default.mac, so don't create any macros by that name.
If you want to create a more permanent macro, then you need to name it and record it with Macro
Record. You can rename any macro with Macro Rename.
363
Macro Delete
Macro Delete
Choose Macro Delete to delete a macro. When you choose this command, the following dialog
appears:
Select the macro you want to delete from the Macro Name combo box, or type the name of the
macro. The combo box lists all the *.mac files found in the default macro directory set in the
Macro Setup dialog. Click Delete and the macro disappears from the list.
Macro Rename
Choose Macro Rename to rename a saved macro or the temporary macro Sch_default.mac.
When you rename Sch_default.mac, it is no longer a temporary macro, but a saved, named
macro.
When you choose this command, the following dialog appears:
Select the file to rename from the Old Name combo box. This combo box lists all the *.mac files
found in the default macro directory, which is set in the Macro Setup dialog. For instructions, see
Macro Setup, (page 361).
The Macro menu lists the commands available to record and run macros. A series of actions that is
often repeated during a design session can be recorded, assigned to a key sequence and played
back at any time, automating the design process.
Enter a new name for the selected macro in the New Name edit box. Next, click Rename and then
click Close.
364
Macro Run
Macro Run
Choose Macro Run to playback a saved macro. While the macro is running, the M button on the
status line has a green background.
When you choose this command, the following dialog appears:
To run the macro, type a name or select one from the Macro Name combo box. This combo box
lists all the *.mac files found in the default macro directory set in the Macro Setup dialog. Click OK
to run the selected macro.
This command is also handy for viewing your list of macros before you run one.
If you use a macro frequently, you can assign it to a key as a shortcut by choosing Options
Preferences. Or, you can add it to the Utils menu by choosing Utils Customize. For information,
see Options Preferences (page 301) and Utils Customize (page 352).
Running Temporary Macros

To run the temporary macro, press E. To record a temporary macro, press M, do a series of actions,
and press M again to end recording.
To clear the temporary macro, press M twice to record nothing.
Recording Efficient Macros

The macro utility records every keystroke and mouse click that occurs in the workspace. Because
the macro utility focus is toward pressing keys and clicking the mouse, it is advantageous to use the
menu commands and the keyboard.
By understanding how the macro utility operates, you can make the most of this powerful tool
when recording your macros. The following list provides some helpful hints that will maximize the
effectiveness of your recordings:
If you click a button in the toolbar while recording, the toolbar must be in the same location
during playback. By using the shortcut keystrokes instead of toolbar buttons, the toolbar can
be in any location without affecting the playback.
When choosing commands, use the menu commands by clicking on them with the left mouse
button instead of the commands in the shortcut menu. The right mouse menu changes
location based on mouse location.
365
Macro Run
When information dialogs appear while recording a macro, and you need to interact with the
dialog during playback, insert a suspend command by pressing the Pause/Break key.
There are times when you may select an item from a drop down list during an event recording.
If the order of the items in the list is subject to change due to additions or deletions, the most
effective way to eliminate choosing the wrong item is to type the desired value in the edit box
instead of selecting from the list. Then you are assured that the correct item is incorporated
into the event.
Whenever options on the status line are recorded, such as changing a layer, you must assure
that the status line view is enabled when running the macro. If the status line is not visible
during macro playback, the location of the recorded command cannot be identified nor
executed.
When working with text it is best to make changes using keys such as DEL, BACKSPACE, etc.
Retain the same size workspace and focus during playback as you used when recording.
Changing the workspace size or zoom factor causes adjustments in location coordinates. For
instance, if you place a component in the outer regions of a design and change the zoom so
that those coordinates are no longer visible in the workspace, the component cannot be
placed during playback.
The resolution of the system in which you are running a recorded macro should match the
resolution of the system in which the macro was recorded.
Macro Features
The macro tool features extend beyond the record and play functions. This section describes these
additional features:
Running a Macro: You can launch the Schematic program and a particular macro from the
command line by entering a fully qualified path to the executable and then the macro files
name.
<full path>.SCH.exe /e
<full path><macro name>
If Schematic is already running, this command opens the macro in the current Schematic
session. If Schematic is not currently running it is launched and the macro opened.
366
Status Line Recording Indicators: When the status line is enabled, the Macro Toggle button (M)
displays different colors to indicate the type of activity being performed. When recording, the
background is red. During playback, the background is green. Yellow indicates a pause in the
recording, or shows that a suspend or origin command has been encountered during playback.
Automatic Delays: The macro recording automatically inserts a delay into a macro whenever a
Print Setup, Font or Custom Color dialog has been displayed. This allows the dialog time to
appear in the workspace. If the interval is not large enough for the playback to accommodate
the next event, you can change it directly be editing the *.mac file or by editing the Sch.ini
file and changing the MacroCommonDialogDelay to a larger number.
Macro Run
Editing Macro Files: You can directly edit a macro file to add or change delays, launch other
programs, etc. Each additional command that you add must use the correct syntax.
The following section describes the commands that can be added and the proper syntax for each.
Macro File Syntax

If you have a recorded macro that needs to be modified slightly and you do not want to record the
entire chain of events again, you can edit the macro directly. This section explains the syntax used
to record the events in the macro file.
Syntax is very important in the macro files. Each macro command is case sensitive and each line
must contain a carriage return.
A sample macro, opened in a text editor, is shown below:
There are a variety of event types: mouse, keyboard, special and edit. Each has its own keywords
and syntax format as shown below. Syntax descriptions show a comma to separate the parts of the
format for readability. The commas are not to be inserted into the actual format of the command.
An example of an actual syntax is provided as well.
Mouse Events
Mouse events occur while the cursor is over the workspace and also when the cursor is over the
program, but not in the workspace (i.e., over a menu, toolbar, dialog, etc.). Events that occur when
the cursor is over the workspace are recorded as appunit locations. Events occurring when the
cursor is over a menu, toolbar, etc., are recorded in pixels.
Syntax: Keyword, white space, positive integer, white space, unit string, white space, positive
integer, unit string.
LeftMouseDown 23 Pixels 101 pixels
LeftMouseUp 18 pixels 583 pixels
LeftMouseDown&KeyStroke 179 appunits 50 appunits SHIFT
367
Macro Run
Keywords: LeftMouseDown, LeftMouseUp, LeftMouseDoubleClick, RightMouseDown,

RightMouseUp, LeftMouseDown&Keystroke<appunits or
pixels>Ctrl,LeftMouseDown&Keystroke<appunits or
pixels>SHIFT,LeftMouseDown&Keystroke<appunits or pixels>Alt.
Unit Strings: A unit string in a mouse event is either pixels or appunits. In the example above, 23
and 101 are the X and Y coordinates of the left mouse down action, and pixels indicates that the
mouse click was made on a toolbar command. If the unit string contains appunits, then the mouse
click was made in the workspace at the indicated X and Y coordinates.
Keyboard Events
Syntax: Keyword, white space, quoted character string.
SendKeys {SHIFT+N}{e}{w}
Keywords: SendKeys
Character String: Each keystroke, and combinations thereof, must be enclosed in curly brackets
and the string of curly bracketed strokes enclosed in quotations. In the example above, the word
New is recorded using the keyboard syntax format.
Keyboard Codes: The following list defines the recordable keys and how they are represented in
the macro file.
Keys
368
Codes
az
AZ
AZ
SHIFT+A SHIFT+Z
09
09
F1 - F12
F1 F12
Alt
ALT
Back Space
Backspace
Ctrl
CTRL
Delete
Delete
End
End
Escape
ESC
Home
Home
Insert
Insert
Num Lock
Not recordable
Page Down
PageDown
Macro Run
Keys
Codes
Page Up
PageUp
Pause Break
Not recordable
Print Screen
Not recordable
Scroll Lock
Not recordable
Space
Space
Tab
TAB
Down Arrow
Down
Left Arrow
Left
Right Arrow
Right
Up Arrow
Up
Numpad 0
Numpad0
Numpad 1
Numpad1
Numpad 2
Numpad2
Numpad 3
Numpad3
Numpad 4
Numpad4
Numpad 5
Numpad5
Numpad 6
Numpad6
Numpad 7
Numpad7
Numpad 8
Numpad8
Numpad 9
Numpad9
Numpad /
NumpadDivide
Numpad -
NumpadMinus
Numpad *
NumpadMultiply
Numpad +
NumpadPlus
Numpad Clear
NumpadClear
Backquote
Minus
Equal
369
Macro Run
Keys
370
Codes
Backslash
Semicolon
Singlequote
Slash
Period
Comma
LeftBracket
RightBracket
SHIFT+Backquote
SHIFT+1
SHIFT+2
SHIFT+3
SHIFT+4
SHIFT+5
SHIFT+6
&
SHIFT+7
SHIFT+8
SHIFT+9
SHIFT+0
SHIFT+Minus
SHIFT+Equal
SHIFT+Backslash
SHIFT+RightBracket
SHIFT+LeftBracket
SHIFT+Singlequote
SHIFT+Semicolon
SHIFT+Slash
<
SHIFT+Comma
Macro Run
Keys
>
Special Windows keys
Codes
SHIFT+Period
Not recordable
Special Events
Syntax: Keyword.
Origin
Suspend
Delay 1.001
Keywords: Origin, Suspend and Delay.
Exception: The Delay keyword is generated by the macro utility whenever a print setup, font or
custom color dialog is invoked in the macro. Inserting a one-time delay interval pauses the
playback so that there is time to set up the next recorded event. The Delay keyword is followed by
a positive floating number. This delay time is added to the global playback interval set using the
Macro Setup command.
Edit Events
Syntax: Keyword, qualifier.
Wait 4
ExecuteCommand C:\ACCEZZL\PATED.EXE
Keywords: Wait, ExecuteCommand.
Qualifier: Each of these keywords has its own type of qualifier. The Wait keyword is followed by a
positive number indicating the pause interval in seconds. During playback the wait interval is
counted down in the Status Bar and the playback resumes when the interval is complete.
The ExecuteCommand launches another program and requires the program name enclosed in
quotes. It may also required the path to the program name or file.
File Syntax
Beginning: The macro file begins with the keyword SchMacro, followed by the name of the macro
and a comment string. The comment string, which can also be added to any line in the macro, must
begin with a single quote.
Ending: Every macro must end with the keyword End.
Other: Every line must begin with one of the keywords. Although optional, a tab at the end of each
line helps increase a macros readability when it is edited.
371
CHAPTER
23
Window Commands
Window New Window
Choose Window New Window to open additional windows for the active design. You can move
independently in each window, making it easy to compare different parts of the same design.
A number identifying the window is added to the file name in the title bar and at the bottom of the
Window menu.
Window Cascade
Choose Window Cascade to arrange all open windows so that the window tiles are visible.
All windows overlap, starting in the upper-left corner of your workspace. You can see each
window's title, making it easy to switch between windows.
Window Tile
Choose Window Tile to open all open windows so that all windows are visible.
Windows are resized and arranged side-by-side so that all windows are visible and none overlap.
Window Arrange Icons

Choose Window Arrange Icons to arrange all minimized design windows in the P-CAD Schematic
window. This command positions these icons so that they are evenly spaced and dont overlap.
button. When you do, the window becomes minimized, as
To minimize a window, click the
shown in the following illustration:
To restore a minimized window to the maximum window size, double-click the window.
373
Chapter 23: Window Commands
Window 1,2,
Window 1,2,
The bottom of the Window menu lists all open windows. Select the name of the window you want
to make active from the Window menu. Designs appear on the Windows menu in the order that
you opened them.
If there are more than nine windows opened, the option More Windows appears. Select it to view
additional windows.
374
CHAPTER
24
Help Commands
P-CAD Schematic Help Topics
Choose this command to open the P-CAD Schematic Help file.
How to Use Help

Choose this command to connect to the Windows Help file, which shows you how to use the
online Help system.
Series II Commands
Choose this command to view a list that maps the Tango Schematic Series II commands to its
equivalent P-CAD commands and features.
About P-CAD Schematic

Choose this command to open a dialog box that contains information about the P-CAD Schematic
program, such as the product license number, version number, release date, memory used, and
available memory.
375
APPENDIX
Keyboard Reference
This appendix is a reference of commands and functions accessed through P-CAD shortcut keys.
Standard Windows key combinations are functional for all of the menu commands; use the normal
combination ALT, X, Y where X equals the underscored menu character, and Y equals the
underscored command character.
You can use the Options Preference dialog to change shortcut keys for commands and macros. For
details, see Options Preferences (page 301).
Schematic Keyboard Reference

Press this key combination
ALT+F4 (File Exit)
A shortcut for the File Exit command. Choose this command to quit
the P-CAD Schematic program. If any open design has been modified
since the last save, you are prompted whether you want to save the
changes to the file. The program writes configuration information to
the Sch.ini file when you exit. For details, see File Exit (page 199).
ALT + MOUSE CLICK
For any click-and-drag or drag-and-drop operations, you can hold

down the ALT key, click the left mouse button, then move or drag the
object wherever you want without having to keep the mouse button
depressed. Without the ALT key, you would normally have to click
and hold the button down while you are dragging.
ARROW KEYS
Press an arrow key to move the cursor to the next grid point. Press
CTRL+arrow to move the cursor 10 grid points. This is useful to pan
the window.
377
Appendix A: Keyboard Reference
CTRL+MOUSE CLICK
You can copy-and-drag an object by selecting the object, holding

down CTRL and clicking the left mouse button in the selected object
region, and dragging a copy of the object to a location and releasing
to paste it.
CTRL+C (Edit Copy)
A shortcut for the Edit Copy command. For details, see Edit Copy
(page 203).
CTRL+N (File New)
A shortcut for File New. This command opens a new, untitled

design window in the workspace. For details, see Using the File
Commands, (page169).
CTRL+O (File Open)
A shortcut for File Open. When you choose this command, the File
Open dialog appears, where you can choose a design file to open.
For details, see File Open (page 169).
CTRL+P (File Print)
A shortcut for File Print. When you choose this command, the File
Print dialog appears, where you can print sheets from your design
and set options for your output. For details, see File Print (page 172).
CTRL+S (File Save)
A shortcut for File Save. Choose this command to save changes to

the current, active design without closing it. For details, see File Save
(page 170). To save the design to a different file, choose File Save
As. For details, see File Save As (page 171).
CTRL+V (Edit Paste)
A shortcut for the Edit Paste command. For details, see Edit Paste
(page 204)
CTRL+X (Edit Cut)
A shortcut for the Edit Cut command. For details, see Edit Cut (page
203).
CTRL+Z (Edit Undo)
A shortcut for Edit Undo, which reverses a completed action. If you

have not completed your action (e.g., you are in Place Line mode and
have not finished a series of segments), Undo will not reverse the
action. Use the BACKSPACE key to unwind the unfinished actions
when you are in a placement mode. For details, see Edit Undo (page
201).
CTRL+F4
Closes the active window.
CTRL+F6 and CTRL+TAB
Switches focus to the next open window. Use CTRL+SHIFT+F6 to

switch focus to the previous window.
SHIFT+F4 (Window Tile)
A shortcut for the Windows Tile command. Windows are resized

and arranged side-by-side so that all windows are visible and none
overlap. For details, see Window Tile (page 373).
378
SHIFT+F5 (Window Cascade)
A shortcut for the Windows Cascade command. All windows

overlap, starting in the upper-left corner of your Workspace. You can
see each window's title, making it easy to switch between windows.
For details, see Window Cascade (page 373).
DEL (Edit Delete)
A shortcut for the Edit Delete command, which deletes all selected
objects. For details, see Edit Delete (page 234).
F1 (Help)
Press the F1 key to display context-sensitive help. If you put focus on

a command or dialog (by mouse or keyboard) and press F1, the Help
window appears containing information specific to the focus item.
PAGE DOWN
Scrolls one page down in the workspace. CTRL+PAGE DOWN scrolls

one page right.
PAGE UP
Scrolls one page up in the workspace. CTRL+PAGE UP scrolls one

page left.
SPACEBAR
The SPACEBAR can be used in place of the left mouse button; but the
action is different. To simulate a typical click-and-release of the
mouse button, you need to press and release the SPACEBAR twice.
Therefore, to simulate the click-and-hold mouse action, you press
and release the SPACEBAR once.
As the left mouse button is used in such a variety of ways throughout
the P-CAD program, this SPACEBAR keystroke can become a regular
part of your work.
BACKSPACE (Unwind)
Used as unwind command while placing objects with multiple segments (e.g., lines, polygons). Each BACKSPACE stroke unwinds the
previously placed segment.
ESC (Escape)
Terminates placement of objects with multiple segments; it also cancels a redraw in progress. It is often equivalent to the right mouse
button. ESC also exits from dialogs (equaling the Close or Cancel
button).
+ PLUS KEY (Zoom In)
Press the + key as a shortcut for choosing the View Zoom In command. The plus key causes a zoom in to occur at the cursor location.
The plus key does not change the cursor to a zoom cursor (as do the
zoom commands from the View menu).
- MINUS KEY (Zoom Out)
Press the - key as a shortcut for choosing the View Zoom Out command. The keypad minus key also works. The minus key causes a
zoom out to occur at the cursor location. The minus key does not
change the cursor to a zoom cursor (as do the zoom commands from
the View menu). For details, see View Zoom Out (page 252).
A KEY (Grid Toggle)
Press the A key to switch between absolute and relative grid settings.
379
C KEY (View Center)
A shortcut for the View Center command. This command allows

you to center your cursor location. Place the cursor in the area of
your design that you want centered and press C. For details, see View
Center (page 252).
D and SHIFT+D (Change

Reference Designators)
Press D to switch to the next available reference designator; SHIFT+D

changes the reference designator to the highest unused preceding
reference designator.
E KEY (Play Macro)
Press E to play back (executes) the temporary macro (named

_DEFAULT). Temporary macros are recorded by clicking the Macro
button or by pressing the M key. Each successive temporary macro
overwrites the previous one. See Macro Record (page 362) for more
information.
F KEY (Flip Object)
Press the F key to flip an object during Place and Select operations.
Not all objects can be flipped. Refer to Edit Select (page 247) for more
information about flipping objects.
The F key also switches between orthogonal mode pairs; see Options
Configure (page 292) for details on orthogonal modes.
G KEY (Grid Select)
This key scrolls forward through the list of grid settings. Use SHIFT+G
to scroll back through the list.
J KEY (Enter Coordinate)
Gives focus to the X coordinate box in the status line. From there,
you can enter new X and Y coordinates.
L and SHIFT+L Keys (Sheets)
L sequences forward through the sheets in the design file of the

active window; SHIFT+L sequences backward through the sheets.
M KEY (Record Macro)
Duplicates the macro toggle button (M button on the Status line) for
starting/stopping recording of the temporary macro (see E key
description). See Macro Record (page 362) for more information.
O and SHIFT+O Keys

(Orthogonal Mode)
O sequences forward through the orthogonal modes during

placement of wires and lines; SHIFT+O sequences backward
throughout the modes. Press the F key to switch between orthogonal
mode pairs. Orthogonal modes are set in the Options Configure
dialog box. See Options Configure (page 292) for more information.
P and SHIFT+P (Change

Reference Designators)
Press the P key to change the reference designator to the next gate;
Press SHIFT+P to change the reference designator to the previous
gate.
Q KEY (Draft Mode)
Press the Q key to switch between draft mode ON and OFF.
R KEY (Rotate)
R Rotates objects 90 degrees during Place and Select operations. For

more information about rotating objects with Place and Select operations Edit Select (page 247).
380
S KEY (Select)
S key (Select)
U KEY (Undo)
A shortcut for the Edit Undo command, which reverses a completed

action. See Edit Undo (page 201) for more information. For the
unwind feature, refer to the BACKSPACE key description in this
section.
W KEY (Line Width Scroll)
Scrolls forward through the list of line widths established in the

design. Use SHIFT+W to scroll back through the list.
X KEY (Cursor Style)
Press the X key to switch between the three cursor styles: Arrow,
Small Cross, and Large Cross.
Z KEY (Zoom Window)
A shortcut for the View Zoom Window command. Just press Z and
then draw the zoom window; a zoom cursor (magnifying glass)
appears until you draw the zoom window. Whatever you surround
with the zoom window fills the screen. For details, see View Zoom
Window (page 252).
381
APPENDIX
Translating Tango-Schematic Designs

This appendix provides information on translating Tango-Schematic designs into P-CAD Schematic.
If you choose the Archive Library command in Tango-Schematic Version 1.30a or earlier, the Pattern
Attribute is not included in each part. If you want pattern information saved in your translated
design, use version 1.40 to archive your parts or add pattern data manually with a text editor.
Also, verify that all parts have a RefDes, in particular power parts and logos. The Archive Library
command does not save parts without a RefDes. You need to copy these parts to the archived
library.
Translation Process
Before translating a Tango-Schematic design (using the File Open command in P-CAD Schematic)
you should prepare your designs by performing the following steps:
1.
Choose the Post Cleanup command to remove any collinear (overlapping) wire segments.
2.
Choose the Post Compile command and the DRC report to detect existing errors. Errors may
be fixed in Tango-Schematic before translation or after translation using P-CAD Schematic.
3.
Convert any hierarchical designs into a flat format. All ports and modules should be replaced
with the necessary schematic information in order to retain all net connectivity between
sheets. All files of the design must have the same root name, with extensions of .S01, .S02,
etc. Each file is translated to sheets in your P-CAD Schematic design, with corresponding
default names Sheet1, Sheet2, etc.
4.
Save your design files in ASCII format. P-CAD Schematic does not accept Tango-Schematic
designs in binary format.
After translation you can generate an ERC report in P-CAD Schematic and compare the results to
your Tango- Schematic report. You can also use the NETCOMP netlist-compare utility to compare
netlists generated by Tango-Schematic and P-CAD Schematic. This utility compares nets on a nodeby-node basis, disregarding net names since they can be different, and lists all nets not having
identical matches. These differences are often caused by problems described throughout this
section.
383
Appendix b: Translating Tango-Schematic Designs
Considerations
You can fix errors discovered during these tests in Tango-Schematic before translation or after
translation using P-CAD Schematic.
The Tango-Schematic libraries associated with the design must be translated prior to opening a
Tango-Schematic design in P-CAD. Refer to the P-CAD Library Users Guide for instructions on how
to do this. After translating the libraries, run the Library Setup command in P-CAD Schematic to
open all libraries needed for the translation.
P-CAD Schematic will use the first occurrence of a part found in the open libraries. If a part occurs
in more than one library, the first open library with the desired part format will be used before any
other library containing the same part. You may wish to insure that your archived library is first in
the list of open libraries.
Considerations
For a complete and correct translation, the translated Tango-Schematic libraries must contain the
parts exactly as they exist on your schematic design. If the library part definition is different from
the part on the design, you must either alter the library part to have the correct definition, or
replace all instances of the part on the Tango- Schematic design with the part from the library and
correct any errors caused by the change. Some common differences that become evident after
translation are:
The part in the library does not have the same orientation as the part on the sheet. These parts
appear rotated on the translated sheet.
The part in the library has a reference point, which is different from the reference point of the
part on the design. These parts appear offset from the correct location.
The pin positioning and definition are not the same. If the pins are out of position, having
differing lengths, or have different pin designators, the translation reflects these differences.
The RefDes, type, or value locations for a library part are different from the part on a sheet. This
can happen when these attributes are moved on the sheet for cosmetic reasons; these parts
can appear different in P- CAD Schematic, but these differences are only cosmetic and do not
affect normal processing.
Design Practices Considered

Tango-Schematic interprets some ambiguous design practices differently from P-CAD Schematic.
384
Placing a wire so that it crosses over the endpoints of non-connected pins. In TangoSchematic, a wire touching pin endpoints without stopping over them is not connected. P-CAD
includes these pins in the net.
Global Hidden Pins made visible on the sheet, and connected pin-to-pin to another part. These
occurrences are flagged as an error and must be modified to include a wire.
Parts that do not have a Type flag an error in P-CAD. These parts must be modified to include
a Type field.
Design Practices Considered
Appendix b: Translating Tango-Schematic Designs
Placing junctions over wires or pins that do not require a junction for connectivity. TangoSchematic allows the placement of extraneous junctions. Using P-CAD Schematic, junctions
are necessary only when an intersection of three or more wires and/or pins need to be
connected together.
The default net names given to nets that were not specifically named on your Tango-Schematic
designs are renamed using P-CAD default net names. These are not necessarily the same as those
used in Tango- Schematic. When you compare netlists generated by the two products, take these
different defaults into account.
If you use wires instead of lines for bus entries in Tango-Schematic, you may get wires that appear
to short together after translating the design to P-CAD Schematic. This can be changed by replacing
the wires used for bus entries by lines in Tango-Schematic, or by manually moving the translated
wires in P-CAD Schematic.
385
APPENDIX
P-CAD System Messages

This appendix documents the messages that you might encounter when importing or exporting a
PDIF file in P- CAD PCB or P-CAD Schematic.
Error Messages
Error Message
Cause
Solution
A reference designator is
required in instance <name>
near line <line number>.
The reference designator is

missing.
Enter the reference designator

and try again
Bad PIN_DEF record #<number>

near line <line number>. Pad
ignored.
A syntax error was encountered. A PIN_DEF entry is malformed.
Check the PDIF file at the designated line number to determine

the cause. Then consult your PDIF
manual to correct the syntax.
Component instance <name>

(<ref des>) pin <pin des>
references an unknown net
<name> near line <line
number>.
The net does not exist.
Either create it in Master Designer

or reset the pins net name.
Data in this design extends

beyond 60 square inches. Load
aborted.
P-CAD PCB allows a maximum

of 60 square inches for a
design. This design is too big.
Either make it smaller or break up

the design.
Device expected on line <line

number> of <file name>.
Each entry in a cross-reference

file has a device, but one was
not found.
Add the device name at the

specified line number.
387
Appendix c: P-CAD System Messages
Error Message
Error Messages
Cause
Solution
Duplicate pin designator <pin

des> in instance <name> near
line <line number>. Pin ignored.
P-CAD PCB and Schematic do

not allow duplicate pin
designators. The duplicate
pins will not show up in the
resulting component.
Edit the PDIF file to change the pin

designators.
Duplicate reference designator

<reference designator> in
instance <name> near line <line
number>. Instance ignored.
A duplicate reference
designator was found. P-CAD
PCB and Schematic do not
support duplicate reference
designators. This instance was
ignored.
Either change the reference

designator in Master Designer or
edit the PDIF file and change the
Rd statement.
Equal sign expected on line <line

A syntax error was

encountered. An entry in a
cross-reference file may have
the power and ground pins
listed.
Enter an equal sign. The for mat is

(<pin des> = <net name>,...). The
system logs this error if it
encounters a pin designator,
which is not followed by an equal
sign.
File revision number is

unrecognized.
The PDIF version number was

not recognized.
Use a PDIF file from Master

Designer version 6.0 or later.
Gate number expected on line

<line number> of <file name>.
A syntax error was

encountered. Each entry in a
cross-reference file has a gate
number, but one was not
found.
Check the PDIF file at the

designated line number to deter
mine the cause. Then consult your
PDIF manual to correct the syntax.
Instance <name> referenced an

undefined component
(COMP_DEF=<name>) near line
<line number>.
A syntax error was

encountered. An instance
references the name of a
COMP_DEF that was not
defined prior to the instance.

designated line number to
determine the cause. Then consult
your PDIF manual to correct the
syntax.
Keyword expected on line <line

number>.
A syntax error was

encountered.

determine cause. Then consult
your PDIF manual to correct the
syntax.
Left paren expected on line <line

A syntax error was

encountered.
Correct the syntax. The format is

encounters a net name, which is
not followed by a left paren or
comma.
388
Error Messages
Error Message
Cause
Solution
Load failed near line <line

number>.
A syntax error was

encountered.

mine the cause. Then consult your
PDIF manual to correct the syntax.
Net name expected on line <line

A syntax error was

encountered.

encounters an equal sign, which is
not followed by a net name.
No {Lystr...} section found.
A syntax error was

encountered.

mine cause.
No pad stacks defined near line

<line number>.
PDIF PCBs require an attached

PAD_STACK record to load
properly into P-CAD PCB.
Edit the PDIF file at the designated

line number to include the name
of the attached pad stack.
Not enough memory.
This means the system could

not allocate enough memory
to do its work.
Close some applications and try

again.
Pad stack <name> has shape

<pdif object>
(<number>X<number>) that is
smaller than both the pad hole
size (<number>) and the via hole
size (<number>) near line <line
number>. Hole size set to 0.
A pad type (Pt) is trying to set

too big a hole. The hole is
assigned either through the
tool table file or the pad/via
default sizes specified in the
PCB.INI file.
Either change the default pad/ via

hole sizes in the PCB.INI file, or
change the specified tool table.
Part file name expected on line

Each entry in a cross-reference

file has a part file name, but
one was not found.

determine the cause.
P-CAD attribute near (x, y) has

no value.
This message means that the

system found a Master
Designer attribute that does
not have a value.
N/A
PDIF item <pdif object> is not

supported in nets.
Some PDIF objects are not

supported in P-CAD PCB or
Schematic nets.
Remove the object and try again.
Pin <pin des> of part <part

number> of component <name>
could not be added near line
<line number>.
A memory or resource limit

has been reached.
N/A
389
Error Message
Error Messages
Cause
Solution
Pin number expected on line

A syntax error was

encountered. An entry in a
cross-reference file may have
the power and ground pins
listed.

encounters a equal sign, which is
not preceded by a pin number.
Power or ground pin <pin des>

for component <name> does not
have a net name or a pin name.
A power pin was found that

does not have a net name or
does not have a pin name.

mine the cause.
Right paren expected on line

An entry in a cross-reference
file may have the power and
ground pins listed. The format
is (<pin des> = <net
name>,...).The system logs this
error if it encounters a equal
sign, which is not preceded by
a pin number.

mine the cause.
Symbol file name expected on

line <line number> of <file
name>.
A syntax error was

encountered. Each entry in a
cross-reference file has a
symbol file name, but one was
not found.

mine the cause.
Too many power and ground

pins for error file.
If a component is
heterogeneous, the system
writes the cross-reference file
lines to the error file. The
cross-reference file line
consists of the number of
gates, the device, the part file
name, the power and ground
pins, and the symbol file
name. There is a limit to how
many power and ground pins
can be written to the error file.
This message means that limit
was exceeded
Edit the cross-reference file and

add any pins that are missing.
390
Error Messages
Error Message
Cause
Solution
Too many symbols on this sheet

to create P-CAD symbol name.
P-CAD symbol instances

require a name. This names
format consists of NCssssxxxx;
where ssss is sheet number
and xxxx is a symbol number.
This only allows for 9999
symbols on a sheet. If the
system detects that there are
more than 9999 symbols on a
sheet, which require a symbol
name, it logs this error.
Create a new sheet and move

some of the parts onto it.
Unable to open file <file name>.
This could mean that the file

does not exist, or that the
system is trying to open for
writing a read-only file.
Make sure the specified file exists

and that it is not a read- only file.
Unable to rename file <file

name> to <file name>.
This could mean that the file

the system is trying to rename
does not exist, or that a file
already exists that it is trying
to rename it to.
Make sure the specified file exists

and that it is not a read- only file.
Unable to translate text object

near (x, y).
The system was unable to get

the data from a text object so
that it could be translated.
N/A
Unable to translate text style for

text object near (x, y).
The system found a text object

that is using an
unrecognizable text style.
N/A
Unrecognized CN format in
instance <name> near line <line
number>.
A syntax error was

encountered.
Make sure the CN syntax is

correct. The CN format can be of 2
styles: {CN <net name> ...} Or
{CN <pin name> <net name> ...}.
Unrecognized justification style.
You are using a justification

style that is currently
unrecognizable to the system.
Use a justification style that the

system recognizes.
391
Warning Messages
Warning Messages
Warning Message
Explanation
Attribute key too long near

(x, y).
PDIF format allows only 23 characters for an attribute key. The system
found a key with more than 23 characters.
Attribute object near (x, y)

has no value.
The system found an attribute with no value. PDIF format requires a value
so this attribute was ignored by the system.
Attribute value too long

near (x, y).
PDIF format allows only 255 characters for an attribute value. The system
found an attribute value with more than 255 characters. The attribute
value is translated truncated to 255 characters.
Cannot open file <file

name>.
This could mean that the file does not exist, or that the system is trying to
open for writing a read only file.
COMP_DEF <name> has a

package pin number
(<number>) that is out of
range near line <line
number>.
The pin number specified in the SPKG Sp record does not map to any pad
in the PIN_DEF record. Either the pin des number is greater than the
number of pads or a pad with the same name (number) could not be
found.
COMP_DEF <name> has no

SPKG section near line
<line number>. Pin names
will start at '1'.
The COMP_DEF has no pin to pad mapping (packaging) information. The

components pins created will have pin designators that match the pad's
position in the PIN_DEF array. The component is most likely a PCB only
component.
COMP_DEF <name>
references unknown pad
stack <number>. Style
<name> used instead.
A pad references a padstack number (Pt) that is not defined in the

PAD_STACK record. The PCB (Default) padstack will be used instead.
Component <name> has

had its name changed to
<name>. This is required to
maintain uniqueness in
P-CAD.
A components type in Master Designer is used as the file name for the
symbol data. This limits the components type to 8 characters. In P-CAD
PCB and Schematic, the components type can be 17 characters. This
means that the type is truncated to 8 characters and slightly modified to
make it unique if there is more than one component that has that 8
character prefix.
Component <name> is
heterogeneous and will be
written as <number>
separate COMP_DEFs.
Cross reference file data
follows:
Master Designer does not allow heterogeneous components. During

translation the heterogeneous components are separated into
homogeneous components. The cross-reference file data is included in
the error file for your convenience.
392
Warning Messages
Warning Message
Component <Ref Des>,
type <type> was given a
PRT attribute of <PRT
attribute value> which may
cause packaging errors in PCAD.
Explanation
The PRT attribute value is the file name for the PCB part data. The value is
created by combining the type with .prt. In P-CAD PCB and Schematic,
the type can be longer than 8 characters.
If the type is longer than 8 character, this is an illegal file name. You will
need to fix this attribute in Master Designer before you can package the
schematic.
Copper Pour not allowed in

pattern <name> (<ref des>)
Pour demoted to polygon.
PCB does not support copper pours in patterns. The pour was converted
to a polygon, which is supported.
Could not create pad/via

style for pad <number>
A memory or resource limit has been reached. Reduce the number of

padstack in the design or simplify their construction.
Cross reference file missing

entry for <name>. Unable
to attach symbol name for
multipart component.
The attached symbol name could not be added to the component

because there was no cross-reference file entry for the part.
Heterogeneous component
<name> is missing gates
<part number>. Parts <ref
des> cannot be placed.
Place the missing gates as
spares and reload.
Heterogeneous components are found in the cross-reference file but the

PDIF data is not found in the PDIF file. If you place the missing gates in
Master Designer, re-create the PDIF file, the PDIF data will be included
and a complete heterogeneous component can be created in Schematic.
Homogeneous part
<name> has non-constant
gate equivalencies.
Master Designer does not store gate equivalence. The system is warning
you that it found a homogeneous part with non- constant gate
equivalencies.
Iat value too long at line

<line number>.
PDIF format allows only 255 characters for an Iat value. The system found
an Iat value with more than 255 characters. The attribute value is
translated truncated to 255 characters.
Instance <name> does not

specify a location, (0,0)
assumed, near line <line
number>.
The instance Pl record is missing.
Instance <name> has an

illegal IPT record near line
<line number>.
The number of entries in the instance Ipt record does not match the
number of entries in the COMP_DEF PIN_DEF record.
393
Warning Message
Warning Messages
Explanation
Instance <name>
referenced a package
number (<part number>)
that does not exist in
COMP_DEF <name> near
line <line number>.
An instance of a heterogeneous component references a part number

that is not defined for the number of parts in the component. The
heterogeneous information in the cross-reference file may be incorrect.
Layer name <name> has

been truncated to <name>.
The layer name is used as the PDIF file name. File names are limited to 8
characters. The system truncates the layer name to 8 characters and if
necessary, slightly modifies it to make it unique if there are more than
one layer that have the same first 8 characters.
Missing pad stack name for

pad/ via <number> near
line <line number>.
A syntax error was encountered. The padstack name is missing from the
PAD_STACK record.
Name <name> truncated to

<number> characters near
line <line number>.
The objects name was too long and truncated so that it would be a valid
PCB or Schematic name.
Net <name> attribute lost.

<key> = <value>.
Master Designer does not have net attributes. When the system warns
you when it detects a net attribute.
<number> pin(s) were

created for a <number> pin
symbol
(COMP_DEF=<name>,
I=<name>) near line <line
number>.
The number of entries in the PIN_DEF record does not match the number
of Sp records in the SPKG record.
Object near line <line

number> failed to load.
A syntax error was encountered. Check the PDIF file at the designated
line number to determine cause.
Pad stack <name> does not

have consistent enough
shapes to set the
predefined '(Signal)' layer
Pad/via style layer '(Signal)'
set to 0.
The padstack shape defined for the Top layer does not match the shape
defined for the Bottom layer.
PDIF item <pdif object> is

not supported in nets.
Some PDIF objects are not supported in PCB or Schematic nets. It could
be a DRC error indicator.
PDIF item <pdif object> is

not supported in pad
stacks.
Some PDIF objects are not supported in PCB pad stacks. These include
polygons, text, flashes and lines.
394
The padstack shapes defined for internal signal layers are not all the
same.
Warning Messages
Warning Message
Explanation
PID too long at line <line

number>. Truncated.
Master Designers PID is equivalent to PCBs type attribute. The PID is

limited to 15 characters. If PCBs type attribute is longer than 15
characters, it is truncated to 15 characters.
Power and ground attribute

is too long for symbol
<name>.
If you get this warning and are not using Master Designer Version 8.0
software, switch to Version 8.0 if possible. Version 8.0 uses multiple
PWGDi attributes to handle case. If you are using Version 8.0 and still get
this message the PWGDi attribute is truncated. If you cannot use Version
8.0 and are getting this message, the PWGD attribute is truncated.
Power pin <pin des> of

component <name> could
not be added near line
<line number>. Probably
duplicate.
A duplicate power pin was detected in the component. Check the cross
reference file or the PWGD(i) attribute(s) and try again.
Rotation rounded to
<angle> at line <line
number>.
Master Designer Schematic can only be rotated to 0, 90, 180, 270. If a

rotation other than those values is detected, the object is rotated to the
nearest allowable angle.
Symbol <name> already

exists in table on line <line
A duplicated symbol file name was found in the cross-reference file. First
one found is used. Others are discarded.
Text height is less than 2 at

line <line number>.
P-CAD PCB and Schematics text height is used as the text size for PDIF
translation. Master Designers text size cannot be less than 2. If a text
height is found to be less than 2, 2 is used.
Text object near (x, y) has

no string, object ignored.
An empty text object was found and ignored.
Text too long near (x, y).
Text is limited to 255 characters. Text is truncated to 255.
The number of components

pins created for <name>
does not match the number
of PIN_DEF entries near line
<line number>. Power pins
might be missing.
The number of P statements in the COMP_DEFs PIN_DEF section

determines the number of pins.
The number of pins in

section <part number>
(COMP_DEF=<name>) is
not equal to the number of
pins defined (PIN_DEF)
A PKG part section does not have the same number of entries (pins) as
the PIN_DEF record.
395
Warning Message
Warning Messages
Explanation
Translating TangoPRO
polygon object near (x, y)
as P-CAD lines.
Master Designer Schematic does not have a filled polygon object. If the
system detects a polygon object is translates it as lines for Master
Designer.
Unrecognized keyword
<key> near line <line
number>. Keyword
ignored.
A syntax error was encountered. Check the PDIF file at the designated
line number to determine cause.
Via references unknown

pad stack <number>. Style
<name> used instead.
The padstack number referenced by a via does not exist. The via style
used will be <name>, probably '(Default)'.
396
APPENDIX
The Tango Netlist Format

A Tango netlist file is an ASCII text file, with a carriage return and a line feed at the end of every
line. The netlist is divided into two sections: the component section and the net section.
The Component Section

This section describes each component in the netlist, such as the component type, reference
designator, cost, ordering code, etc.
There can be any number of component descriptions in the component section. Each component
description is contained within square brackets [ ], with each square bracket being the first and
only character on a line.
The component description has the following format:
[
refdes
package
type
(blank line)
(blank line)
]
The refdes is the reference designator, which can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. All
letters in the reference designator must be upper-case. (For example: U1, R3, XTAL2.)
The package is the component package, which must be the name of a PCB library pattern. The
package can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. All letters in the package must be
upper-case. (For example: DIP40, RES400, DB9.)
The type is the component type. The type can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. (For
example: Z80ACPU, 47K, 4.00 MHz, DB9.)
397
Appendix d: The Tango Netlist Format
The Net Section
The following example is a netlist description for Z80ACPU:

[
U5
DIP40
Z80ACPU
]
The Net Section

This section contains one or more net definitions. A net is a group of nodes to be connected
together. A node consists of a component label, a delimiter and a pin designator.
There can be any number of nets in the net section. Each net is contained within parentheses ( ),
with each parenthesis being the first and only character on a line.
Each net in the net section has the following format:
(
net
node
node
.
.
.
node
)
The net is the net name, which can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters. You can use upper-case
and lower-case characters. Since case is not significant when comparing net names, P-CAD PCB
forces all characters entered to upper-case. Therefore, do not use case alone to distinguish net
names. Do not use parentheses or square brackets for the first character in a net name.
The lines after the net name contain the nodes in the net, with one node per line. Each node
consists of:
A component name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters long)
A single-character delimiter (a hyphen or a comma)
A pin designator (up to 16 alphanumeric characters long)
Each node is scanned from left to right until the first occurrence of a delimiter (a hyphen or a
comma) is found. Everything to the left of the delimiter is considered the component name;
398
The Net Section
Appendix d: The Tango Netlist Format
everything to the right is considered the pin designator. Do not use any of the delimiter characters
in your component names, since this will cause the program to incorrectly read the netlist.
A node must appear only once in the netlist, since by definition a node can only belong to one net.
A node appearing in more than one net would imply that those nets should be joined into one net,
since they have the node in common. If a node appears in more than one net, P-CAD PCB issues an
error message and halts the netlist load.
A sample net section is shown as follows:
(
A0
U1-10
U2-10
U3-10
U4-10
U5-30
U6-34
)
(
CPUCLK
R5-2
U6-20
U9-6
)
(
U10.1_J2.2
J2-2
U10-1
)
399
Index
-AAbout the Users Guide.................................2
absolute grid toggle ...................................296
adding
custom fields ............................................104
field sets.....................................................106
net attributes ..............................................60
Note Table notes .....................................112
object values...............................................55
Revision Note Table ................................115
title sheets ...................................19, 293, 312
wires ...........................................................264
Alias, Library command .............................320
Align Parts, Edit command ........................237
aligning parts
horizontally or vertically ..........................87
All, View command ....................................252
altering ...................see editing or modifying
arc
changing centerpoint .............................274
modifying size ..........................................225
resizing ................................................89, 274
rotating/flipping.......................................274
width...........................................................225
Arc, Place command...................................273
Archive Library, Library command..........327
Arrange Icons, Window command.........373
Ascend, View command............................255
ASCII files
opening........................................................22
saving .........................................................171
assigning
field sets.....................................................107
Attribute Properties....................................228
Attribute, Place command ........................279
attributes
adding........................................................ 160
deleting ..................................................... 160
editing ....................................................... 160
name .......................................................... 279
net
adding .......................................................95
deleting.....................................................95
editing .......................................................95
Part Number............................................. 279
Part Properties ......................................... 218
RefDes ....................................................... 279
reference .................................................. 229
reference link
launching..................................................95
rotating/flipping ...................................... 280
Type ........................................................... 279
Value.......................................................... 279
autopanning
adjusting ................................................... 295
percent display, defined...........................17
autosave ....................................................... 294
compress .................................................. 294
AutoSave
defined .........................................................17
-Bbackup file, creating .................................. 170

block selection
defined .........................................................82
error indicators........................................ 137
items .......................................................... 288
modes defined ...........................................83
Block Selection, Options command ...... 287
bounding outline ....................................... 253
bus
connections ............................................. 266
definition .......................................... 240, 265
401
Appendix d: Index
The Net Section
displaying name .......................................220

highlight.....................................................246
line length, measuring............................266
orthogonal modes ...................................266
resizing.........................................................89
unhighlight................................................246
Bus, Place command ..................................265
buttons
Command Toolbar ..................................256
Placement Toolbar...................................256
-CCascade, Window command....................373

Center, View command.............................252
changing ............... see editing or modifying
checked command, defined.........................7
circles, placing .............................................273
class editor....................................................310
clear all overrides
ERC..............................................................336
clearance rules.............................................304
Clipboard
copying objects to .....................................91
defined.........................................................89
pasting objects from .................................93
close button ...................................................13
Close, File command..................................170
collocated objects, defined ........................80
colors
custom colors ...........................................298
defining preferences ................................28
display colors............................................298
Display Colors frame ..............................175
highlight.....................................................240
item colors ................................................298
Item Colors frame....................................175
Options Display .......................................297
print ....................................................172, 174
print setup .................................................142
unhighlight................................................240
Command Toolbar, View command...8, 256
component
copying ......................................................322
deleting from a library ............................323
renaming....................................................324
replacing types .........................................233
Compress binary designs..........................295
402
Configure, Options command ................ 292

connecting
wires to a bus ............................................. 40
Copy Matrix, Edit command .................... 236
Copy to File, Edit command..................... 203
Copy, Edit command ................................. 203
Copy, Library command ........................... 321
copying .................................. see also pasting
a matrix of objects..................................... 92
circuitry ....................................................... 56
multiple items between libraries......... 322
nets............................................................... 91
objects ....................................................... 248
objects to a file .......................................... 91
objects to the Clipboard.......................... 91
single items between libraries ............. 322
creating
backup files ................................................ 17
connections between files...................... 18
custom reports ........................................ 120
DXF files .................................................... 195
field sets .................................................... 106
global nets .................................................. 42
macros ......................................................... 12
matrix of objects........................................ 92
title sheets................................................. 101
CTRL/SHIFT behavior, setting .................... 81
Current Line, Options command ........... 313
current sheet, defined................................. 12
Current Wire, Options command .......... 312
cursor
free floating .............................................. 257
snappy ....................................................... 257
custom title sheets ....................................... 98
Custom Toolbar.............................................. 9
displaying.................................................. 353
Custom Toolbar, View command........... 256
custom tools
executing .................................................. 354
Customize, Utils command...................... 352
Cut, Edit command .................................... 203
cutting................see also deletingor pasting
objects from a design............................... 90
-DDataTips
defined ........................................................ 15
The Net Section
showing or hiding .....................................15

DDE Hotlinks ...............................................295
about ..........................................................127
Edit Parts ....................................................129
enabling.....................................................127
highlighting parts ....................................129
selecting highlighted objects................131
unhighlighting parts ...............................129
default file viewer
selecting a viewer ......................................16
default pin designators..............................332
Delete, Edit command ...............................234
Delete, Library command .........................323
Delete, Macro command ..........................364
deleting
ERC errors .................................................137
items in a block ........................................288
nets .............................................................246
objects........................................................234
objects from nets.......................................94
ports ...........................................................269
reports........................................................178
the current sheet .......................................20
Descend, View command .........................255
Deselect All, Edit command .....................238
design borders
adding a design border ..........................102
border dimensions....................................98
design border, defined ............................98
zones ............................................................99
Design Info, File command ......................183
Design Rules, Options command ...........303
dialog..........................................................188
Design Technology Parameters, File
command......................................................188
dialogs
Add Text Style...........................................314
Arc Properties...........................................225
Attributes...................................................243
Attributes Properties ..............................228
Bus Connection Properties ...................266
Bus Name ..................................................245
Bus Properties ..........................................220
Change Attribute Value .........................306
Edit Copy Matrix ......................................236
Appendix d: Index
Edit Net Class To Net Class Definitions

.............................................................. 308
Edit Nets.................................................... 241
Edit Part ..................................................... 239
Field Properties ....................................... 230
Find Errors ................................................ 232
Force Update ........................................... 333
Hierarchy Navigator ............................... 255
Library Alias.............................................. 320
Library Archive Library........................... 327
Library Browes......................................... 320
Library Copy............................................. 322
Library Delete .......................................... 324
Library Setup............................................ 325
Line Properties ........................................ 224
Line Selection Mask ............................... 289
Net Classes ....................................... 306, 309
Net Name.................................................. 244
Options Block Selection ....................... 287
Options Configure ................................. 292
Options Current Line............................. 313
Options Current Wire ........................... 312
Options Design Rules............ 303, 304, 307
Options Display ...................................... 297
Options Grid............................................ 295
Options Preferences .............................. 301
Options Sheets........................................ 311
Options Text Style .................................. 314
Part Properties ......................................... 233
Part Selection Mask ................................ 290
Pin Properties .......................................... 222
Pin Selection Mask ................................. 290
Place Attribute ................................. 243, 279
Place Field................................................. 281
Place IEEE Symbol ................................... 282
Place Part................................................... 260
Place Pin .................................................... 269
Place Port .................................................. 267
Place Properties....................................... 229
Polygon Properties ................................. 226
Port Properties......................................... 221
Port Selection Mask................................ 291
Properties ................................................. 229
Rename Style ........................................... 315
Save Component As............................... 327
Set By Attribute ....................................... 305
Symbol Save As ....................................... 326
403
Appendix d: Index
Text Properties .........................................224

Text Selection Mask ................................292
Text Style Properties ...............................315
Utils Electrical Rules Check ...................334
Utils Renumber ........................................329
View Jump Location ................................253
View Jump Text ........................................254
Wire Properties ........................................218
Wire Selection Mask ...............................292
Display, Options command......................297
DocTool Commands ..................................357
Notes ..........................................................359
Place Table ................................................357
Titles ...........................................................359
Update........................................................359
Update All..................................................359
DocTool Toolbar .............................................9
double-click display properties.................94
draft mode for polygons ...........................275
drag and drop ..............................................248
Drawing Interchange Format ...................190
DRC errors............................................176, 300
DTPs
about...........................................................147
adding
groups .....................................................150
items ........................................................153
sections...................................................151
browsing ....................................................153
copying data..............................................156
creating ......................................................148
deleting information...............................154
item specific info .....................................158
modifying properties ..............................159
opening......................................................148
renaming
groups and items..................................154
setting up attributes ................................158
tree, defined .............................................189
updating design info...............................155
viewing item statistics.............................155
duplicating objects .....................................236
DXF Files
loading .......................................................190
supported items.......................................192
DXF In, File command................................190
DXF Out
404
The Net Section
considerations ......................................... 196

DXF Out, File command............................ 195
DXF, defined................................................ 195
-EECOs.............................................................. 294
exporting................................................... 340
formatting defined.................................... 17
importing .................................................. 339
recording .................................................. 338
types of changes...................................... 339
Edit Commands........................................... 201
Align Parts ................................................. 237
Copy....................................................... 7, 203
Copy Matrix........................................ 92, 236
Copy to File .............................................. 203
Cut .......................................................... 7, 203
Delete ........................................................ 234
Deselect All .............................................. 238
Explode Part.............................................. 237
Highlight ................................................... 238
Measure .................................................... 246
Move By RefDes ...................................... 209
Nets ............................................................ 240
Parts............................................................ 239
Paste ....................................................... 7, 204
Circuit..................................................... 206
Circuit From File................................... 208
From Clipboard .................................... 205
From File ................................................ 205
Properties.................................................. 211
Redo ........................................................... 202
Select ......................................................... 247
Select All ................................................... 238
Select Highlight ....................................... 238
Undo .......................................................... 201
Unhighlight .............................................. 238
Unhighlight All ........................................ 238
editing...............................see also modifying
Arc properties .......................................... 225
attributes................................................... 228
DTP attributes .......................................... 160
DTP properties......................................... 159
Field properties ....................................... 230
field results ............................................... 105
fields........................................................... 231
items in a block........................................ 288
The Net Section
Line properties.........................................224
macros........................................................367
net attributes ..............................................95
nets ...............................................................94
Pin Designator..........................................224
Pin properties...........................................222
Polygon properties..................................226
properties....................................................52
reports........................................................119
tables ..........................................................117
Text properties.........................................227
electrical pin type .......................................217
Electrical Rule Check flags........................232
electrical rule checking .............................334
Enabling
DDE Hotlinks ............................................127
Engineering Change Order (ECO)..........338
ERC
annotate errors ........................................134
Bus/Net Errors ..........................................134
clear all overrides ....................................336
Component Errors...................................134
configuration............................................133
Hierarchy Errors.......................................336
Net Connectivity Errors..........................335
No Node Nets...................................134, 335
setting up checks.....................................133
severity levels ...........................................336
Single Node Nets.............................134, 335
summarize ignored checks ...................135
summarize ignored errors.....................336
summarize overridden errors...............336
Unconnected Pins ...................................335
Unconnected Wires........................134, 335
ERC Error, View command........................232
ERC errors
controlling display of..............................136
finding........................................................135
fixing and deleting ..................................137
overriding..................................................137
ERC, Utils command...................................334
error indicators
overriding..................................................137
Existing module
reusing .......................................................348
Exit, File command......................................199
Explode Part, Edit command.....................237
Appendix d: Index
Export ECOs, Utils command .................. 340

exporting
Note Table notes..................................... 112
Revision Note Table ............................... 115
Extent, View command ............................. 251
-Ffeatures..............................................................1
Field, Place command ............................... 280
fields
code, defined........................................... 103
Field Properties ....................................... 230
field sets, defined ................................... 106
fields defined........................................... 103
result, defined ......................................... 103
rotating/flipping ...................................... 281
user-defined fields ................................. 183
file
compression
autosave................................................. 294
binary designs ...................................... 295
Design Info
Attributes tab........................................ 185
Fields tab................................................ 184
General tab ........................................... 183
Revisions Tab........................................ 187
Statistics tab .......................................... 188
pasting from................................................93
statistics..................................................... 183
viewer ...........................................................16
File Commands
Close.......................................................... 170
Design Info............................................... 183
Design Technology Parameters........... 188
DXF In ........................................................ 190
DXF Out .................................................... 195
Exit .............................................................. 199
New............................................................ 169
Open...................................................... 6, 169
PDIF In....................................................... 197
PDIF Out ................................................... 198
Print............................................................ 172
Printer Setup ............................................ 177
Reports ...................................................... 177
Save............................................................ 170
Save As ...................................................... 171
file viewer .................................................... 295
405
Appendix d: Index
The Net Section
Find Errors, Utils command ......................337

fixing
ERC errors..................................................137
errors in a design .......................................66
flip object key ..............................................380
Force Update, Utils command .................333
-Ggate equivalence .........................................217

GateEq ...........................................................217
gates
last used .....................................................116
replacing component types of..............233
spare ...........................................................116
Generate Netlist, Utils command....124, 342
generating
reports........................................................119
global net ......................................................108
grid
snap cursor to...........................................257
grid options
absolute and relative settings ...............296
Grid Combo box ........................................11
Grid Spacing .............................................296
Grid Style ...................................................296
Grid Toggle button....................................11
Mode ..........................................................297
Relative Grid Origin ................................296
Grids, Options command .........................295
Ground Table...............................................113
-Hhardware requirements.................................3
Help Commands .........................................375
help key.........................................................379
help, online ..................................................375
Hiding
DataTips .......................................................15
toolbars ..........................................................7
Hierarchical schematics
ascend ........................................................255
black box ...................................................345
descend......................................................255
introduction..............................................345
highlight................................................130, 240
an attached net.................................130, 240
parts ............................................................129
Highlight, Edit command ..........................238
406
hotlinks,enabling........................................ 295
-Iicons
Command Toolbar.................................. 256
Placement Toolbar.................................. 256
IEEE Symbol, Place command .................. 282
ignored errors
ERD ............................................................. 336
imperial units .............................................. 293
Import ECOs, Utils command ................. 339
importing ..............................see also loading
Note Table notes ..................................... 112
Revision Note Table................................ 115
inside block
defined ........................................................ 83
installing P-CAD products......................... 4
system requirements.................................. 3
InterPlace/PCS, Utils command .............. 352
-JJump Location, View command .............. 253

Jump Text, View command ...................... 254
jumper pins.......................... 262, 264, 268, 344
-Kkeyboard shortcut
drag-and-drop cut/paste........................ 377
Schematic Reference.............................. 377
view center ............................................... 252
zoom out................................................... 252
zoom window .......................................... 252
Keyboard tab ............................................... 302
-LLast, View command.................................. 251

library
create an alias........................................... 320
creating new............................................. 319
definition .................................................. 319
deleting symbol/component from ...... 323
opening a .................................................. 325
opening with drag-and-drop file load 325
purpose ..................................................... 319
renaming a symbol or component...... 324
Library Commands..................................... 319
Alias............................................................ 320
The Net Section
Appendix d: Index
Archive Library .........................................327

Copy ...........................................................321
Delete.........................................................323
New.............................................................319
Rename ......................................................324
Setup ..........................................................325
Symbol Save As ........................................326
Line, Place command .................................272
lines
line length, measuring............................272
line shapes, orthogonal modes............273
properties..................................................224
resizing ........................................................89
selection criteria ......................................290
using orthogonal modes..........................88
linking
references .................................................229
loading .................................see also opening
DXF files.....................................................190
reports........................................................178
Loading PDIF files .......................................197
local net ........................................................108
location, jumping to...................................253
-MMacro Commands ......................................361

Delete.........................................................364
Record..................................................12, 362
Rename ......................................................364
Run..............................................................365
Setup ..........................................................361
macros
edit events.................................................371
editing ........................................................367
executing...................................................363
features ......................................................366
file syntax...........................................367, 371
keyboard codes .......................................368
keyboard events ......................................368
mouse events ...........................................367
recording tool ..........................................362
running ..............................................365, 366
special events ...........................................371
status line indicators...............................366
temporary..................................................363
temporary macro name..........................363
using effectively.......................................365
Manual, Rewire command ....................... 285

matrix, defined...............................................92
maximize button ...........................................13
Measure, Edit command........................... 246
menu bar
defined ...........................................................6
menu commands ............................................6
merging
net attributes............................................ 207
metric units.................................................. 293
MillimeterPrecision setting...................... 293
minimize button............................................13
modes
changing absolute and relative grid ... 297
pairs, defined ..............................................88
modifying...............................see also editing
arcs ............................................................. 274
field results............................................... 105
objects ..........................................................50
reports ....................................................... 119
tables ......................................................... 117
Module Wizard
creating a link .......................................... 346
creating a module................................... 346
introduction ............................................. 345
reusing an existing module .................. 348
Module Wizard, Utils command ............ 345
Mouse tab .................................................... 302
Mouse-Click Behavior
double-click displays properties ............94
Move By RefDes, Edit command............. 209
moving
a toolbar.........................................................7
an object ......................................................84
items in a block ....................................... 288
objects ..........................................................50
objects during placement ........................84
parts by RefDes ................................. 84, 209
ports........................................................... 268
rotating and flipping objects...................86
multiple selection, defined.........................79
Multisheet designs
loading .........................................................21
-Nnet
attributes
407
Appendix d: Index
The Net Section
merge when pasting ............................207

copy ..............................................................91
creating named net classes ...................310
Delete command .....................................246
deleting objects from .............................235
highlight.....................................................245
increment ..................................................294
increment value, defined.........................17
local vs. global ..........................................108
managing net connections; .....................95
netlist format
Tango.......................................................397
netlist, generating..................... 70, 124, 342
renaming............................................208, 244
Select command ......................................246
unhighlight................................................245
net attribute selection..................................57
Net Classes, Options command ..............309
Net Index Tables .........................................111
placing........................................................111
Nets, Edit command ...................................240
New, File command....................................169
New, Library command .............................319
New, Window command ..........................373
Note Tables ..................................................112
adding notes .............................................112
exporting notes ........................................112
importing notes .......................................112
placing........................................................113
numbering pads ..........................................329
-Oobjects
nets
deleting.....................................................94
pasting........................................................204
properties ....................................................94
selecting preferences ...............................81
Open, File command .................................169
opening ................................. see also loading
ASCII Files ...................................................22
menus.............................................................6
multisheet designs ....................................21
Schematic Files (*.sch)..............................21
Tango Series II Files ..................................21
Options Commands
Block Selection.........................................287
408
Configure.................................................. 292
Current Line ............................................. 313
Current Wire ............................................ 312
Design Rules ............................................ 303
Display ....................................................... 297
Grids........................................................... 295
Net Classes ............................................... 309
Preferences............................................... 301
Sheets ........................................................ 311
Text Style................................................... 314
Class to Class tab..................................... 308
Design tab................................................. 303
Net tab ....................................................... 307
Orthogonal Modes .................................... 273
45/90 Line-Line Mode ....................... 88, 294
90/90 Line-Line Mode ....................... 88, 294
enabling .................................................... 294
enabling ortho modes ............................. 88
mode pairs, defined ................................. 88
ortho modes,defined ............................... 88
output
netlist ......................................................... 124
outside block
defined ........................................................ 83
overridden errors ....................................... 336
Overriding
-Ppad number ................................................. 217

panning
screen, adjusting ..................................... 295
setting the autopan % display ................ 17
part
exploding .................................................. 237
highlight an attached net ...................... 240
highlight/unhighlight ............................. 240
jump to .............................................. 239, 240
list box ....................................................... 239
number...................................................... 217
placing ......................................................... 32
power components ................................ 262
properties ................................................. 239
selection criteria...................................... 290
splitting a net ........................................... 262
Part Properties............................................. 212
The Net Section
Attributes Pin tab.....................................218

Component Pin tab.................................216
Component tab........................................215
Symbol Pins tab........................................214
Symbol tab ................................................213
Text Styles button....................................214
Part, Place command..................................259
Parts, Edit command...................................239
Paste, Edit command ..................................204
pasting
behavior.....................................................204
circuits........................................................206
circuits from a file....................................208
Clipboard objects......................................93
from a file ............................................93, 205
from clipboard .........................................205
P-CAD Binary Files
loading multisheet designs .....................21
opening .SCH files.....................................21
P-CAD CFG Files (*.cfg) ...............................21
P-CAD Library Executive, Utils command
........................................................................352
P-CAD Pattern Editor, Utils command ...352
P-CAD PCB, Utils command .....................351
P-CAD Schematic window, defined ...........5
P-CAD Symbol Editor, Utils command...352
P-CAD system messages ...........................387
PDIF files.......................................................197
PDIF In, File command ..............................197
PDIF Out, File command...........................198
pin
designator .................................................217
modifying text .......................................223
moving....................................................224
display ........................................................223
display characteristics ............................224
equivalence...............................................217
name...........................................................217
modifying text .......................................223
moving....................................................224
pin des, renumbering default...............332
renumbering.............................................331
selecting length .......................................223
Pin, Place command ...................................269
PinEq ..............................................................217
pins
Appendix d: Index
display characteristics............................ 271

Place Attributes dialog .............................. 243
Place Commands........................................ 259
Arc 273
Attribute.................................................... 279
Bus.............................................................. 265
Field ........................................................... 280
IEEE Symbol .............................................. 282
Line....................................................... 78, 272
Part ............................................................. 259
Pin 78, 269
Polygon ..................................................... 274
Port....................................................... 78, 267
Ref Point.................................................... 275
Text............................................................. 275
Wire ..................................................... 78, 263
Place Table, DocTool command ............. 357
Placement Toolbar..........................................8
Placement Toolbar, View command ...... 256
placing ................................... see also pasting
arcs ............................................................. 273
attributes................................................... 279
buses.............................................................40
custom fields............................................ 105
fields .......................................................... 280
IEEE symbols............................................. 282
inline ports ............................................... 268
lines............................................................ 272
Net Index Tables ..................................... 111
Note Tables .............................................. 113
objects ..........................................................78
pins............................................................. 269
polygons ................................................... 274
ports..................................................... 41, 267
Power Table.............................................. 114
reference points...................................... 275
Revision Note Table ............................... 116
Spare Gate Table..................................... 117
text ....................................................... 45, 275
wires..............................................................36
play macro key............................................ 380
polygon
altering the shape ................................... 275
complex .................................................... 275
draft mode................................................ 275
query/modify ........................................... 226
resizing a polygon .....................................89
409
Appendix d: Index
rotating/flipping .......................................275
Polygon, Place command ..........................274
port
deleting ......................................................269
moving .......................................................268
placing inline ............................................268
renaming....................................................269
Port Properties
Net tab........................................................221
Port, Place command .................................267
Power Table..................................................113
placing........................................................114
Preferences, Options command .............301
preview ECO file .........................................340
previous view...............................................251
print
colors..................................................172, 174
colors setup ..............................................142
Image Options, defined .........................140
Image Scale, defined...............................140
print job setup..........................................140
Print Region, defined ..............................140
scaling to fit page.....................................145
selecting a printer....................................139
set up ..........................................................173
setting up...................................................139
Print Setup, File command........................177
Print, File command....................................172
prompt line, defined ....................................11
Prompt Line, View command ...................256
properties
arc 225
bus...............................................................220
double clicking to access.......................212
field .............................................................230
line ..............................................................224
part..............................................................212
pin 222
polygon ......................................................226
pop-up menu............................................211
port .............................................................221
replacing component types ..................233
text ..............................................................226
View ERC Errors........................................232
wire .............................................................218
Properties dialog
410
The Net Section
opening the dialog.................................... 94

Properties, Edit command ........................ 211
-RRecord ECOs, Utils command ................. 338

Record, Macro command ......................... 362
recording a macro .............................. 362, 363
Redo, Edit command.................................. 202
redraw, interrupting .................................. 251
Redraw, View command ........................... 251
Ref Point, Place command........................ 275
reference
launching a link ....................................... 160
locations.................................................... 229
reference designators ............................... 217
renaming................................................... 207
renumbering ...................................... 54, 329
relative grid toggle ..................................... 296
removing ......................................see deleting
Rename Net, Utils command................... 343
Rename, Library command ...................... 324
Rename, Macro command ....................... 364
renaming
a net.................................................... 244, 343
while pasting......................................... 208
ports ........................................................... 269
reference designators ............................ 207
sheet names ............................................... 20
renumber
pads............................................................ 329
reference designators ............................ 329
Renumber, Utils command ...................... 329
reordering
sheets in a design...................................... 19
replacing
component types .................................... 233
report
Attributes .................................................. 118
Bill of Materials........................................ 119
custom
adding..................................................... 120
formats ................................................... 179
selections............................................... 181
sorting .................................................... 182
extensions................................................. 178
format options ......................................... 121
generating......................................... 119, 123
The Net Section
Appendix d: Index
Global Nets ...............................................119

Last Used RefDes.....................................119
Library Content ........................................119
options.......................................................178
origin ..........................................................179
Parts Location ...........................................119
Parts Usage................................................119
selecting criteria ......................................122
setting
data selection options.........................121
sort options ...........................................122
style format ...............................................179
types ...........................................................178
types of reports........................................118
Reports, File command..............................177
resizing
objects............................................52, 89, 249
Resolve Hierarchy, Utils command ........344
Revision Blocks ...........................................103
Revision Note Table ...................................114
adding ........................................................115
exporting ...................................................115
importing...................................................115
placing........................................................116
Rewire Commands .....................................285
Manual .......................................................285
rotating
items in a block ........................................288
objects..........................................................52
polygons ....................................................275
run temporary macro.................................365
Run, Macro command ...............................365
Run, Simulate command ...........................355
-SSave As, File command ..............................171

Save, File command....................................170
saving
a symbol to a library................................326
an ECO file ................................................341
new name or location.............................171
Schematic Files (*.sch).................................21
Schematic Sheets
adding a sheet ............................................19
changing a sheet name ............................20
defining the current sheet.......................19
deleting a sheet..........................................20
reordering in a design ..............................19

scroll bars, defined .......................................13
search for text ............................................. 254
searching
RefDes list................................................. 211
Select All, Edit command.......................... 238
Select Highlight, Edit command ............. 238
Select, Edit command................................ 247
selecting
a block ..........................................................83
a default file viewer ...................................16
a net ..............................................................81
a printer or plotter.................................. 139
all objects.....................................................80
an object ......................................................78
choosing a selection color.......................82
collocated objects......................................80
contiguous net objects.................... 81, 249
contiguous, defined ..................................81
current highlight color .......................... 128
defining
block selection criteria..........................83
selection preferences ............................81
highlighted objects........................... 80, 131
items in a block ....................................... 288
items, status line info ............................. 247
multiple objects .........................................79
nets............................................................. 246
objects ................................................. 46, 248
overlapping objects................................ 248
part of an object .........................................79
select actions
copying objects.................................... 248
drag and drop....................................... 248
moving ................................................... 248
resizing................................................... 249
rotating and flipping ........................... 249
Selection Mask
dialog.........................................................83
parameters ............................................ 290
specifying a selection point........ 82, 86, 87
setting up
display options ...........................................29
ERC options.................................................63
grid spacing.................................................30
print jobs................................................... 140
411
Appendix d: Index
printers and plotters ...............................139

Setup, Library command ...........................325
Setup, Macro command ............................361
Setup, Simulate command........................355
severity levels...............................................134
ERC..............................................................336
sheet
adding ..................................................29, 312
connectors
annotating ..............................................108
cross-referencing .................................107
definition..........................................44, 108
example ..................................................107
jump to....................................................110
viewing properties ...............................110
enabling/disabling ...................................311
re-ordering ................................................312
Sheets, Options command .......................311
Shortcut Directory, Utils command........351
shortcut menu, defined...............................13
Showing
DataTips .......................................................15
toolbars ..........................................................7
Simulate Commands ..................................355
Run..............................................................355
Setup...........................................................355
single selection, defined .............................78
Snap to Grid, View command ..................257
software requirements ..................................3
Spare Gate Table .........................................116
placing........................................................117
splitting a net .................................................59
standard title sheets .....................................98
status line
defined.........................................................11
information ...............................................247
information, defined.................................12
Status Line, View command .....................257
subselection, defined ..................................79
summarize overridden errors
ERC..............................................................336
swapping
pin and gate ..............................................217
switching
between sheets ..........................................35
symbol
copying ......................................................322
412
The Net Section
deleting from a library ........................... 323

pin 217
renaming................................................... 324
Symbol Save As, Library command ........ 326
system
requirements ............................................... 3
-Ttables
modifying.................................................. 117
updating .................................................... 118
tabs
Attributes, Design Info .......................... 185
Attributes, Part Properties..................... 218
Class to Class, Options Design Rules. 308
Colors, Options Display ........................ 297
Colors, Print Options ..................... 142, 174
Component Pins, Part Properties ........ 216
Component, Part Properties................. 215
Design, Options Design Rules ............. 303
Fields, Design Info .................................. 184
Format, Customize Report .................... 179
General, Design Info .............................. 183
Keyboard, Options Preferences .......... 302
Miscellaneous, Options Display.... 29, 176
Miscellaneous, Print Options............... 143
Mouse, Options Preferences ............... 302
Net Class, Options Design Rules......... 304
Net, Options Design Rules ................... 307
Net, Port Properties ................................ 221
Net, Wire Properties............................... 219
Notes, Design Info.................................. 186
Port, Port Properties ............................... 221
Port, Port Selection Mask ...................... 291
Revision, Design Info ............................. 187
Selection, Customize Report Attributes
.............................................................. 181
Sheet Connector, Part Properties........ 110
Sheets, Options Sheets.......................... 311
Sort, Customize Report Attributes...... 182
Statistics, Design Info............................. 188
Symbol Pins, Part Properties................. 214
Symbol, Part Properties ......................... 213
Wire, Wire Properties ............................ 218
Wire, Wire Selection Mask ................... 292
Tango
Tango designs
The Net Section
translating ..............................................383
Tango netlist format................................397
Tango Series II ASCII Files (*.s01) ..........21
Tango Series II Files
loading......................................................21
Technology Files .........................................188
temporary macro ................................363, 365
text
flipping...............................................227, 278
jump to (searching for text) ..................254
justification .......................227, 229, 244, 277
location ......................................................227
properties..................................................226
rotating ......................................227, 277, 278
style
adding .....................................................314
default styles .........................................314
deleting...................................................315
display options......................................317
display TrueType ..................................317
properties ..............................................315
renaming ................................................315
stroke font properties .........................316
TrueType fonts......................................316
zooming/panning ....................................278
Text Style, Options command .................314
Text, Place command .................................275
Tile, Window command ............................373
title sheets ......................................................98
adding ........................................................293
design borders ...........................................98
setting up.....................................................24
title blocks, defined ..................................99
using a standard title sheet ...................100
zones, defined............................................99
toolbars
Command Toolbar ..............................8, 256
Custom Toolbar ...........................................9
docked toolbar, defined ............................7
DocTool Toolbar....................................9, 10
floating toolbar, defined ............................7
moving a toolbar..........................................7
Placement Toolbar ..............................8, 256
showing or hiding a toolbar......................7
touching block
defined.........................................................83
Appendix d: Index
translating
Tango designs.......................................... 383
tutorials
generating reports and netlists...............69
printing a design ........................................72
setting up a design ....................................23
verifying a design.......................................63
working with objects ................................32
type swapping............................................. 213
-Uunderscored letter, defined .........................6

Undo, Edit command ................................ 201
Undo, shortcut command........................ 381
unhighlight .................................................. 130
an attached net................................ 130, 240
parts ........................................................... 129
Unhighlight All, Edit command............... 238
Unhighlight, Edit command..................... 238
units of measurement
changing ................................................... 293
choosing a scale .........................................28
User s Guide
about the guide ............................................2
using
Edit Nets dialog ..........................................95
title sheets
custom ................................................... 102
global...................................................... 100
standard ................................................. 100
Utils Commands......................................... 329
Customize ................................................ 352
ERC ............................................................. 334
Export ECO ............................................... 340
Find Errors ................................................ 337
Force Update ........................................... 333
Generate Netlist .............................. 124, 342
Import ECOs ............................................ 339
InterPlace/PCS ......................................... 352
Module Wizard........................................ 345
P-CAD Library Executive........................ 352
P-CAD Pattern Editor.............................. 352
P-CAD PCB ............................................... 351
P-CAD Symbol Editor ............................. 352
Record ECOs............................................ 338
Rename Net.............................................. 343
Renumber................................................. 329
413
Appendix d: Index
The Net Section
Resolve Hierarchy....................................344
Shortcut Directory...................................351
-VView Commands.........................................251
All 252
Ascend........................................................255
Center ........................................................252
Command Toolbar ..............................8, 256
Custom Toolbar ...................................9, 256
Descend.....................................................255
DocToolbar ...................................................9
Extent..........................................................251
Jump Location ..........................................253
Jump Text...................................................254
Last ..............................................................251
Placement Toolbar...............................8, 256
Prompt Line...............................................256
Redraw .......................................................251
Snap to Grid..............................................257
Status Line .................................................257
Toolbar...........................................................7
Zoom Out..................................................252
Zoom Window..........................................252
view ECO file................................................341
viewing
errors in a design .......................................65
-WWindow Commands ..................................373

1,2 (other windows).................................374
Arrange Icons ...........................................373
New Window ............................................373
Window Cascade .....................................373
414
Window Tile ............................................. 373

wire
adding to nets .......................................... 264
orthogonal modes .................................. 264
properties ................................................. 218
resizing ........................................................ 89
selection criteria...................................... 292
setting wire width ................................... 219
width .......................................................... 219
Wire Properties
Net tab ....................................................... 219
Text Style button ..................................... 219
Wire, Place command ............................... 263
working with objects ................................... 77
workspace
defined ........................................................ 10
setting size.................................................. 23
setting the autopan percent display ..... 17
setting the current zoom factor............. 17
size ............................................................. 293
-ZZones
zone intelligence, defined ...................... 99
zones, defined ........................................... 99
zoom
current zoom factor, defined ................. 17
in and out.................................................... 31
zoom factor, defined.............................. 295
zoom window key................................... 381
zooming, key............................................ 379
Zoom Out, View command ..................... 252
Zoom Window, View command ............. 252

PCAD Schematic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCAD Schematic

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PCAD Schematic

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Schematic Entry

Introducing P-CAD Schematic

Installation and Setup

P-CAD Schematic Basics

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Deleting a Sheet ........................................................................................................ 20

Schematic Design Tutorials

Working with Objects

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Selecting Highlighted Objects ....................................................................................80

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Parts Usage Report..................................................................................................119

Verifying a Schematic Design

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Design Technology Parameters

chapter 11 Simulating a Circuit Design

chapter 12 File Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

File Print Setup................................................................................................................177

chapter 13 Edit Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Symbol Pins Tab ..................................................................................................... 214

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

chapter 14 View Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

chapter 15 Place Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

chapter 16 Rewire Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Class to Class Tab .................................................................................................. 308

chapter 18 Library Commands

chapter 19 Utils Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Utils Export ECOs ...........................................................................................................340

chapter 20 Simulate Commands

chapter 22 Macro Commands

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

chapter 23 Window Commands

chapter 24 Help Commands

appendix a Keyboard Reference

appendix b Translating Tango-Schematic Designs

appendix c P-CAD System Messages

appendix d The Tango Netlist Format

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Introducing P-CAD Schematic

P-CAD Schematic Features

User-definable sheet, part, and net attributes.

Support for Design Technology Parameters.

Cross probe between P-CAD Schematic and P-CAD PCB design.

Advanced bi-directional ECO capabilities.

Automatic junction and bus entry placement.

Single mouse-click (Click) access to edit and select options.

Support for hierarchical schematic designs.

Standard and user-defined schematic sheet sizes.

P-CAD Schematic Users Guide

Chapter 1: Introducing P-CAD Schematic

About the Users Guide

Extensive print and report options.

About the Users Guide